Canon C3480I Specifications

Canon C3480I Specifications
Sending and Facsimile Guide
Please read this guide before operating this product.
After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference.
ENG
0
Ot¯
Color imageRUNNER
C3480/C3480i
C3080/C3080i
C2550
Sending and Facsimile
Guide
Manuals for the Machine
The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
The manuals supplied with optional equipment are included in the list below. Depending on the system
configuration and product purchased, some manuals may not be needed.
Guides with this symbol are printed manuals.
• Quick Reference for Basic Operations
• Learn How to Use Your Machine
The Tutorial CD is a teaching aid, designed to help you learn the various
functions of the machine.
• Precautions for Using Your Machine
• Troubleshooting
• Specifications
• Basic Operations
• Copying and Mail Box Instructions
• Sending and Fax Instructions
• Setting Up the Network Connection and
Installing the CD-ROM Software
• Remote User Interface Instructions
• Network Connectivity and Setup Instructions
• Color Network ScanGear Installation and
Instructions
• PS/PCL/UFR II Printer and Direct Printing
Instructions
• PCL Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
CD-ROM
Guides with this symbol are included on the accompanying CD-ROM.
(See footnote on the next page.)
Easy Operation Guide
Tutorial CD
CD-ROM
Support Guide
Reference Guide
CD-ROM
Copying and Mail Box
Guide
CD-ROM
Sending and Facsimile
Guide
(This Document)
CD-ROM
Network Quick Start Guide
Remote UI Guide
CD-ROM
Network Guide
CD-ROM
Color Network ScanGear
User's Guide
CD-ROM
PS/PCL/UFR II Printer
Guide
CD-ROM
PCL Driver Guide
CD-ROM
• PS Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
• UFR II Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
• Mac OS X PS Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
• Mac OS X UFR II Printer Driver Installation
and Instructions
• Fax Driver Installation and Instructions
• Installing MEAP Applications and Using the
Login Service
PS Driver Guide
CD-ROM
UFR II Driver Guide
CD-ROM
Mac PS Driver Guide
CD-ROM
Mac UFR II Driver Guide
CD-ROM
Fax Driver Guide
CD-ROM
MEAP SMS Administrator
Guide
CD-ROM
• To view the manual in PDF format, Adobe Reader/Acrobat Reader/Acrobat is required. If Adobe Reader/Acrobat Reader/Acrobat is not installed on
your system, please download it from the Adobe Systems Incorporated website (http://www.adobe.com).
• The machine illustration on the cover may differ slightly from your machine.
How This Manual Is Organized
Chapter 1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
Chapter 2
Basic Sending Methods
Chapter 3
Basic Scanning Features
Chapter 4
Special Scanning Features
Chapter 5
Sending Documents
Chapter 6
Receiving Documents
Chapter 7
Special Fax Functions
Chapter 8
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
Chapter 9
Customizing Communications Settings
Chapter 10 Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
Chapter 11 System Manager Settings
Chapter 12 Printing Communication Reports
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting
Chapter 14 Appendix
Includes the report samples, glossary, specifications, and index.
Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our
products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
How To Use This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Keys Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Displays Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Illustrations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv
Abbreviations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Legal Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
FCC (Federal Communications Commission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Users in the U.S.A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Users in Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xx
Utilisation au Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Super G3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Important Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Telephone Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxv
Chapter 1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER
C3480/C3480i/C3080/C3080i/C2550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Setting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Selecting the Type of Telephone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Registering Your Machine's Fax Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Registering Sender Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Registering the Unit's Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Flow of Sending Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Sending Fax Documents Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Using the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Using the Stop Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Using the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
v
E-mail, I-Fax, Sending to a File Server, or Storing in a User Inbox. . . . . .1-37
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39
Chapter 2
Basic Sending Methods
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Specifying a Fax Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Specifying an E-Mail Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Specifying an I-Fax Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Specifying a File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Using the Browse Key (NetWare (IPX)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Using the Host Search Key (Windows (SMB)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Specifying a User Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Sending Documents to Yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Specifying Registered Destinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Using the Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Using the One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Using the Favorites Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Using a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Setting Cc and Bcc Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Checking/Changing a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Erasing a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Registering New Destinations Using the Register Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Chapter 3
Basic Scanning Features
Selecting a Scan Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
2-Sided Original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Different Size Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Document Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Specifying the Document Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Registering the Specified Document Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Manual Exposure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Original Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Automatic Exposure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Changing the Zoom Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
vi
Preset Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Zoom by Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Auto Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Changing Color Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Chapter 4
Special Scanning Features
What are Special Features? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
2-Page Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Original Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Book Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Binding Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Job Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Image Quality Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Remove Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Prevent Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
User Preset Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Storing Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Naming a User Preset Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Erasing Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Chapter 5
Sending Documents
Sending Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Sending a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Sending an E-Mail Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Sending an I-Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Sending a Job to a File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Sending a Job to a User Inbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Delaying a Send Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Job Done Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Previewing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Stamping Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Setting the File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Sending a Compact PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Trace & Smooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Sending a Searchable PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Encrypting PDF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
vii
Adding a Digital Signature to a PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Adding a Device Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Adding a User Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Job Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Chapter 6
Receiving Documents
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Receiving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Processing Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Setting the Memory Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Forwarding Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Erasing Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Available Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Chapter 7
Special Fax Functions
Sending with a Subaddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Using a PIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Setting PIN Code Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Dialing with a PIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Fax Information Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Chapter 8
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Checking Send Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Changing the Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Resending a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Printing the Send Job Status/Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking the Status of Fax Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Checking Fax Job Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Printing the Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Checking Receive Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Printing the Receive Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Checking the Arrival of a Receive Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Checking the Status of Jobs That Have Been Forwarded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Chapter 9
Customizing Communications Settings
What are Additional Functions?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
viii
Communications Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Automatic Document Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Number of Retry Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Standard Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Favorites Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Registering a Favorites Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Naming a Favorites Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Registering a Comment for a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Erasing a Favorites Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Displaying Confirmation for Favorites Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
PDF Compression Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
PDF (OCR) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
PDF (Trace & Smooth) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Confirming the Device Signature Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Checking a User Signature Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Initial Send Screen Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Printing the TX Terminal ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With WebDAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Initializing TX Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
2-Sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Paper Drawer Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Reducing a Received Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
2 On 1 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Gamma Value for YCbCr Received Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Adjusting the Alarm and Monitor Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
ECM Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Pause Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Auto Redial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
ECM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Registering the Fax Number for an Additional Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Registering the Unit Name for an Additional Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Selecting the Telephone Line Type for an Additional Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Selecting the Line for Sending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
ix
Chapter 10 Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
Address Book Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
About the Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Storing New Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Fax Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
E-Mail Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
I-Fax Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
File Server Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Group Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19
Addresses Obtained via a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-23
Editing Address Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30
Erasing Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33
Naming an Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-34
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-35
Erasing One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-39
Chapter 11 System Manager Settings
System Settings Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
Communications Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
E-Mail Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
I-Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
Memory RX Inbox Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11
Setting the Memory RX Inbox Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11
Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Memory Lock Start Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Memory Lock End Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Restricting the Send Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-17
Address Book Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-17
Access Number Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-18
Restricting New Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-18
Setting Whether to Allow Sending Using the Fax Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-19
Setting to Confirm Entered Fax Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-20
Restricting the Domains to Which E-mail/I-Fax Documents Can Be Sent . .11-21
Allowing the Sending of PDF Documents With Expired Certificates . . . . . .11-22
Setting to Always Add a Device Signature to PDF Documents . . . . . . . . . .11-23
x
Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Storing Forwarding Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions . 11-38
Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44
Forwarding Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44
Erasing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
Printing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
LDAP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
Registering an LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
Changing an LDAP Server Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51
Deleting an LDAP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51
Registering/Editing LDAP Search Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52
Printing LDAP Server Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53
Chapter 12 Printing Communication Reports
Report Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Specifying Report Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Send TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Fax TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Fax Activity Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Fax RX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Printing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
User's Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Printing the User's Data List for send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Printing the User's Data List for fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting
When Problems Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Sending Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Receiving Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Other Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Self-Diagnostic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
List of Error Codes without Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Questions & Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
xi
Chapter 14 Appendix
Report and List Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Send Job List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Send TX Report/Send Error TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Fax Multi TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
Fax RX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-8
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-9
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-11
Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-13
Forwarding Conditions List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-15
Registered LDAP Server List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-16
Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17
User's Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-19
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-21
Universal Color Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-21
Super G3 FAX Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23
Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-24
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-25
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-38
xii
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Canon Color imageRUNNER C3480/C3480i/C3080/C3080i/
C2550. Please read this manual thoroughly before operating the machine to familiarize
yourself with its capabilities, and to make the most of its many functions. After reading this
manual, store it in a safe place for future reference.
How To Use This Manual
Symbols Used in This Manual
The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions,
handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.
.
WARNING
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or
injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely,
always pay attention to these warnings.
.
CAUTION
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to
persons, or damage to property if not performed correctly. To use the
machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read
these items carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid
damage to the machine.
.
NOTE
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional
explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly
recommended.
xiii
Keys Used in This Manual
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be
pressed are expressed in this manual:
• Touch
Panel Display Keys: [Key Name]
Examples:
• Control
[Cancel]
[Done]
Panel Keys:
Examples:
Key Icon (Key Name)
(Start)
(Stop)
Hereafter, the following name substitutions take place:
• Transmission/Sending:
TX
• Reception/Receiving:
RX
Displays Used in This Manual
Screen shots of the touch panel display used in this manual are those taken when
the following optional equipment is attached to the Color imageRUNNER C3480i:
the Super G3 FAX Board, Finisher-Z1, and Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3.
Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options, are not
displayed on the touch panel display.
The keys which you should press are marked with a
, as shown below.
When multiple keys can be pressed on the touch panel display, all keys are marked.
Select the keys which suit your needs.
Press [Address Book].
Press this key for operation.
xiv
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Illustrations used in this manual are those displayed when the Color
imageRUNNER C3480i has the following optional equipment attached to it: the
Finisher-Z1 and Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3.
Abbreviations Used in This Manual
In this manual, product names and model names are abbreviated as follows:
Microsoft Windows 98 operating system:
Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition operating system:
Windows Me
Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system:
Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP operating system:
Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating system:
Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows Vista operating system:
Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows operating system:
Windows
Novell NetWare:
NetWare
xv
Trademarks
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their
respective owners.
xvi
Legal Notices
FCC (Federal Communications Commission)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate, radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the Operator's Manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his
own expense.
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with Class A limits in Subpart B of Part
15 of the FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise
specified in the manual. If you make such changes or modifications, you could be
required to stop operation of the equipment.
Users in the U.S.A.
Preinstallation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See Chapter 9,
"Appendix," in the Reference Guide for specific dimensions and weight.
B. Order Information
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be used. If the optional
Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, a dual telephone line (touch-tone or
rotary) can be used.
2. Order an RJ11-C telephone wall jack (USOC), which should be installed by the
telephone company. If the RJ11-C wall jack is not present, telephone/facsimile
operation is not possible.
xvii
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company's business
representative. The line should be a regular voice grade line or an equivalent
one. Use one line per unit. If the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed, you can use a dual line.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line
-orIDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas
NOTE
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2500
(touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX
(Private Branch eXchange) unit without "Call Waiting" can be used with your facsimile
unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send nonstandard
signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a
facsimile error.
C. Power Requirements
The machine should be connected to a standard 120 volt AC, three-wire grounded
outlet only.
Do not connect this machine to an outlet or power line shared with other appliances
that cause "electrical noise." Air conditioners, electric typewriters, copiers, and
machines of this sort generate electrical noise that often interferes with
communications equipment and the sending and receiving of documents.
Connection of the Equipment
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements
adopted by the ACTA. On the rear panel of this equipment is a label that contains,
among other information, a product identifier in the format of US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) is used to determine the number of devices
that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line
may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but
not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the
number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total
RENs, contact the local telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the
product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented
by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 10 is a REN of 1.0).
An FCC compliant telephone line cable and modular plug is provided with this
equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network
or premise wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant.
xviii
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone
company. Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs.
In Case of Equipment Malfunction
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures
described in this guide or the Reference Guide, disconnect the equipment from the
telephone line cable and disconnect the power cord. The telephone line cable
should not be reconnected or the main power switch turned ON until the problem is
completely resolved. Users should contact their local authorized Canon Facsimile
Service Dealer for the servicing of equipment.
If your equipment malfunctions, please contact your local authorized Canon dealer
from whom you purchased the equipment (if under warranty), or with whom you
have a servicing contract. If you are not sure who to contact, and have both
purchased and are using the equipment in the U.S.A., please refer to the
"SUPPORT" page on Canon U.S.A.'s Web site (http://www.usa.canon.com).
Rights of the Telephone Company
If this equipment (Color imageRUNNER C3480/C3480i/C3080/C3080i/C2550)
causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may temporarily
disconnect service. The telephone company also retains the right to make changes
in facilities and services that may affect the operation of this equipment. When such
changes are necessary, the telephone company is required to give adequate prior
notice to the user. However, if advance notice is not possible, the telephone
company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, the customer will be
advised of his/her right to file a complaint with the FCC if he/she believes it is
necessary.
WARNING
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a
telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or
other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number
of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual.
NOTE
To program this information into your machine, complete the procedure for registering
your name, unit's telephone number, time, and date in Chapter 1. (For instructions on
entering characters, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.)
xix
Users in Canada
Preinstallation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See Chapter 9,
"Appendix," in the Reference Guide for specific dimensions and weight.
B. Order Information
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be used. If the optional
Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, a dual telephone line (touch-tone or
rotary) can be used.
2. Order a CA11A modular jack which should be installed by the telephone
company. If the CA11A jack is not present, installation cannot occur.
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company's business
representative. The line should be a regular voice grade line or an equivalent
one. Use one line per unit. If the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed, you can use a dual line.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line
or
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas
NOTE
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2500
(touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX
(Private Branch eXchange) unit without "Call Waiting" can be used with your facsimile
unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send nonstandard
signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a
facsimile error.
C. Power Requirements
The power outlet should be a three-prong grounded receptacle (Single or Duplex).
It should be independent from copiers, heaters, air conditioners, or any electric
equipment that is thermostatically controlled. The rated value is 115 volts and 15
amperes. The CA11A modular jack should be relatively close to the power outlet to
facilitate installation.
Notice
• This
xx
product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
• Before
installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In
some cases, the company's inside wiring associated with a single line individual
service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone
extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent deterioration of service in some situations.
• The
Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of
devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an
interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
• The
REN of this product is 1.0.
• Repairs
to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian
maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made
by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the
equipment.
• Users
should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground
connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe
system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly
important in rural areas.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should
contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as
appropriate.
NOTE
This equipment complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class A limits.
Utilisation au Canada
Conditions à Remplir Préalablement à L'installation d'un Télécopieur
Canon
A. Emplacement
Prévoir une table, un meuble, ou un bureau suffisamment solide et de taille
appropriée (voir le chapitre 9, Annexe (Appendix), du Guide de référence
(Reference Guide) pour les indications de poids et dimensions).
xxi
B. Installation téléphonique
1. Une seule ligne téléphonique (tonalités ou impulsions) doit être utilisée. Si la
Carte FAX (Super G3) Multi Ligne en option est installée, il est possible d'utiliser
une ligne téléphonique double (tonalités ou impulsions).
2. Il faut commander un jack modulaire CA11A qui sera installé par la compagnie
téléphonique. Sans ce jack, la mise en place serait impossible.
3. Si vous vous abonnez à une nouvelle ligne, demandez une ligne d'affaires
normale de qualité téléphonique courante ou équivalente. Prenez un
abonnement d'une ligne par appareil. Si la Carte FAX (Super G3) Multi Ligne en
option est installée, il est possible d'utiliser une ligne téléphonique double.
Ligne automatique interurbaine
ou
Ligne automatique internationale
(si vous communiquez avec les pays étrangers)
NOTE
Canon vous conseille d'utiliser une ligne individuelle conforme aux normes industrielles,
à savoir: ligne téléphonique 2500 (pour appareil à clavier) ou 500 (pour appareil à
cadran/impulsions). Il est également possible de raccorder ce télécopieur à un système
téléphonique à poussoirs car la plupart de ces systèmes émettent des signaux d'appel
non normalisés ou des codes spéciaux qui risquent de perturber le fonctionnement du
télécopieur.
C. Condition d'alimentation
Raccordez le télécopieur à une prise de courant plus terre à trois branches, du type
simple ou double, et qui ne sert pas à alimenter un copieur, un appareil de
chauffage, un climatiseur ou tout autre appareil électrique à thermostat.
L'alimentation doit être de 115 volts et 15 ampères. Pour faciliter l'installation, le
jack CA11A doit être assez proche de la prise de courant.
Remarques
• Le
présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables
d'Industrie Canada.
• Avant
d'installer cet appareil, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer qu'il est permis de le
connecter à l'équipement de la compagnie de télécommunication locale et doit
installer cet appareil en utilisant une méthode de connexion autorisée. Il se peut
qu'il faille étendre la circuiterie intérieure de la ligne individuelle d'abonné, qui a
été installée par la compagnie, au moyen d'un jeu de connecteurs homologués
(rallonge téléphonique).
L'attention de l'utilisateur est attirée sur le fait que le respect des conditions
mentionnées ci-dessus ne constitue pas une garantie contre les dégradations de
qualité du service dans certaines circonstances.
xxii
• L'indice
d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de
terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La
terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de
dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d'indices d' équivalence de la
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas 5.
• Le
nombre d'équivalents sonnerie (REN) de ce produit est 1.0.
• Les
réparations sur un appareil certifié doivent être faites par une société
d'entretien canadienne autorisée par le Gouvernement canadien et désignée par
le fournisseur. Toute réparation ou modification que pourrait faire I'utilisateur de
cet appareil, ou tout mauvais fonctionnement, donne à la compagnie de
télécommunication le droit de débrancher I'appareil.
• Pour
sa propre protection, I'utilisateur doit s'assurer que les prises de terre de
I'appareil d'alimentation, les lignes téléphoniques et les tuyaux métalliques
internes, s'il y en a, sont bien connectés entre eux. Cette précaution est
particulièrement importante dans les zones rurales.
CAUTION
Au lieu d'essayer de faire ces branchements eux-mêmes, les utilisateurs sont
invités à faire appel à un service d'inspection faisant autorité en matière
d'électricité ou à un électricien, selon le cas.
NOTE
Respecte les limites de la classe A de la NMB-003 du Canada.
Super G3
Super G3 is a phrase used to describe the new generation of fax
machines that use ITU-T V.34 standard 33.6 Kbps* modems. Super
G3 High Speed Fax machines allow transmission times of
approximately 3 seconds* per page which results in reduced
telephone line charges.
* Approximately 3 seconds per page fax transmission time based on
CCITT/ITU-T No.1 Chart, (JBIG, Standard Mode) at 33.6 Kbps
modem speed. The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
currently supports 28.8 Kbps modem speeds or slower, depending
on telephone line conditions.
xxiii
Copyright
Copyright 2007 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any
information storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of
Canon Inc.
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS
MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF
ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF
THIS MATERIAL.
xxiv
Important Safety Instructions
Please read these "Important Safety Instructions" thoroughly before operating the
machine. As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user or other
persons or destruction of property, always pay attention to these instructions. Also,
since it may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation
unless otherwise specified in the manual. Improper operation or use of this
machine could result in personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair
that may not be covered under your Limited Warranty.
Telephone Equipment
WARNING
When using telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be
followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the
following:
1. Do not use this machine near water (i.e., near a bathtub, kitchen sink, or laundry
tub), or in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
2. Avoid using the telephone during an electrical storm, as there may be a remote
risk of electric shock from lightning.
3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
xxv
xxvi
Introduction to Sending and
Fax Functions
1
CHAPTER
This chapter is an introduction to the Send function.
What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3480/C3480i/C3080/C3080i/C2550 . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Setting the Display Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Selecting the Type of Telephone Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Setting the Current Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Registering Your Machine's Fax Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Registering Sender Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Registering the Unit's Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Flow of Sending Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Sending Fax Documents Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Using the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36
Using the Stop Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37
Using the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37
1-1
What This Machine Can Do
1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
All the elements you will ever need in a color digital
multitasking machine.
The Color imageRUNNER C3480/C3480i/C3080/C3080i/C2550
is packed with various send functions.
Equipped with features that meet the needs of document work in
a digitized office, the Color imageRUNNER C3480/C3480i/
C3080/C3080i/C2550 represents the ultimate in digital
multitasking machines.
Diverse Sending Methods
You can easily scan paper documents and
send them to one or multiple recipients via
fax, e-mail, or I-fax, bringing to your work
environment increased efficiency in the
arena of document exchange. The ability to
send documents to FTP, SMB, NetWare,
and WebDAV file servers also serves to
help digitize paper documents for
convenient data access and management.
Sending documents via fax is available only if
the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3
Multi-Line Fax Board is installed.
1-2
What This Machine Can Do
Fax
Inbox
E-mail
File Server
I-Fax
Super G3 Fax Function
This machine's Super G3 fax function is
compatible with most Super G3 fax
machines used in office environments.
Compared to ordinary fax machines, Super
G3 enables high-speed fax transmissions,
thus reducing transmission costs. You can
add an additional line if the optional Super
G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed.
1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
Send
This function is available only if the optional
Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax
Board is installed.
Increased Security with Subaddress Transmission
This machine's fax function is compatible
with ITU-T (International
Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector)
standard subaddress features. As long as
the remote party's fax machine supports
subaddress fax transmissions, you can
send or receive documents with increased
security by attaching a subaddress and a
password to all of your fax transactions.
Subaddress
Password
This function is available only if the optional
Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax
Board is installed.
ECM Function for High Quality Images
This machine's fax function is compatible
with ECM (Error Correction Mode). ECM
corrects errors and distorted or poor quality
fax transmissions that arise from line noise.
It also enables you to send or receive
high-quality faxes even if the condition of
your telephone line is not ideal.
This function is available only if the optional
Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax
Board is installed.
What This Machine Can Do
1-3
File Formats for Every Need
You can send documents in a variety of file
formats, including TIFF, JPEG, and PDF.
This gives you the freedom to send
documents in a manner that is best suited
to the purpose of the document, as well as
the recipient's document handling
environment.
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
Original
PDF
TIFF
JPEG
Flexible Scan Features
This machine offers a variety of convenient
scanning features, such as the scanning of
two-sided and book originals, as well as the
ability to merge and send documents that
are scanned separately. You can also set
the exposure, color mode, and document
size to match the type of original that you
are scanning. In addition, you can store
preferred scan settings and retrieve them at
any time.
Originals
Send/Fax
Preview Function
The Preview function enables you to check
the contents of documents before sending
them. This is useful in preventing mistakes.
Original
Preview
Instant Address Search with LDAP
You can search for addresses stored on
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol) servers on the network and use
them as recipients for send jobs or store
them in the Address Book.
LDAP Server
[email protected]
012XXXXXXX
1-4
What This Machine Can Do
Receiving Faxes/I-Faxes in Memory
Receiving faxes in memory is available only if
the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3
Multi-Line Fax Board is installed.
Memory
RX Inbox Memory
Lock
Print
Send
1
I-Fax Reception
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
Received fax/I-fax documents can be
stored in the Memory RX Inbox instead of
being printed. You can check the sender
information and the number of pages that
each document contains before printing it or
forwarding it to another destination.
Fax Reception
Automatic Forwarding
The machine can be set to automatically
forward received fax/I-fax documents that
match the specified forwarding conditions to
any destination using the desired send
settings. You can forward fax/I-fax
documents to other machines (relay
function) or store received documents that
are confidential in Confidential Fax Inboxes.
Automatic forwarding can be set to activate
at a specified time. Since received
documents that do not match the
forwarding conditions can also be
forwarded to any desired destination, this
function can be used to sort and deliver
received fax/I-fax documents to the
appropriate destinations.
Forward
Confidential
Fax Inbox
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3
Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, the machine
can receive faxes and forward received fax
documents to fax machines.
What This Machine Can Do
1-5
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3480/C3480i/
C3080/C3080i/C2550
1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
If you press [Send], the Send Basic Features screen appears. The Send function
enables you to scan documents and send them to specified destinations via fax,
e-mail, or I-fax, save them to a file server, or store them in an inbox to process them
at a later date. You can also send documents to multiple destinations
simultaneously using various sending methods, such as e-mail and I-fax.
Depending on the installed option, the Send Basic Features screen is displayed as
follows:
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or
Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is not
installed
1-6
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or
Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3480/C3480i/C3080/C3080i/C2550
Original
Inbox
Scan
I-Fax
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
E-mail
File Server
Fax*1
Group
E-mail
I-Fax
*1 Available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed.
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3480/C3480i/C3080/C3080i/C2550
1-7
The Flow of the sending is as follows.
Place your originals
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
Specify New
Address: p. 2-2
Specify the registered destinations.
You can store destinations from
the Additional Functions screen.
Sending to a fax
Sending to an e-mail
address
Sending to an I-fax
Sending to a file server
Sending to a User Inbox
Send to yourself
Specify the destinations
via a server: p. 2-28
You can store servers from
the Additional Functions screen.
When the destination is registered in the
Address Book: p. 2-24
When the address is
registered in the Favorites
Buttons: p. 2-27
When the address is
registered in the One-touch
Buttons: p. 2-26
[Option]
Scan Settings
[Send Settings]
Send Settings
(Start)
IMPORTANT
Network settings must be specified to be able to send scanned documents to an e-mail
address, an I-fax address, or a file server. (See the Network Guide.)
1-8
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3480/C3480i/C3080/C3080i/C2550
■ Send Basic Features Screen
The screen below, which appears when [Send] is selected, is called the Send Basic
Features screen.
h
i
d
b
c
k
l
m
e
1
j
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
a
n
f
g
o
p
j Cc Bcc
a Destination List
Displays a list of destinations.
b Address Book
Press to select a destination from the Address
Book.
c Network Address Book
Press to search a destination from the LDAP
server.
Press to specify the e-mail address as a Cc or
Bcc destination.
k Recall
Press to recall previously set send jobs,
including the destinations, scan settings, and
send settings.
l 2-Sided Original
Press to scan both sides of the original.
d Details
Press to check or change the destination
information selected from the destination list.
e New Address Tab
m Different Size Originals
Press to scan different sized originals together.
n File Format
Press to specify a destination not stored in the
Address Book.
f Favorites Tab
Press to select the file format of the document
you are going to send (PDF, JPEG, or TIFF).
o Send Settings
Press to recall the destinations and settings
stored in a favorites button.
g One-touch Tab
Press to recall the destinations stored in a
one-touch button.
h Scan Settings drop-down list
Press to select the scan mode.
i Erase
Press to set the send settings. You can specify
various settings, such as setting the document to
be sent at a specified time, entering a subject for
an e-mail or an I-fax, or entering the sender's
name for fax.
p Register
Press to register new destinations in the Address
Book, one-touch buttons, or favorites buttons
from the Send Basic Features screen.
Press to erase the destination displayed in the
destination list.
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3480/C3480i/C3080/C3080i/C2550
1-9
■ Scan Settings Screen
The screen below, which appears when you press [Option] from the Scan Settings
drop-down list, is called the Scan Settings screen. Display this screen to set the scan
settings for sending documents.
a
f
b
g
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
c
h
i
j
d
e
k
a Color Mode drop-down list
Press to select the color mode for scanning.
b Direct
Press to return the scan ratio to 100%.
c Copy Ratio
Press to scan originals at a different scan (zoom)
ratio.
d Scanning Mode drop-down list
Press to select a stored scan mode and
resolution.
e Store/Erase
Press to store or erase a scan mode.
f Resolution drop-down list
Press to select the resolution.
1-10
g Document Size Select
Press to select the size of the original that you
want to scan.
h Scan Exposure
Press [ ] or [ ] to manually adjust the scan
exposure. Press [A] (Auto) to select or cancel the
automatic scan exposure adjustment.
i Original Type drop-down list
Press to select the type of original (Text/Photo,
Photo, or Text) that you are going to scan.
j Special Features
Press to select and use the Special Features
modes available for scanning.
k System Monitor
Press to check the status or details of a send or
receive job, or to cancel a job.
Overview of the Color imageRUNNER C3480/C3480i/C3080/C3080i/C2550
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
According to recent amendments to the FCC (Federal Communications
Commission) rules governing the use of facsimile equipment in the United States,
the following sender information must be printed on every facsimile transmission:
• Your
fax number
• Your personal name or company name
• Time and date of transmission
IMPORTANT
• If you attempt to use the machine without registering the necessary information correctly,
the machine may not function properly.
• Network settings must be specified to send scanned documents to an e-mail address, an
I-fax address, or a file server. (See the Network Guide.)
NOTE
To send documents to a fax destination, the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3
Multi-Line Fax Board is required.
■ Setting the Telephone Line Type
To set the type of telephone line connected to the machine with the optional Super G3
FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board installed, check whether it is a rotary dial
(rotary pulse) or a touch-tone type and make the correct setting. (See "Selecting the Type
of Telephone Line," on p. 1-14.)
If you have added an additional line to the machine, perform the same registration
procedure for the additional line, too. (See "Selecting the Telephone Line Type for an
Additional Line," on p. 9-54.)
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
1-11
1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
This section describes the important setting registrations and procedures that must
be done before the machine is used for sending operations.
■ Registering the Sending Record
The sending record is printed at the top of every document you send via I-fax or fax to the
recipient.
The registered information is printed, as shown below. Depending upon the model of the
machine at the receiving side, this information may appear on the display while
communication is taking place.
1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
Date
Time
I-Fax Address
or
Fax Number
Sender's
Name (TTI)
11/12/2007 MON 15:00 FAX (404)XXX-XXXX CANON SALES
Destination
Name
Atlanta office
Page Number
001/001
Sender Information
• Date and Time
- The date and time of the transmission are recorded.
• I-Fax Address or Fax Number
- Your machine's I-fax address or fax number is recorded.
• Sender's Name (TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification))
- For fax documents, the name registered as the sender's name is recorded.
• Destination Name
- If you send an original and select a destination from the Address Book, the stored
destination's name appears on the sending record. (See "Storing New Addresses," on
p. 10-5.)
• Page Number
- The current page number out of the total number of pages of the original is recorded.
NOTE
• You can set the machine so that the sending record is not printed. However, for users in
the United States, this information must be printed at the top of every fax or I-fax
document that you send. Therefore, TX Terminal ID in TX Settings under <Common
Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) must
always be set to 'On'. (See "Printing the TX Terminal ID," on p. 9-31.)
• If the machine is set so that the sending record is printed at the top of the recording
paper, and not all of the items are registered, only the required registered items and the
total number of original pages are printed.
• To print the destination's name on the recipient's paper, set Display Destination Name in
TX Terminal ID in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'.
1-12
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
■ Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board
The optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board enables you to add an additional line. A dual
line can reduce the time it takes to send and receive documents. It is necessary to register
a separate telephone number for the additional line. (See "Registering the Fax Number for
an Additional Line," on p. 9-52.)
Phone Number
123XXXXXXX
1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
Line 1
TX/RX
Additional Phone Number
456XXXXXXX
Line 2
TX/RX
Line 1 (the standard line): Register the main fax line of the machine.
Line 2 (the additional line): Register an additional line to use when Line 1 is busy.
Setting the Display Language
If you decide to switch the display language, set Language Switch to 'On' before
entering characters.
If Language Switch is set to 'Off', and then you set it to 'On' after entering
characters, the characters may not be displayed correctly. In this case, either
re-enter the characters after setting Language Switch to 'On', or enter characters
with Language Switch set to 'Off'.
If Language Switch is set to 'On', some characters are restricted and cannot be
entered. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
1-13
Selecting the Type of Telephone Line
Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine.
If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to communicate with other machines.
Be sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct
setting.
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
IMPORTANT
The telephone line type you can select here is for line 1. To select the telephone line type
for an additional line, see "Selecting the Telephone Line Type for an Additional Line," on
p. 9-54.
NOTE
For this setting, the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
required.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [User Settings] under <Fax Settings> ➞ [Tel Line Type].
2
Select the type of telephone line ➞ press [OK].
If you do not know the telephone line type, call your telephone service provider
for details.
Setting the Current Date and Time
You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used
as standard timer settings for functions that require them.
• GMT:
• Time
GMT stands for Greenwich Mean Time.
Zone:
• Daylight
1-14
The standard time zones of the world are expressed
globally in terms of the difference in hours ( up to 12
hours) from GMT ( 0 hours). A time zone is a region
throughout which this time difference is the same.
Saving Time: In some countries, time is advanced throughout the
summer season. The period in which this is applied is
called "Daylight Saving Time."
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
NOTE
You can also specify to automatically synchronize the date and time with a server on the
network from the Additional Functions screen. (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP
Network," in the Network Guide.)
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Date
& Time Settings].
Enter the current date (month, day, year) and time using
(numeric keys).
-
Enter the month and the day using four digits (including zeros).
Enter all four digits of the year, and the time in 24-hour notation, as four digits
(including zeros) without a space.
Examples: May 6
7:05 a.m.
➞ 0506
➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
● If you are setting the Time Zone:
❑ Press the Time Zone drop-down list ➞ select the time zone where the machine
is located.
● If you are setting Daylight Saving Time:
❑ Press [On] ➞ [Start Date].
❑ Select the month and day from the Month and Day drop-down lists,
respectively.
❑ Press [-] or [+] to enter the time of day you want Daylight Saving Time to take
effect ➞ [OK].
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
1-15
1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
❑ Press [End Date] ➞ select the month, day, and time at which Daylight Saving
Time ends ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
If you set Daylight Saving Time, the machine automatically sets the standard time
of the machine one hour forward at the specified date and time.
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
3
Press [OK].
Registering Your Machine's Fax Number
You must store your machine's fax number. This number is printed on the document
that you fax to the receiving party.
The number may also be displayed on the touch panel display of the receiving
party's machine, depending on their type of machine.
IMPORTANT
The phone number you can register here is for line 1. To register the phone number for
an additional line, see "Registering the Fax Number for an Additional Line," on p. 9-52.
NOTE
For this setting, the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
required.
1
2
1-16
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [User Settings] under <Fax Settings> ➞ [Unit Telephone #].
Enter the unit's telephone number using
keys) ➞ press [OK].
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
-
(numeric
Details of each item are shown below.
[Space]:
Press to insert a space between the area code and the local fax
number.
[+]:
Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code,
and before the fax number.
[ ][ ]:
Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.
Registering Sender Names
For fax, you can register any name as the sender's name, such as the section or
department's name, or an individual's name.
The registered sender's name can be displayed on the touch panel display of the
receiving party's machine and/or printed at the top of the documents that you send
as the sender's information.
NOTE
• You can set to display and print the sender's name instead of the name stored as the
unit's name with the Sender's Names setting from the Send Settings screen. (See
"Sending a Fax," on p. 5-3.)
• For this setting, the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
required.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Sender's
Names (TTI)].
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
1-17
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
2
Select the number under which you want to register the
sender's name ➞ press [Register/Edit].
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
You can store up to 99 sender names (01 to 99).
To delete a stored sender's name, select the number under which the name is
registered ➞ press [Erase]. Only one sender name can be erased at a time.
3
Enter the sender's name ➞ press [OK].
Registering the Unit's Name
Your name or company's name must be registered as the unit's name (a
department name is optional).
For example:
• Your
name:
John Smith
• Company
name:
• Company
name and department: Canon-Accounting Dept.
Canon
When you send a document via e-mail, fax, or I-fax, the unit name that you
registered is displayed or printed as the sender's name at the recipient's machine.
Some fax models also display sender information on the touch panel display during
transmission.
1-18
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
1-19
1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
NOTE
• It is necessary to register a separate Unit Name if you have an additional line. See
"Registering the Unit Name for an Additional Line," on p. 9-53.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, the
unit name can be printed in the TX Terminal ID.
• If SDL or the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO is set as the
login service and you are sending an e-mail message:
- The e-mail address of the login user registered for SDL or the Local Device
Authentication user authentication system of SSO is displayed in the From field on the
e-mail recipient's machine, instead of the e-mail address registered in the Device
Information settings for this machine. (See "Sending an E-Mail Message," on p. 5-5.)
• If SDL or the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO is set as the
login service and you are sending an I-fax:
- The e-mail address that you registered in the Device Information settings for this
machine is displayed in the From field on the I-fax recipient's machine, and the e-mail
address of the login user registered for SDL or the Local Device Authentication user
authentication system of SSO is displayed in the Sender field. (See "Sending an I-Fax,"
on p. 5-9.)
• If the Domain Authentication user authentication system of SSO (including when
performing Domain Authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device
Authentication' user authentication system) is set as the login service and you are
sending an e-mail message:
- The e-mail address that you registered for Active Directory or imageWARE Accounting
Manager is displayed in the From field on the recipient's machine, instead of the e-mail
address that you registered in the Device Information settings for this machine. (See
"Sending an E-Mail Message," on p. 5-5.)
• If the Domain Authentication user authentication system of SSO (including when
performing Domain Authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device
Authentication' user authentication system) is set as the login service and you are
sending an I-fax:
- The e-mail address that you registered in the Device Information settings for this
machine is displayed in the From field, and the e-mail address that you registered for
Active Directory or imageWARE Accounting Manager is displayed in the Sender field on
the recipient's machine. (See "Sending an I-Fax," on p. 5-9.)
• If <Specify Authorized User Dest. Sender> in E-mail Settings in Communications
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the
e-mail address of the login user is displayed in the From field on the recipient's machine,
regardless of the login services. If <Specify Authorized User Dest. Sender> in E-mail
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the
e-mail address that you registered in the Device Information settings for this machine is
displayed in the From field on the recipient's machine.
• For instructions on storing your machine's e-mail address, see the Network Guide.
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Unit Name].
2
Enter a name ➞ press [OK].
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
1
1-20
Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine
Flow of Sending Operations
NOTE
• Before using the Send function, it is useful to read the following topics:
- Main power and control panel power (See Chapter 1, "Before You Start Using This
Machine," in the Reference Guide.)
- For instructions on entering characters using the keys displayed on the touch panel
display, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the Reference Guide.
- Routine maintenance (See Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance," in the Reference Guide.)
• The maximum number of send jobs that the machine can handle is 120, including jobs
with error codes. Among these, 64 fax jobs can be handled. However, the actual number
of send jobs that the machine can handle may be less than 120, depending on the
following conditions:
- Multiple documents are being sent at the same time
- Large documents are being sent
- A large amount of memory is being used for the inboxes
• You can print a report that contains the results of all send jobs. (See "Specifying Report
Settings," on p. 12-4.)
• If you are using a login service, it is necessary to log in to the machine with the
appropriate procedure for the login service you are using.
- If you are using the optional Card Reader-C1 to perform Department ID Management,
see Chapter 3, "Optional Equipment," in the Reference Guide.
- If you are using Department ID Management, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
- If you are using the SDL or SSO login service, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
Flow of Sending Operations
1-21
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
This section describes the flow of basic sending operations.
1
Press [Send].
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
The Send Basic Features Screen
2
Place your originals.
NOTE
For instructions on placing your originals, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
3
1-22
Specify the destinations.
Flow of Sending Operations
● If a destination is stored in the Address Book:
❑ Press [Address Book] ➞ select the desired destination. (See "Using the
Address Book," on p. 2-24.)
Flow of Sending Operations
1-23
1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
NOTE
• To send documents to a fax destination, the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super
G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is required.
• A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256
destinations, 64 new addresses, including those obtained via a server, can be
specified.) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each
destination is counted as a separate address.
• The icons that are displayed on the screen are:
: Group
: E-mail
: I-Fax
: File Server
: Inbox
: Fax
: Cc
: Bcc
● If a destination is not stored in the Address Book:
❑ Press [New Address] ➞ select a sending method ➞ enter the desired
destination. (See "Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab," on p.
2-2.)
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
NOTE
A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained via a server (User
Inboxes are not included in this count) can be specified at the same time.
● If a destination is stored in a One-Touch Button:
❑ Press [One-touch] ➞ select the one-touch button that contains the desired
destination. (See "Using the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-26.)
1-24
Flow of Sending Operations
● If a destination is stored in a Favorites Button:
❑ Press [Favorites] ➞ select the favorites button that contains the desired
destination. (See "Using the Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-27.)
NOTE
You can enlarge the Favorites Buttons display by pressing [ ]. (See "Initial Send
Screen Display," on p. 9-30.)
● If you want to specify a destination using a server:
❑ Press [Network Add.Book] ➞ search through the directory listing on the server
(LDAP) to specify the destination. (See "Using a Server," on p. 2-28.)
NOTE
A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained via a server (User
Inboxes are not included in this count) can be specified at the same time.
Flow of Sending Operations
1-25
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
● If you want to specify Cc or Bcc addresses:
❑ Press [Cc Bcc] ➞ specify the e-mail addresses. (See "Setting Cc and Bcc
Addresses," on p. 2-33.)
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
NOTE
• Only e-mail addresses can be specified as cc and bcc addresses.
• The maximum number of Cc and Bcc destinations that can be sent at one time is
64, including those obtained using New Address Tab or via a server (User Inboxes
are not included in this count). Group Addresses cannot be specified for [Cc] and
[Bcc].
4
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ select a scan
setting.
If the desired scan setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll through the
list.
1-26
Flow of Sending Operations
To change the Scan mode settings, select [Option] from the Scan Settings
drop-down list, and adjust the settings. (See "Scan Settings," on p. 3-4.)
IMPORTANT
When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections,
the machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan
the color originals in the Black mode under the following conditions. To avoid this,
set the color mode to 'Full Color'. (See "Full Color," on p. 3-22.)
- If the originals contain few color sections
- If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 3/8" (10 mm) from the
left edge) of the originals when placing the originals into the feeder
- If the originals contain light color densities
- If the color sections of the originals are close to black
NOTE
For instructions on setting the Scan mode, see "Selecting a Scan Mode," on p. 3-2.
Flow of Sending Operations
1-27
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
5
Press [File Format] ➞ select a file format for sending your
document.
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
This part of the procedure is not necessary if any one of the following is true:
• A fax number is specified as the destination
• An I-fax address is specified as the destination
• A User Inbox is specified as the destination
NOTE
• For instructions on setting the file format, see "Setting the File Format," on p. 5-23.
• The icons that are displayed on the screen are:
: Divide into Pages
: Trace and Smooth
: Compact
: OCR (Text Searchable)
: Encrypt
: Add Digital Signatures
1-28
Flow of Sending Operations
6
Press [Send Settings] ➞ specify the send settings.
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
Specify the Delayed Send, Job Done Notice, Preview, Stamp, and Direct
Sending modes, as necessary.
NOTE
• For instructions on specifying the Send Settings, see "Sending Methods," on p. 5-2.
• For instructions on setting the Delayed Send mode, see "Delaying a Send Job," on
p. 5-15.
• For instructions on setting the Job Done Notice, see "Job Done Notice," on p. 5-17.
• For instructions on setting the Preview mode, see "Previewing Originals," on p.
5-18.
• For instructions on setting the Stamp mode, see "Stamping Originals," on p. 5-20.
• For instructions on setting the Direct Sending mode, see "Sending a Fax," on p.
5-3.
7
Press [Done].
Flow of Sending Operations
1-29
8
Press
(Start).
If the following screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the touch panel
display ➞ press
(Start). When scanning is complete, press [Done].
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
If the following screen is displayed, press [OK] ➞ try scanning the original again
from the first page. Scanning may be possible if you set 'Low' for Sharpness, and
'Text' for the type of original.
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
IMPORTANT
The size of the original is detected automatically. However, if the output paper in
the recipient's machine is not equal to the scanned document size, the original
image may be reduced in size to match it.
NOTE
If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the
Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p.
5-18.)
1-30
Flow of Sending Operations
9
If you want to cancel sending, press
(Stop).
10
When scanning is complete, remove your originals.
Flow of Sending Operations
1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
NOTE
• You can press
(Stop) to cancel a send job that is being scanned.
• For instructions on canceling a send job, see "Canceling a Job," on p. 1-36.
• You can also cancel a send job from the System Monitor screen. (See "Using the
System Monitor Screen," on p. 1-37.)
1-31
Sending Fax Documents Manually
1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
This mode enables you to manually send fax documents after checking that the
destination is ready to receive fax transmissions.
IMPORTANT
• If the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, manual sending can only be
used for line 1.
• Manual sending enables you to send a document consisting of two or more pages only if
you use the feeder to send it. You can only send one page at a time when you place your
originals on the platen glass.
• If you cancel manual sending during transmission, the pages that have already been
scanned are sent. You can check how many pages have been sent to the destination by
printing a Fax Activity Report, or on the Log screen for Fax on the System Monitor
screen.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
1
1-32
Place your originals.
Sending Fax Documents Manually
2
Make sure that the machine is ready to send.
3
Press [New Address] ➞ [Fax].
4
Press [On-hook].
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
Sending Fax Documents Manually
1-33
5
Enter the recipient's fax number using
, and .
-
(numeric keys),
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you hear the dial tone before entering the fax number. If you enter
the fax number before hearing the dial tone, the call may not be connected, or an
incorrect number may be dialed.
NOTE
You can enter a maximum of 120 characters for the fax number.
● If you press [One-touch Buttons]:
❑ Select the desired one-touch button ➞ press [OK].
If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [ ] (One-touch
Button Number) ➞ enter the number for the desired one-touch button using
(numeric keys).
NOTE
For instructions on specifying addresses using the one-touch buttons, see "Using
the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-26.
1-34
Sending Fax Documents Manually
6
Make sure that you hear the other party or carrier signal (a
high-pitched tone).
The level of the dial tone can be adjusted by pressing [
] or [
].
You can enter an extension number after dialing the fax number.
7
Press
(Start).
Scanning starts and the document is sent.
During the transmission, the transaction number, destination's telephone number,
and page number are displayed in the message area.
Sending Fax Documents Manually
1-35
1
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
NOTE
• You can change the scan settings before sending your document. (See Chapter 3,
"Basic Scanning Features," and Chapter 4, "Special Scanning Features.")
• To cancel Manual Sending, press [End].
Canceling a Job
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
You can cancel a send job using the touch panel display, System Monitor screen, or
by pressing
(Stop) on the control panel.
Using the Touch Panel Display
You can cancel a send job by pressing [Cancel], while the job is being scanned.
1
2
Press [Cancel] on the pop-up screen that appears while the
machine is scanning.
A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to cancel a job
➞ press [Yes].
The send job is canceled.
3
1-36
Remove your originals.
Canceling a Job
Using the Stop Key
NOTE
You can press
1
2
Press
(Stop), while the job is being scanned.
(Stop) only to cancel a send job that is being scanned.
1
(Stop).
A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to cancel a job
➞ press [Yes].
The send job is canceled.
3
Remove your originals.
Using the System Monitor Screen
You can cancel a send job while it is waiting to be processed, or while it is being
sent.
E-mail, I-Fax, Sending to a File Server, or Storing in a User Inbox
1
Press [System Monitor].
Canceling a Job
1-37
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
You can cancel a send job by pressing
2
Press [Send].
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
3
Press [Status] ➞ select the send job that you want to cancel ➞
press [Cancel].
You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel
one job at a time.
If a job is in the process of being sent, it may not be canceled even if you press
[Cancel].
4
Press [Yes].
NOTE
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.
1-38
Canceling a Job
Fax
1
Press [System Monitor].
2
3
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
Press [Fax].
Press [Send Job Status] or [Received Job Status] ➞ select the
fax job that you want to cancel ➞ press [Cancel].
You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel
one job at a time.
If a job is in the process of being sent, it may not be canceled even if you press
[Cancel].
Canceling a Job
1-39
4
Press [Yes].
● To cancel a Sequential Broadcast:
❑ Verify the destinations of the fax job, press [Cancel All] or [Cancel Current Job].
If you do not want to cancel any job of the Sequential Broadcast, press
[Cancel].
Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions
1
NOTE
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.
1-40
Canceling a Job
Basic Sending Methods
2
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to specify, check, change, and erase destinations.
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Specifying a Fax Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Specifying an E-Mail Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Specifying an I-Fax Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Specifying a File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Specifying a User Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Sending Documents to Yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Specifying Registered Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Using the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Using the One-Touch Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Using the Favorites Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Using a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Setting Cc and Bcc Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Checking/Changing a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Erasing a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Registering New Destinations Using the Register Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2-1
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
You must specify the destination (such as a fax number, e-mail address, I-fax
address, or file server address) to send documents. This section describes the
procedure for specifying destination that has not been stored in the Address Book.
Basic Sending Methods
2
IMPORTANT
The destination that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted
once the document is sent.
NOTE
• If you frequently send documents to the same destinations, store these destinations in
the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses," on p. 10-5.)
• A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained via a server (User Inboxes are
not included in this count) can be specified at the same time.
• You can specify e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and a User
Inbox.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, you
can specify fax numbers in addition to the above mentioned destinations.
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞ press
[Details].
• You can change, edit, or erase destinations on the Send Basic Features screen before
scanning. (See "Checking/Changing a Destination," on p. 2-35, or "Erasing a
Destination," on p. 2-37.)
Specifying a Fax Number
You can specify a new fax number using - (numeric keys), , and . You can
also specify several numbers in succession, and send the original to several
destinations in a single operation (Sequential Broadcast).
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [Fax].
NOTE
If no destination is displayed on the Send Basic Features screen, pressing (numeric keys), , or without pressing [Fax] on the New Address tab, displays
the screen shown in step 2, which enables you to enter the fax number.
2-2
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
Enter the recipient's fax number using
, and .
-
(numeric keys),
2
Details of each item are shown below.
[Pause]:
Press to insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number that
you are dialing. If you insert a pause, the letter <p> is displayed
between the numbers, and the letter <P> appears at the end of
the number. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause
after the country code, and at the end of the telephone number.
(See "Pause Time," on p. 9-47.)
[Tone]:
Press when you want to directly call an extension line that is
connected to a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) which accepts
only tone signals. If you press [Tone], the letter <T> appears. (See
"Fax Information Services," on p. 7-8.)
[ ][ ]:
Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.
[PIN Code]:
Press to enter the PIN (Personal Identification Number) code. You
can press this key only if [Option] is selected for PIN code
position. If [Prefix], [Suffix], or [Off] is selected for PIN code
position, this key is grayed out. (See "Using a PIN Code," on p.
7-5.)
[Direct]:
Press to send documents directly to the recipient. If you do not
select Direct Sending mode, Memory Sending mode is used.
(See "Sending a Fax," on p. 5-3.)
[Next]:
Press to specify another destination after specifying the first
destination using the numeric keys.
[Option]:
Displayed if the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed. Press to set the subaddress and password, or to select
the line type of the additional line.
[Subaddress]: Press to set an optional subaddress and password.
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
2-3
Basic Sending Methods
2
[On-hook]:
Press to use tone dialing or to send a fax document manually.
(See "Fax Information Services," on p. 7-8.)
IMPORTANT
You cannot insert a pause at the beginning of a number.
NOTE
If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds
long.
2
Basic Sending Methods
● If you press [Option]:
❑ Press [Subaddress] ➞ enter the recipient's subaddress using
keys),
, and
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the recipient's password using
keys),
, and
-
(numeric
.
-
(numeric
.
Press [Space] to insert a space.
Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit entered.
If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not
need to enter a password.
IMPORTANT
If you want to attach a subaddress to your send job, make sure that the recipient's
fax machine supports ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector) standard subaddresses.
NOTE
For instructions on sending documents with a subaddress, see "Sending with a
Subaddress," on p. 7-2.
❑ Select [Line 1], [Line 2], or [Auto] ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[Line 1]: Standard line
[Line 2]: Additional line
[Auto]:
2-4
Selects the line according to the settings specified for [TX Line
Selection] in [Dual Line Options] under <Fax Settings> in
Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
(See "Selecting the Line for Sending," on p. 9-55.)
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
IMPORTANT
• You can restrict sending from line 1 or line 2. (See "Selecting the Line for Sending,"
on p. 9-55.)
• When using manual sending, line 1 is automatically selected, regardless of the line
settings.
• When [Auto] is selected for <Line Selection>, the user name displayed/printed on
the recipient's machine will be the user name registered for the line which was
used for sending.
❑ Press [Subaddress] ➞ enter the recipient's subaddress using
keys),
, and
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the recipient's password using
keys),
, and
-
(numeric
.
-
(numeric
.
❑ Press [OK].
Press [Space] to insert a space.
Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.
If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not
need to enter a password.
IMPORTANT
If you want to attach a subaddress to your send job, make sure that the recipient's
fax machine supports ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector) standard subaddresses.
NOTE
For instructions on sending documents with a subaddress, see "Sending with a
Subaddress," on p. 7-2.
3
Press [OK].
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
2-5
Basic Sending Methods
2
● If you press [Subaddress]:
Specifying an E-Mail Address
You can specify a new e-mail address. You can enter an e-mail address directly
from the keyboard on the touch panel display.
Basic Sending Methods
2
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [E-mail].
2
Press [E-mail Address].
3
Enter the e-mail address ➞ press [OK].
4
Select [On] or [Off] for <Divided Data Destination>.
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]: Select [On] if the destination's e-mail software has a function to combine
divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for
Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen), the data is divided into multiple parts before being sent.
Once the destination machine receives all of the parts of the data, it
combines them into one item of data.
[Off]: Select [Off] if the destination's e-mail software has no function to combine
divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for
Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen), the data is divided into separate pages and sent as
multiple e-mail messages.
2-6
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
IMPORTANT
Make sure to check the specifications of the destination's e-mail software before
setting this mode. A sending error may occur if the destination's e-mail software is
not able to combine divided data.
NOTE
For more information on the maximum data size for sending, see "E-Mail/I-Fax
Common Settings," on p. 11-5.
2
Press [OK].
Specifying an I-Fax Address
You can specify a new I-fax address. Regardless of the distance and area, I-fax
helps you to reduce transmission costs by making transactions via the Internet. You
can enter an I-fax address directly from the keyboard on the touch panel display.
You can also specify the scan settings and the settings at the destination when
using I-fax.
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [I-Fax].
2
Press the Mode drop-down list ➞ select [Simple] or [Full].
Details of each item are shown below.
[Simple]: Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet.
[Full]:
Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet, and enables you to
receive a delivery confirmation message telling you whether your I-fax
was sent successfully.
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
2-7
Basic Sending Methods
5
NOTE
• In order for you to receive a confirmation message telling you the delivery status of
your I-fax document, the recipient's machine must have I-fax capabilities and be
compatible with the Full mode.
• If you send documents using the Full mode to a machine that does not support the
Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. When this happens, the job
concerned is not considered as complete even though the actual sending of the
document is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result...> on the
Status screen until the time set for <Full Mode TX Timeout> in I-Fax Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) has lapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is
shown as <-> when sending of the document to a server or other destination could
not be verified.
Basic Sending Methods
2
3
Press [I-Fax Address].
4
Enter the I-fax address ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
If you do not send documents via a server, and the recipient's IP address is not
registered on a DNS server, use the following format to enter the domain name:
(user)@(the recipient's IP address).
5
6
Press [Destination Conditions] ➞ specify the receiving
conditions of the destination.
Select [On] or [Off] for <Receive Divided Data>.
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]: Select [On] if the destination machine has a function to combine divided
data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum
Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen), the data is divided into multiple parts before being
sent. Once the destination machine receives all the parts of the data, it
combines them into one item of data.
[Off]: Select [Off] if the destination machine has no function to combine divided
data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum
Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen), a sending error occurs.
2-8
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
IMPORTANT
Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's
machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the
recipient's machine does not support.
NOTE
For more information on the maximum data size for sending, see "E-Mail/I-Fax
Common Settings," on p. 11-5.
2
Select [On] or [Off] for <Receive in Color>.
Basic Sending Methods
7
● If you want to send in black-and-white:
❑ Press [Off] for <Receive in Color>.
❑ Select the paper size, compression method, and resolution ➞ press [OK].
The following conditions are always selected:
• Paper Size:
A4/LTR
• Compression Method: MH (Modified Huffman)
• Resolution:
200 x 100 dpi and 200 x 200 dpi
LTR, LGL, and STMT are included in [A4/LTR].
IMPORTANT
Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's
machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the
recipient's machine does not support.
NOTE
Available compression methods are:
- MH (Modified Huffman) - a coding system that horizontally scans and
compresses extended areas of white and black dots.
- MR (Modified Read) - a coding system that horizontally and vertically scans and
compresses white and black areas. Faster than MH.
- MMR (Modified Modified Read) - an adaptation of Modified Read, originally for
use in digital machines. Faster than MR.
● If you want to send in color:
❑ Press [On] for <Receive in Color> ➞ press [Next].
❑ Select the paper size and resolution ➞ press [OK].
The following conditions are always selected:
• Paper Size: A4/LTR
• Resolution:
200 x 200 dpi
LTR, LGL, and STMT are included in [A4/LTR].
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
2-9
IMPORTANT
Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's
machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the
recipient's machine does not support.
8
Select [On] or [Off] for <Send Via Server>.
Details of each item are shown below.
2
Basic Sending Methods
[On]: Sends your I-fax documents via a mail server. This enables you to send
documents to destinations via the Internet in the same way that you send
an e-mail message.
[Off]: Does not send your I-fax documents via a server. You can send large
amounts of image data to a recipient within the same LAN (Local Area
Network) environment without placing a burden on the mail server. This
enables you to send documents quickly and directly to the recipient. To
use this setting, it is necessary to set up an MX (Mail eXchange) record on
the DNS server. Ask your System Manager whether this type of sending is
possible before you set <Send Via Server> to 'Off'.
IMPORTANT
To be able to specify the Send Via Server setting, set <Use Send Via Server> to
'On' on the I-Fax Settings screen beforehand. It is recommended to set <Allow
MDN Not Via Server> to 'On' on the same screen. To access the I-Fax Settings
screen, press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [I-Fax Settings]. If <Use Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', <Send Via
Server> is grayed out. (See "I-Fax Settings," on p. 11-7.)
NOTE
Even if <Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', delivery confirmation of documents sent
using the Full mode is carried out via the server.
9
2-10
Press [OK].
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
Specifying a File Server
This section describes the four procedures for specifying a file server on the
network as the destination of a send job.
NOTE
• Set the following items when sending to a file server:
- Protocol
- Host Name
- Folder Path
- User
- Password
• For examples of the settings that are needed to send documents to a file server, see the
Network Guide.
• If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, set the FTP server
address specified in imageWARE Gateway as the destination. Using imageWARE
Document Manager and the Send function of the Color imageRUNNER enables you to
manage digitized paper documents and computer data on the network. For more
information on imageWARE Document Manager, see the appropriate imageWARE
Gateway documentation.
■ Using the Keyboard
You can specify a file server as the destination directly from the keyboard displayed on the
touch panel display. Press [Host Name], [Folder Path], [User], and [Password] to specify
the file server settings.
■ Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))
If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the server protocol, you can specify a file server
connected to a specific network by pressing [Browse] on the File screen. You can either
specify a file server from a workgroup, or specify the domain name of an Active Directory
Server on the machine.
■ Using the Browse Key (NetWare (IPX))
If you select [NetWare (IPX)] as the server protocol, you can specify a file server
connected to a specific network by pressing [Browse] on the File screen.
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
2-11
2
Basic Sending Methods
IMPORTANT
• Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista restricts the number of users or clients that can be
accessed. Once the limit of users or clients has been reached, it is not possible to send
documents to a file server using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.
• If Language Switch in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'On', the Host Name and Folder Path of the file server destination may not be displayed
correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
■ Using the Host Search Key (Windows (SMB))
If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the protocol, you can specify a file server connected to a
specific network by pressing [Host Search] on the File screen.
Using the Keyboard
Basic Sending Methods
2
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [File].
2
Press the Protocol drop-down list ➞ select the desired server
protocol.
The following server protocols may be used.
Confirm the system environment of the destination before sending.
Protocol
System Requirements
Application
Sun Solaris V.2.6 or later,
Mac OS X or later, or Red
Hat Linux 7.2
FTP
Windows 2000 Server
Internet Information Services 5.0
Windows XP Professional
Internet Information Services 5.1
Windows Server 2003
Internet Information Services 6.0
Windows Vista
Internet Information Services 7.0
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP,
Windows Server 2003, or
Windows (SMB) Windows Vista
Mac OS X v10.2
Red Hat Linux 7.2
NetWare (IPX)
2-12
Novell NetWare V.3.2 or
later
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
Samba 2.2/3.0
WebDAV
System Requirements
Application
Sun Solaris V.2.6 or later,
Red Hat Enterprise Linux
AS/ES/WS 4.0 or later,
Windows 2000 Server,
Windows XP Professional,
or Windows Server 2003
Apache 2.0
Mac OS X
Apache 1.3
Windows 2000
Professional/Server
Internet Information Services 5.0
Windows XP Professional
Internet Information Services 5.1
Windows Server 2003
Internet Information Services 6.0
The following are the product requirements for the server that is compatible with
IPv6.
Protocol
System Requirements
FTP
Solaris Version 9.0 or later,
Red Hat Enterprise Linux
AS/ES/WS 4.0 or later, or
Mac OS X v10.3 or later
WebDAV
Solaris Version 9.0 or later
Windows Server 2003
Application
Apache 2.0
Internet Information Services 6.0
IMPORTANT
• If you are using WebDAV and connect to the Internet using proxies, the proxy
server must support IPv6.
• This machine does not support WebDAV transmissions to Windows Vista.
However, it is possible to view documents sent to the WebDAV server on the
network from Windows Vista.
3
Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
If you select [Windows (SMB)] or [NetWare (IPX)] as the server protocol, you can
specify the file server by pressing [Browse]. For instructions on using the Browse
key, see "Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))," on p. 2-16, or "Using the
Browse Key (NetWare (IPX))," on p. 2-18.
If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the server protocol, you can specify the file
server by pressing [Host Search]. For instructions on using the Host Server key,
see "Using the Host Search Key (Windows (SMB))," on p. 2-20.
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
2-13
2
Basic Sending Methods
Protocol
[Host Name]:
Press [Host Name] ➞ enter a host name ➞ press [OK].
A host name is a name assigned to a host computer that provides services on
the Internet. A specific host name is assigned to each host computer to identify it
on the Internet. In this entry box, enter the name of the file server on the network
as the destination of the send job.
When [FTP] or [WebDAV] is selected as the server protocol, you can also specify
a port number after the host name address by entering a colon (:) and the port
number.
2
Basic Sending Methods
Example: 192.168.100.50:21000
When sending to an IPv6 host, specify the following settings for [Host Name].
[IPv6 Address]: <Port Number>
Example: [5aed:90a0:bc05:01d2:568a:2fc0:0001:12ee]:21000
Make sure to enter the same port number for the host name as the one specified
for the FTP server or WebDAV server to which you are sending your documents.
When [WebDAV] is selected as the server protocol, the HTTP protocol is used if
you specify 'HTTP://' as the scheme at the start of the host name, and the SSL +
HTTP (HTTPS) protocol is used if you specify 'HTTPS://' as the scheme at the
start of the host name. Specifying 'HTTPS://' as the scheme enables SSL
communications between the server and the machine. However, the route
between the server and the machine is only encrypted, and a server certificate
validity check is not performed using a CA certificate.
[Folder Path]:
Press [Folder Path] ➞ enter a folder path ➞ press [OK].
A folder path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder.
Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job.
[User]:
Press [User] ➞ enter the user name ➞ press [OK].
If [Windows (SMB)] is selected as the server protocol, enter the required user
name information in the manner shown below:
• To enter the user name only
Example: user_name
Maximum 20 characters
• To enter the user name and the domain name
Example: domain_name\user_name
Domain name: Maximum 15 characters
User name: Maximum 20 characters
• To enter a UPN (User Principal Name)
Example: [email protected]_name.com
Maximum 128 characters
2-14
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
[Password]:
Press [Password] ➞ enter a password ➞ press [OK].
Setting the password is optional.
After pressing [OK], the password appears as asterisks (********) on the File
settings screen.
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
2-15
2
Basic Sending Methods
NOTE
• If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the folder
name set in imageWARE Gateway.
• If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the user
name set in imageWARE Gateway.
• UPN (User Principal Name) can be used only if you are sending to a computer
belonging to a domain operated with Active Directory.
• If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the
password set in imageWARE Gateway.
• When sending to a file server on the Internet using WebDAV, proxy server settings
may be required, depending on the environment of the destination. Specify the host
name (or IP address), port number, user name, and password for the proxy server
in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). For
more information, see Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.
Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [File].
2
Press the Protocol drop-down list ➞ select [Windows (SMB)].
3
Press [Browse].
Basic Sending Methods
2
IMPORTANT
After turning the main power ON, you must wait for the time set in Startup Time
Settings to elapse before pressing [Browse]. Network transmission is not possible
until this startup time has elapsed. (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in
the Network Guide.)
4
Select the desired workgroup ➞ press [Down].
You can also select the workgroup from a list of Active Directory server domain
names that are registered in the machine by pressing [Directory] from the
drop-down list.
2-16
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
● If you want to register a Directory server domain name:
❑ Press [Register].
❑ Enter a domain name ➞ press [OK].
5
Select the desired file server ➞ press [Down].
To move up one level, press [Up].
6
If the Enter Network Password screen is displayed, enter your
user name and network password.
❑ Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
[User]:
Press [User] ➞ enter your user name ➞ press [OK].
[Password]:
Press [Password] ➞ enter your network password ➞ press [OK].
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks
(********) on the Enter Network Password screen.
IMPORTANT
Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of
the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If
you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the
time settings on the server and the machine.
7
Press [Down] ➞ select the folder on the specified server to
which you want to send your documents ➞ press [OK].
To go down one level, press [Down].
To move up one level, press [Up].
8
Confirm your settings ➞ press [OK].
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
2-17
2
Basic Sending Methods
NOTE
• You can register up to five Directory servers.
• To edit the domain name, select the domain name that you want to edit ➞ press
[Edit].
• To delete the domain name, select the domain name that you want to delete ➞
press [Erase] ➞ press [Yes] on the pop-up screen that appears when you press
[Erase].
Using the Browse Key (NetWare (IPX))
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [File].
2
Press the Protocol drop-down list ➞ select [NetWare (IPX)].
3
Press [Browse].
Basic Sending Methods
2
IMPORTANT
After turning the main power ON, you must wait for the time set in Startup Time
Settings to elapse before pressing [Browse]. Network transmission is not possible
until this startup time has elapsed. (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in
the Network Guide.)
4
2-18
Press the drop-down list ➞ select [NDS] or [Bindery] from the
drop-down list.
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
Details of each item are shown below.
[NDS]:
NDS (Novell Directory Service) is a directory service that manages
user and server names. Select [NDS] when you are using Novell
NetWare V.4. x or later.
[Bindery]: One of the directory services provided by Novell for managing the
information of user and server names. Select [Bindery] when you are
using Novell NetWare V.3.x.
If you select [NDS], follow the steps below.
5
Select the desired NDS tree ➞ press [Down].
To move up one level, press [Up].
6
Select a folder on the specified server in which you want to
log on to ➞ press [Log In].
If no folder is displayed, press [Log In] to log on to the Novell server.
To go down one level, press [Down].
To move up one level, press [Up].
7
Enter your user name and network password.
❑ Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
[User]:
Press [User] ➞ enter your user name ➞ press [OK].
[Password]:
Press [Password] ➞ enter your network password ➞ press [OK].
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks
(********) on the Enter Network Password screen.
IMPORTANT
Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of
the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If
you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the
time settings on the server and the machine.
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
2-19
2
Basic Sending Methods
If you select [Bindery], follow the procedure from step 5 in "Using the Browse Key
(Windows (SMB))," on p. 2-16.
8
Press [Down] ➞ select the folder to where you want to send
your file ➞ press [OK].
To move up one level, press [Up].
9
Confirm your settings ➞ press [OK].
Using the Host Search Key (Windows (SMB))
Basic Sending Methods
2
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [File].
2
Press the Protocol drop-down list ➞ select [Windows (SMB)].
3
Press [Host Search].
4
Enter the search conditions ➞ press [Start Searching].
[Workgroup]:
Press [Workgroup] ➞ enter the workgroup name ➞ press [OK].
[Host Name to Search]:
Press [Host Name to Search] ➞ enter the IP address, FQDN, or NetBIOS name ➞
press [OK].
2-20
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
NOTE
• When entering a NetBIOS name, you can also enter wildcard characters, such as *
and ?, as part of your search.
• When searching for the host name using wildcard characters, make sure to also
enter a workgroup name.
• Examples
- * (asterisk): Replaces one or more characters (up to 15 characters).
- ?:
➞ trinity
trinity1
trinity0002
2
Replaces one only character.
Example: tr?nity ➞ trinity
5
Select the file server from the search results.
● If there are search results:
❑ Specify the file server in accordance with steps 5 to 7 of "Using the Browse Key
(Windows (SMB))," on p. 2-16.
● If there are no search results:
❑ Specify the file server in accordance with steps 4 to 7 of "Using the Browse Key
(Windows (SMB))," on p. 2-16.
6
Confirm your settings ➞ press [OK].
Specifying a User Inbox
You can store a scanned document in a User Inbox. If you include a User Inbox as
one of the destinations to which you are sending your document, the document is
stored in the selected User Inbox for later use. Documents stored in a User Inbox
can be printed and sent to other destinations.
IMPORTANT
• Documents that are scanned using a paper size specified by pressing [Other Size] or
[Long Strip Original] in Document Size Select, cannot be stored in a User Inbox.
• Documents stored in a User Inbox are automatically erased after three days. However,
you can change this setting. (See Chapter 8, "Customizing Settings," in the Copying and
Mail Box Guide.)
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
2-21
Basic Sending Methods
Example: tri*
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [Store In Usr Inbox].
2
Select the desired User Inbox ➞ press [OK].
Basic Sending Methods
2
User Inboxes specified as destinations correspond to the inboxes that appear on
the Inbox Selection screen for the Mail Box function.
● If you want to send a link to a User Inbox via e-mail:
❑ Press [URL Send].
A message <User Inbox Incoming Notice> is inserted into the body of the
e-mail message stating the link to the User Inbox.
NOTE
• Only one User Inbox can be specified as the destination at a time.
• To be able to send a link via e-mail, it is necessary to register an e-mail address in
the User Inbox beforehand. For instructions on storing an e-mail address in the
machine, see Chapter 8, "Customizing Settings," in the Copying and Mail Box
Guide.
• If the URL Send mode is set, and you specify a group destination that includes a
User Inbox as a send destination, the error message <Cannot send when an inbox
is included in the Group Address for [URL Send]. Please enter the settings again.>
may be displayed.
2-22
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
Sending Documents to Yourself
If SDL or the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO is set
as the login service, you can press [Send to Myself] to specify your e-mail address
(registered in SDL or the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of
SSO) as the destination.
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [Send to Myself].
Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab
2-23
2
Basic Sending Methods
IMPORTANT
• If SDL or the Local Device Authentication system of SSO is set as the login service, your
e-mail address registered in SDL or the Local Device Authentication system of SSO is
set as the destination.
• If the Domain Authentication system of SSO (including when performing domain
authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication' system) is
set as the login service, your e-mail address registered in Active Directory or
imageWARE Accounting Manager is set as the destination.
• For more information on the SDL and SSO login services, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Operations," in the Reference Guide.
Specifying Registered Destinations
You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch button, or
specify a new address altogether. You can also recall the destinations and settings
stored in the favorites buttons to check their contents, edit them, or delete them.
2
Basic Sending Methods
NOTE
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞ press
[Details].
• You can change, edit, or erase destinations on the Send Basic Features screen before
scanning. (See "Checking/Changing a Destination," on p. 2-35, "Erasing a Destination,"
on p. 2-37.)
• A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256
destinations, 64 new addresses, including those obtained via a server, can be specified.)
If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination is
counted as a separate address.
Using the Address Book
You must specify the destination (such as a fax number, e-mail address, I-fax
address, or file server address) to send documents. If you store addresses in the
Address Book, you can easily select them. Addresses are stored in Address Book
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Storing New Addresses," on
p. 10-5.)
NOTE
Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User
Interface. (See Chapter 2, "Checking and Managing Functions," and Chapter 3,
"Customizing Settings," in the Remote UI Guide.)
1
2-24
Press [Address Book].
Specifying Registered Destinations
Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
2
You can select multiple destinations.
Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each
letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range
of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the result list by pressing the
Type drop-down list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to
10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in
the Address Book.
You can specify e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and
group addresses.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed,
you can also specify fax numbers in addition to the above mentioned
destinations.
If you select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access
Number] and then enter the access number using
(numeric keys). If you
press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with an
access number are displayed.
NOTE
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check
mark.
• If you select only one destination, press
(Start) to send from the Address Book
screen.
• [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in
Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-18.)
Specifying Registered Destinations
2-25
Basic Sending Methods
2
Using the One-Touch Buttons
You can specify up to 200 destinations in one-touch buttons.
Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document with the press of
a one-touch button.
IMPORTANT
To use this feature, you must first register destinations in one-touch buttons by pressing
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞ [One-touch Buttons]. (See
"Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons," on p. 10-35.)
Basic Sending Methods
2
1
Press [One-touch].
2
Select the desired one-touch button.
Each one-touch button is assigned a three digit number. If you know the
one-touch button's three digit number, you can press
(One-Touch Button
Number) ➞ enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button using
(numeric keys).
NOTE
• You can select multiple one-touch buttons.
• To cancel the selected one-touch button, press the one-touch button again.
2-26
Specifying Registered Destinations
Using the Favorites Buttons
If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same
destination, store these settings in a favorites button. Then, when you need to
specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites button containing
your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your
document.
1
Press [Favorites].
2
Select the desired Favorites Button.
NOTE
• You can manually change the recalled settings from the selected favorites button
before you send your documents.
• If you press another favorites button, the settings stored in that button are recalled.
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
• If multiple destinations are stored under the selected favorites button, the
destinations may not be listed in the order in which they were set.
• You can enlarge the Favorites Buttons display by pressing [ ]. (See "Initial Send
Screen Display," on p. 9-30.)
Specifying Registered Destinations
2-27
2
Basic Sending Methods
IMPORTANT
To use this feature, you must first register the desired document settings and destinations
in favorites buttons. (See "Favorites Buttons," on p. 9-17.)
Using a Server
You can specify a destination by searching the directory listings on the network
using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers. LDAP servers are for
looking up a particular piece of information, such as a user name, e-mail address,
or other contact information.
NOTE
• You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network
environment.
• For more information on LDAP servers, see "LDAP Server Settings," on p. 11-46.
• You can send to a maximum of 64 destinations at the same time, including destinations
that are specified via a server.
• The information that can be obtained via the LDAP server consists of only names and
e-mail addresses. If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board
is installed, fax numbers, in addition to the above mentioned information, can be also
obtained via the LDAP server.
• You cannot directly specify a destination that is obtained via a server as a forwarding
destination. To specify the destination as a forwarding destination, you must first store it
in the Address Book. (See "Addresses Obtained via a Server," on p. 10-23.)
Basic Sending Methods
2
1
2
2-28
Press [Network Add.Book].
Press the Server to Search drop-down list ➞ select the desired
server to search.
Specifying Registered Destinations
Specify the search criteria.
NOTE
If you want to search for a destination that is registered with an e-mail address and
a fax number, you can search for the e-mail address by entering the fax number as
the search criterion, and vice versa.
● To use Simple Search:
❑ Press [Name], [E-mail], or [Fax] ➞ enter the name, e-mail address, or fax
2
number for which you want to search ➞ press [OK].
The search criteria boxes that are not filled out, are not searched.
To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, press
[Detailed Search], and follow the directions below. The search criteria you
entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed Search.
● To use Detailed Search:
❑ Press [Detailed Search].
❑ Press the search category drop-down list ➞ select the desired search category.
The available search categories are:
[Name]:
Search by name.
[E-mail]:
Search by e-mail address.
[Fax]:
Search by fax number.
[Organization]:
Search by organization name.
[OrgnztionUnit]: Search by organizational unit (e.g., departments in an
organization).
For example, if cn(common name)=user1, ou(organization unit)=salesdept,
o(organization)=canon, c(country)=jp is the distinguished name in the
directory, enter the organization/organizationUnit of the user as follows:
organization=canon
organizationUnit=salesdept
Specifying Registered Destinations
2-29
Basic Sending Methods
3
NOTE
• The organization/organizationUnit can be used as search categories only if the
information has been registered on the LDAP Server.
• Detailed Search by organization/organizationUnit may not be performed,
depending on whether the attribute types have been registered on the LDAP
server, and depending on the type of application on the server.
• You can also add additional user-defined search attributes. For more information
on registering or editing a search attribute, see "Registering/Editing LDAP Search
Attributes," on p. 11-52.
2
❑ Press the search condition drop-down list ➞ select the desired search
Basic Sending Methods
condition ➞ press [Settings].
You can select from the following search conditions:
[contains]:
The result must contain the entered name, e-mail
address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[does not contain]: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail
address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[equals]:
The result must be exactly the same as the entered name,
e-mail address, fax number, organization, or
organizational unit.
[differs from]:
The result must be different from the entered name, e-mail
address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[begins with]:
The result must begin with the same first few letters that
you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number,
organization, or organizational unit.
[ends with]:
The result must end with the same last few letters that you
entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number,
organization, or organizational unit.
❑ Enter the search criterion ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press [Add].
To continue adding more search criteria, press [or] or [and] ➞ repeat step 3.
[or]:
The machine searches and returns a result that matches any of the
specified search criteria.
[and]: The machine searches and returns a result that matches all of the
specified search criteria.
To edit the search criteria, select the search criterion that you want to edit ➞
press [Edit] ➞ [Settings].
To delete the search criteria, select the criterion that you want to erase ➞
press [Erase].
2-30
Specifying Registered Destinations
NOTE
• You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
• If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both [or] and [and]
together.
• If you press [Simple Search] after specifying search criteria on the Detailed Search
screen, the display changes to the Simple Search screen, and the specified
detailed search criteria are deleted.
2
Press [Start Searching].
To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press
[Cancel]. If the machine finds some results before you press [Cancel], these
search results are displayed.
IMPORTANT
• Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of
the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If
you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the
time settings on the server and the machine.
• The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in
Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If
the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of
addresses to search, or change the search criteria. (See "LDAP Server Settings,"
on p. 11-46.)
NOTE
If you press [Start Searching] without specifying any search criteria, all of the
addresses stored on the LDAP server are displayed.
● If the Enter Network Password screen is displayed:
❑ Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
The Enter Network Password screen is displayed if either one of the following
is true:
• If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use', and <Display authentication
dialog when searching> is set to 'On'.
• If the user name, password, and domain name specified in Register LDAP
Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are
incorrect.
[User]:
Press [User] ➞ enter the user name ➞ press [OK].
[Password]:
Press [Password] ➞ enter the password ➞ press [OK].
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks
(********) on the Enter Network Password screen.
Specifying Registered Destinations
2-31
Basic Sending Methods
4
5
Select the desired destination from the search results ➞ press
[OK].
To continue searching, press [Back].
You can specify multiple destinations.
E-mail addresses that meet the specified search criteria are displayed. If you
press [Select e-mail for I-Fax], the key lights, showing that this setting is turned
on, and the selected e-mail address can be specified as an I-fax destination.
2
Basic Sending Methods
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed,
fax numbers that meet the specified search criteria are displayed.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed,
you can sort and limit the view of the displayed addresses by using the Type
drop-down list.
NOTE
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check
mark.
• If you specify an e-mail address as an I-fax destination, the only information that
can be retrieved from the server is the I-fax address. To specify settings to match
the recipient's receiving conditions, press [Details] on the Send screen.
• If you select only one destination, press
(Start) to send from the Search Results
screen.
6
2-32
If a fax number or I-fax address is specified as the destination,
read the displayed message ➞ press [OK].
Specifying Registered Destinations
Setting Cc and Bcc Addresses
NOTE
• Only e-mail addresses can be specified for [Cc] and [Bcc].
• The maximum number of Cc and Bcc destinations that can be sent at one time is 64,
including those obtained using New Address Tab or via a server (User Inboxes are not
included in this count). Group Addresses cannot be specified for [Cc] and [Bcc].
1
Press [Cc Bcc].
Setting Cc and Bcc Addresses
2-33
2
Basic Sending Methods
In addition to the destination for the documents, you can also set multiple e-mail
address destinations for the Cc (Carbon copy) and Bcc (Blind carbon copy)
addresses.
2
Specify the e-mail addresses ➞ press [Done].
Follow the procedure below to set the e-mail addresses for [Cc] and [Bcc].
• For instructions on specifying destinations not registered in the Address Book,
see "Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab," on p. 2-2.
• For instructions on specifying destinations stored in the Address Book, see
"Using the Address Book," on p. 2-24.
• For instructions on specifying destinations using the one-touch buttons, see
"Using the One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-26.
2
• For instructions on specifying destinations and settings using the favorites
Basic Sending Methods
buttons, see "Using the Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-27.
• For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory
listings on a server on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol), see "Using a Server," on p. 2-28.
● To specify e-mail addresses for [Cc]:
❑ Press [Cc] ➞ specify the e-mail addresses.
● To specify e-mail addresses for [Bcc]:
❑ Press [Bcc] ➞ specify the e-mail addresses.
● To move e-mail addresses from [To] or [Bcc] to [Cc]:
❑ Press [From To/Bcc].
❑ Press [To] or [Bcc] ➞ select the desired e-mail addresses ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
[From To/Bcc] is displayed only if you pressed [Cc].
● To move e-mail addresses from [To] or [Cc] to [Bcc]:
❑ Press [From To/Cc].
❑ Press [To] or [Cc] ➞ select the desired e-mail addresses ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
[From To/Cc] is displayed only if you pressed [Bcc].
2-34
Setting Cc and Bcc Addresses
Checking/Changing a Destination
You can check and change a specified destination before you scan your
documents.
1
Select the destination ➞ press [Details].
2
If necessary, check or change the destination's information.
● If the destination has been specified from the Address Book:
❑ Check the destination's information ➞ press [Done].
● If the destination has been specified using one of the sending
methods in the New Address tab:
❑ Check or change the destination's information ➞ press [OK].
Change the destination's information in the same way that you specified it.
(See "Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab," on p. 2-2.)
Checking/Changing a Destination
2-35
2
Basic Sending Methods
NOTE
• Only the destinations specified using the New Address tab and destinations obtained via
a server can be changed.
• For instructions on changing the specified destination after you scan your document, see
"Changing the Destination," on p. 8-5.
• You cannot change multiple destinations simultaneously.
● If the destination is obtained via a server:
❑ Check or change the destination's information ➞ press [OK].
Change the destination's information in the same way that you specified it.
(See "Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab," on p. 2-2.)
● If the destination is a group address:
❑ To check the information of registered destinations in a group address, select
one destination at a time ➞ press [Details].
2
Basic Sending Methods
❑ Check the destination's information ➞ press [Done] ➞ [Done].
2-36
Checking/Changing a Destination
Erasing a Destination
You can erase a specified destination from the destination list before you scan your
documents.
1
Basic Sending Methods
2
Select the destination to be erased ➞ press [Erase].
Erasing a Destination
2-37
Registering New Destinations Using the Register
Key
You can register new destinations in the Address Book, one-touch buttons, and
favorites buttons from the Send Basic Features and the Address Book screens.
2
Basic Sending Methods
The Register key is a shortcut key to the Register Address screen in Address Book
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the One-touch Buttons screen in
Address Book Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), and the Register
Favorites Button screen in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in
Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
1
Press [Reg.].
2
Select the item you want to register.
● To register a destination in the Address Book:
❑ Press [Register Address] ➞ register the destination.
For instructions on registering destinations, see Chapter 10, "Storing/Editing
Address Book Settings."
● To register a destination in a one-touch button:
❑ Press [Register One-touch Button] ➞ register the destination in a one-touch
button.
For instructions on registering addresses in a one-touch button, see "Storing/
Editing One-Touch Buttons," on p. 10-35.
2-38
Registering New Destinations Using the Register Key
● To register destinations and settings in a favorites button:
❑ Press [Register Favorites Button] ➞ register destinations and settings in a
favorites button.
For instructions on registering destinations and settings in a favorites button,
see "Registering a Favorites Button," on p. 9-17.
You can also register a destination in the Address Book or a one-touch button by
pressing [Address Book] ➞ [Register].
Basic Sending Methods
2
Registering New Destinations Using the Register Key
2-39
Basic Sending Methods
2
2-40
Registering New Destinations Using the Register Key
Basic Scanning Features
3
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the basic scanning features.
Selecting a Scan Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
2-Sided Original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Different Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Document Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Changing the Zoom Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Changing Color Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-1
Selecting a Scan Mode
You can set the scan mode in which a document is scanned. The machine has
eight preset scan modes: Clr/B&W 200 x 200 dpi, Clr/B&W 300 x 300 dpi, B&W 200
x 200 dpi, B&W 300 x 300 dpi, Clr/Gray 200 x 200 dpi, Clr/Gray 300 x 300 dpi, Clr/
Gray 600 x 600 dpi, and B&W 600 x 600 dpi.
Select the desired mode from the preset scan modes or user defined scan modes
(user preset keys), according to the type of original that you are sending.
Basic Scanning Features
3
NOTE
• If you want to use less memory and make the sending time shorter, use a lower
resolution mode.
• You can adjust the preset scan modes and create new scan settings. However, since
changed scan settings are not automatically saved, it is useful to register a new scan
setting if you use it frequently. (See "User Preset Keys," on p. 4-17.)
• You can change the settings and assigned names for the eight preset scan keys, and
store them as user defined scan modes (user preset keys).
• In addition to the scan mode, you can store addresses and other send settings in the
favorites buttons. (See "Favorites Buttons," on p. 9-17.)
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
[Cancel].
• If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the
Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-18.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
3-2
Selecting a Scan Mode
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ select the scan mode.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
NOTE
• Specifying the scan mode again cancels the scan mode and other scan features
previously set.
• You can also select a scan mode by pressing [Option] from the Scan Settings
drop-down list to display the Scan Settings screen ➞ press the Scanning Mode
drop-down list ➞ select a scan mode.
2
Press
(Start).
If [PDF (Trace)] or [PDF (Compact)] is selected as the file format, select a scan
mode from the Scanning Mode drop-down list whose Color Selection mode and
resolution have been registered as one of the following combinations. If you
select a combination other than those listed below, a message asking for your
confirmation to change the file format appears on the screen.
• Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale) and 300 x 300 dpi
• Full Color and 300 x 300 dpi
• Grayscale and 300 x 300 dpi
NOTE
You can store the changed settings. (See "User Preset Keys," on p. 4-17.)
Selecting a Scan Mode
3-3
Basic Scanning Features
3
Scan Settings
NOTE
• Changed scan settings are not saved. For instructions on saving settings, see "User
Preset Keys," on p. 4-17.
• If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the
Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-18.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
Basic Scanning Features
3
2-Sided Original
You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are
placed in the feeder, and scan each side separately.
IMPORTANT
• The 2-Sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-L1)
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is attached.
• The 2-Sided Original mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size)
or 2-Page Separation mode.
• The 2-Sided Original mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct
Sending or Manual Sending mode.
• When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as
LTRR, make sure to place them horizontally into the feeder. If these originals are placed
vertically, the back sides of these originals are scanned upside down.
NOTE
To cancel this setting, press [2-Sided Original] ➞ [Cancel].
3-4
Scan Settings
1
Place your originals into the feeder ➞ specify the destination
➞ press [2-Sided Original].
Basic Scanning Features
3
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Select the type of original ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[Book Type]:
The front and back sides of the original have the same
top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite
top-bottom orientations.
3
Press
(Start).
Scan Settings
3-5
Different Size Originals
This mode enables you to scan different size originals with the same widths (11" x
17" and LTR, or LTRR and STMT, etc.) or different widths (11" x 17" and LGL, or
LTR and LGL, etc.), together as one group by setting them in the feeder.
IMPORTANT
• The Different Size Originals mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other
Size or Long Strip Original), 2-Page Separation, Original Frame Erase, or Book Frame
Erase mode.
• The Different Size Originals mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the
Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.
• If Document Size Select setting is set to anything other than [Auto], all of the originals are
scanned in the specified size. If you want to scan the originals in their original sizes,
make sure to set Document Size Select to [Auto].
• If the originals are placed in the feeder, make sure that the different size originals are of
the same weight (paper type).
• Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder if you are placing
originals with different widths. ("Width" refers to the vertical measurement of the paper
from the front of the machine to the back of the machine when the paper is placed in the
feeder or on the platen glass.)
• If you send different sized originals via fax, the paper size used to output the faxes on the
recipient's machine is the size of the largest document you sent. For example, if you send
an LTR and 11" x 17" original via fax, they will both be output on 11" x 17" paper at the
recipient's machine.
• Set different size originals with different widths in the following combinations. Other
combinations may damage the originals.
- 11" x 17" and LGL, LTR and LGL, LTR and LTRR
• If you place originals with different widths into the feeder, the originals may move slightly
when fed to the platen glass. As a result, the images may be scanned and copied as
slanted.
• If the Different Size Originals mode is set, the scanning speed may be slower than
normal.
Basic Scanning Features
3
NOTE
To cancel this setting, press [Diff. Size Originals] ➞ [Cancel].
3-6
Scan Settings
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press [Diff.
Size Originals].
Basic Scanning Features
3
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Select the type of originals ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[Same Width]: Press this key if you are placing originals with the same width.
[Different Width]: Press this key if you are placing originals with different widths.
3
Press
(Start).
Scan Settings
3-7
Document Size
You can manually specify the document size when the machine cannot detect the
paper size automatically, such as when scanning transparencies. Specify the
document size as well, if you want to scan an 11" x 17" original with an image that
extends all the way to the edges without the periphery of the original being cut off.
You can also store the specified document size.
IMPORTANT
• You cannot select [Auto] when scanning the following types of originals. Specify the size
of these documents manually.
- Nonstandard size originals
- Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
- Originals with an extremely dark background
- STMT, STMTR, or smaller originals that are placed on the platen glass (STMT originals
must be placed only into the feeder, as they cannot be automatically detected when
placed on the platen glass.)
• If you are sending a fax in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, and you place
your originals into the feeder, the Document Size Select setting that you specify will be
disabled.
• If the original is placed in the feeder, you cannot scan by selecting [Other Size] in
Document Size Select.
• If you select [Long Strip Original], place your originals into the feeder. You cannot specify
the size of a long strip original that is placed on the platen glass.
• If [Long Strip Original] is selected as the document size, documents can be sent only at a
zoom ratio of 100%.
• If you select [Other Size] in Document Size Select, you cannot select [Stamp].
Basic Scanning Features
3
NOTE
• If you scan a registered document size, the scanned image is not rotated automatically.
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
[Cancel].
Specifying the Document Size
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
3-8
Scan Settings
2
Press [Document Size Select].
3
Basic Scanning Features
3
Select the document size.
● If you want to scan a standard document size:
❑ Select the desired document size.
If you want to scan an 11" x 17" original with an image that extends all the way
to the edges without the periphery of the original being cut off, place the
original on the platen glass ➞ press [11x17+]. (See Chapter 2, "Basic
Operations," in the Reference Guide.)
NOTE
• To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
• If you want to scan originals longer than the standard sizes, press [Long Strip
Originals]. The length of standard size originals is as follows:
- LTR: 11" (279.4 mm)
- 11" x 17": 17" (431.8 mm)
Scan Settings
3-9
● If you want to scan a nonstandard document size:
❑ Press [Other Size].
❑ Press [X] (horizontal axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] (vertical axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].
Basic Scanning Features
3
X
Y
Scanning
Area
The Platen Glass
NOTE
For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in
the Reference Guide.
● If you want to scan a registered document size:
❑ Press [Other Size].
❑ Press [Registered Size 1] or [Registered Size 2] ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
• To select a registered document size, you need to register the document size
beforehand. (See "Registering the Specified Document Size," on p. 3-11.)
• The registered document size is displayed on top of the key in which it is
registered.
4
3-10
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
Scan Settings
5
Press
(Start).
Registering the Specified Document Size
1
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
[Document Size Select].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Specifying the Document
Size," on p. 3-8.
Press [Other Size].
3
Press [Register Size].
4
3
Basic Scanning Features
2
Press [Registered Size 1] or [Registered Size 2] ➞ enter the
document size using the numeric keys on the touch panel
display.
❑ Press [X] (horizontal axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] (vertical axis) ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].
Scan Settings
3-11
NOTE
• If you register a new document size in a key that already has a document size
stored in it, the new document size overwrites the previously registered document
size.
• For instructions on entering values in inches, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in
the Reference Guide.
5
Resolution
You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.
Basic Scanning Features
3
Press [Cancel] ➞ [Done] ➞ [Cancel].
IMPORTANT
• The maximum size of an image that you can send at 600 x 600 dpi resolution is 11" x 17".
If the image exceeds this size, it may be cut off.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed and
you are sending documents by fax, the maximum size of an image that you can send at
400 x 400 dpi resolution is 11" x 17".
• If you are sending documents by fax, select Black 200 x 100 dpi, Black 200 x 200 dpi,
Black 200 x 400 dpi, or Black 400 x 400 dpi. Otherwise, the document will be sent with
poor resolution.
• If you send a long strip original at 600 x 600 dpi, the periphery of the original image may
be cut off slightly.
NOTE
To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
[Cancel].
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
3-12
Scan Settings
2
Press the Resolution drop-down list ➞ select a resolution ➞
press [OK].
If [PDF (Trace)] or [PDF (Compact)] is selected as the file format, and you select
any resolution other than [300x300 dpi], and then press [OK], a message asking
for your confirmation to change the PDF file format appears on the screen.
3
Press
(Start).
Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings
NOTE
To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
[Cancel].
Manual Exposure Adjustment
You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the
original.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
Scan Settings
3-13
Basic Scanning Features
3
2
3
Press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the scan exposure ➞ press [OK].
Basic Scanning Features
Press [ ] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter, or press
[ ] to move it to the right to make the exposure darker.
3
Press
(Start).
Original Type Selection
You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you
are scanning. The following three original type modes are available for adjusting the
image quality.
IMPORTANT
• Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at
the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
• If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo
mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can
lessen this moiré effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See "Adjusting the Contrast
(Sharpness)," on p. 4-13.)
NOTE
If the original is a transparency, select the original type ➞ adjust the exposure to the most
appropriate level for the original.
■ Text/Photo Mode
This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos, such as
magazines or catalogues.
■ Photo Mode
This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper, or photo
originals containing halftones (e.g., printed photos).
3-14
Scan Settings
■ Text Mode
This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals
can also be scanned clearly. When [PDF (Compact)] is selected as the file format, if the
Text mode is selected, the Image Level in Text Mode setting made in Image Level for PDF
(Compct) in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen) is activated. (See "PDF Compression Priority," on p.
9-22.)
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
3
2
Basic Scanning Features
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
Press the original type drop-down list ➞ select the original
type ([Text/Photo], [Photo], or [Text]).
Original Type
● If you want to adjust the text/photo processing priority level:
❑ Press the original type drop-down list ➞ press [Priority Level].
❑ Press [Text Priority] or [Photo Priority] to adjust the degree of priority for text or
photo images ➞ press [OK].
<Priority Level>:
[Text Priority]:
Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of text.
[Photo Priority]: Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of photos, with as
little moiré effect as possible.
3
Press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the scanning exposure ➞ [OK].
Press [ ] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure light, or press
[ ] to move the indicator to the right to make the exposure darker.
Scan Settings
3-15
4
Press
(Start).
Automatic Exposure Adjustment
This mode enables you to set the machine to automatically adjust the scan
exposure to the level best suited to the quality of the original.
IMPORTANT
When using Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode for sending a fax, the automatic
scan adjustment mode cannot be used.
3
Basic Scanning Features
NOTE
There are two types of automatic scan exposure adjustments. The Remove Background
mode enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original, and the
Prevent Bleeding mode enables you to prevent the original image on the reverse side of
the original from appearing on the scanned pages. Select the desired scan exposure
adjustment mode depending on the type of original. The Remove Background mode is
selected by default. (See "Image Quality Adjustment," on p. 4-14.)
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press [A] ➞ [OK].
NOTE
An automatic scan exposure adjustment may not work with transparencies. In this
case, adjust the scan exposure manually by pressing [ ] or [ ].
3
3-16
Press
Scan Settings
(Start).
Changing the Zoom Ratio
You can set the machine to adjust the zoom ratio automatically, or you can specify
the zoom ratio manually before scanning the original.
NOTE
To cancel the scan settings, press [Cancel] on the Scan Settings screen.
Preset Zoom
The machine offers you a variety of preset zoom ratios to reduce or enlarge
standard size originals to another standard record size.
■ Reduction
The available preset reduction zoom ratios are:
LGL ➞ LTR (78%)
11" x 17" ➞ LGL or 11" x 15" ➞ LTR (73%)
11" x 17" ➞ LTR (64%)
11" x 17" ➞ STMT (50%)
■ Enlargement
The available preset enlargement zoom ratios are:
STMT ➞ 11" x 17" (200%)
LTR ➞ 11" x 17" (129%)
LGL ➞ 11" x 17" (121%)
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
Scan Settings
3
Basic Scanning Features
IMPORTANT
• The maximum size of an image that you can send at 600 x 600 dpi resolution is 11" x 17".
If the image exceeds this size, it may be cut off.
• If [PDF (Trace)] or [PDF (Compact)] is selected as the file format, documents can be sent
only at a zoom ratio of 100%.
• If [Long Strip Original] is selected as the document size, documents can be sent only at a
zoom ratio of 100%.
3-17
2
Press [Copy Ratio].
3
Basic Scanning Features
3
4
To reduce the original image, select a preset reduction ratio.
To enlarge the original image, select a preset enlargement
ratio. Following your selection, press [Done] ➞ [OK].
Press
(Start).
NOTE
To return the ratio to 100%, press [Direct].
3-18
Scan Settings
Zoom by Percentage
You can reduce or enlarge originals by any zoom ratio in 1% increments. Any ratio
from 50% to 200% can be set. The same zoom ratio is used for the horizontal (X)
and vertical (Y) axes.
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞ [Copy Ratio].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Preset Zoom," on p. 3-17.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
Press [-] or [+] to set a zoom ratio ➞ press [Done] ➞ [OK].
3
Press
Basic Scanning Features
2
3
(Start).
NOTE
To return the ratio to 100%, press [Direct].
Auto Zoom
You can set the machine to automatically select the appropriate zoom ratio based
on the size of the original and the selected record size. The same zoom ratio is
used for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes. Any zoom ratio from 50% to 200%
can be set.
IMPORTANT
• You can only select the Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen when the resolution is set
to 300 x 300 dpi or 600 x 600 dpi.
• When using Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode for sending a fax, you cannot
select the Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen.
Scan Settings
3-19
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞ [Copy Ratio].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Preset Zoom," on p. 3-17.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press [Auto] ➞ select the record size ➞ press [OK].
3
Press [OK].
4
Press
Basic Scanning Features
3
(Start).
NOTE
To return the ratio to 100%, press [Direct].
3-20
Scan Settings
Changing Color Modes
IMPORTANT
If the destination is a fax number, the original is always scanned and sent in the
Black-and-White mode.
NOTE
• The default setting is 'Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black and White)'.
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
[Cancel].
• If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the
Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p. 5-18.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
■ Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Grayscale)
If the Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Grayscale) mode is selected, the machine
automatically recognizes whether the original is in color or black-and-white. Color
originals are scanned in the Full Color mode, while black-and-white originals are scanned
in the Grayscale mode.
IMPORTANT
When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections, the
machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan the color
originals in the Grayscale mode under the following conditions. To avoid this, set the color
mode to 'Full Color'. (See "Full Color," on p. 3-22.)
- If the originals contain a few color sections
- If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 3/8" (10 mm) from the left
edge) of the originals when placing the originals into the feeder
- If the originals contain light color densities
- If the color sections of the original are close to black
Changing Color Modes
3-21
3
Basic Scanning Features
This machine comes with two Automatic Color Selection modes. Automatic Color
Selection (Full Color/Grayscale) detects and distinguishes color originals from
grayscale originals, while Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White)
detects and distinguishes color originals from black-and-white originals. Depending
on the Automatic Color Selection mode that you select, the machine automatically
switches between the Full Color and Grayscale modes, or between the Full Color
and Black-and-White modes. You can also manually select the Full Color,
Grayscale, or Black-and-White mode whenever necessary.
■ Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White)
If the Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White) mode is selected, the
machine automatically recognizes whether the original is in color or black-and-white.
Color originals are scanned in the Full Color mode, while black-and-white originals are
scanned in the Black-and-White mode.
IMPORTANT
When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections, the
machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan the color
originals in the Black-and-White mode under the following conditions. To avoid this, set
the color mode to 'Full Color'. (See "Full Color," on p. 3-22.)
- If the originals contain a few color sections
- If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 3/8" (10 mm) from the left
edge) of the originals when placing the originals into the feeder
- If the originals contain light color densities
- If the color sections of the original are close to black
Basic Scanning Features
3
■ Full Color
The Full Color mode always scans in color regardless of whether the original is in color or
black-and-white. If either of the Automatic Color Selection modes is selected, originals
that contain few color sections, or originals with light color densities and colors close to
black may be scanned in the Grayscale or Black-and-White mode. If this happens, select
the Full Color mode manually.
NOTE
If a black-and-white original is scanned in the Full Color mode, it is counted as a color
scan.
■ Grayscale
The Grayscale mode always scans in grayscale regardless of whether the original is in
color or black-and-white.
■ Black-and-White
The Black-and-White mode always scans in black-and-white regardless of whether the
original is in color or black-and-white.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
3-22
Changing Color Modes
2
Press the color selection drop-down list ➞ press [Auto-Color
Select (Full Color/Grayscale)], [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/
Black-and-White)], [Full Color], [Grayscale], or [Black and
White] ➞ [OK].
When [PDF (Trace)] or [PDF (Compact)] is selected as the file format, if you
specify [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black-and-White)] or [Black and White] as
the color mode and press [OK], a message asking for your confirmation to
change the file format appears on the screen.
IMPORTANT
• If [PDF (Trace)] or [PDF (Compact)] is selected as the file format, the color mode is
automatically changed to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)] even if you set
the color mode to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black-and-White)]. If you want to
send the document in the Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White)
mode, change the file format to anything other than [PDF (Trace)] or [PDF
(Compact)].
• If [PDF (Trace)] or [PDF (Compact)] is selected as the file format, the color mode is
automatically changed to [Grayscale] even if you set the color mode to [Black and
White]. If you want to send the document in the Black-and-White mode, change the
file format setting to anything other than [PDF (Trace)] or [PDF (Compact)].
3
Press
(Start).
Changing Color Modes
3-23
Basic Scanning Features
3
Basic Scanning Features
3
3-24
Changing Color Modes
Special Scanning Features
4
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the special scanning features.
What are Special Features? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
2-Page Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Original Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Book Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Binding Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Job Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Image Quality Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Remove Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Prevent Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
User Preset Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Storing Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Naming a User Preset Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Erasing Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
4-1
What are Special Features?
Special features, such as the Frame Erase and Job Build modes, are modes for
performing various kinds of editing according to your needs, when sending a
document.
IMPORTANT
Depending on the mode, some combinations of modes will not be available. See the
corresponding section on each mode for detailed information.
4
Special Scanning Features
1
Place your original on the platen glass ➞ specify the
destination.
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option].
3
Press [Special Features].
IMPORTANT
Depending on the mode, you may have to place your original on the platen glass or
in the feeder. See the corresponding section on each mode for detailed
information.
4-2
What are Special Features?
Select the desired mode from the Special Features screen.
5
Set the desired mode.
4
For more information on setting each mode, see the corresponding section.
To set other modes at the same time, repeat steps 4 and 5.
6
Press
(Start).
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on
the touch panel display ➞ press (Start) once for each original. When scanning
is complete, press [Done].
Scanning starts.
The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
NOTE
• To cancel this setting, follow the procedure below.
- For modes which have a right triangle ( ) on the bottom right of their key:
Example: Frame Erase
Press [Special Features] ➞ [Frame Erase] ➞ [Cancel].
- For modes which do not have a right triangle ( ) on the bottom right of their key:
Example: Job Build
Press [Special Features] ➞ [Job Build].
• To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press
[Option] ➞ [Cancel].
• If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the
Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p.
5-18.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press
(Reset).
What are Special Features?
4-3
Special Scanning Features
4
2-Page Separation
This mode enables you to scan facing pages in a book or bound original and record
then onto separate pages.
IMPORTANT
• The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (11x17+,
Other Size, and Long Strip Original), 2-Sided Original, Different Size Originals, or Binding
Erase mode.
• The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct
Sending or Manual Sending mode.
• Place your original on the platen glass. The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used
when the original is placed in the feeder.
Special Scanning Features
4
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ [Option] ➞ [Special Features]
➞ [2-Page Separation].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
4-4
2-Page Separation
Frame Erase
This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when scanning
various types of originals.
The following three Frame Erase modes are available.
■ Original Frame Erase
This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the scanned
image if the original is smaller than the selected record size. You can also use this mode
to create a blank border around the edge of the scanned image.
■ Book Frame Erase
This mode erases the dark borders, as well as center and contour lines that appear if you
are scanning facing pages in a book or bound original.
■ Binding Erase
This mode erases the shadows that appear on the scanned image from binding holes on
originals.
Frame Erase
4-5
4
Special Scanning Features
IMPORTANT
• Combinations of the three Frame Erase modes cannot be set. If you select one of these
modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
• The Frame Erase mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct
Sending or Manual Sending mode.
Original Frame Erase
IMPORTANT
The Original Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (11x17+,
Auto, Other Size, and Long Strip Original) or Different Size Originals mode.
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ [Option] ➞ [Special Features]
➞ [Frame Erase].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
Special Scanning Features
4
2
Press [Original Frame Erase].
3
Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width.
● If you want to set the same width for all four borders:
❑ Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width ➞ press [Next].
4-6
Frame Erase
● If you want to set the top, left, right, and bottom widths
independently:
❑ Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
❑ Select the desired frame erase borders ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective
frame erase widths ➞ press [Next].
To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press
[Adjust All At Once].
Select the original size ➞ press [OK].
IMPORTANT
You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown
on the touch panel display.
NOTE
To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
Book Frame Erase
IMPORTANT
The Book Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (11x17+,
Auto, Other Size, and Long Strip Original) or Different Size Originals mode.
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ [Option] ➞ [Special Features]
➞ [Frame Erase].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
Frame Erase
4-7
4
Special Scanning Features
4
4
2
Press [Book Frame Erase].
3
Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase widths.
Special Scanning Features
● If you want to set the same width for all four borders:
❑ Press [Center] and [Sides] ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase
widths ➞ press [Next].
● If you want to set the top, left, center, right, and bottom widths
independently:
❑ Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
❑ Select the desired frame erase borders ➞ press [-] or [+] to set their respective
frame erase widths ➞ press [Next].
To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press
[Adjust All At Once].
4
Select the size of the bound original when it is open ➞ press
[OK].
IMPORTANT
You can set the Book Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown on
the touch panel display.
NOTE
To select an A or B series paper size, press [A/B-size].
4-8
Frame Erase
Binding Erase
IMPORTANT
• The Binding Erase mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (11x17+, Other
Size, and Long Strip Original) or 2-Page Separation mode.
• Do not place originals with binding holes into the feeder, as this may damage the
originals.
• If you are using the Binding Erase mode, the borders you do not select are also erased
by 1/8" (4 mm).
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ [Option] ➞ [Special Features]
➞ [Frame Erase].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press [Binding Erase] ➞ select the border where the binding
holes are located.
The border is where the binding holes are located on the original, if you visualize
the original as being face up.
3
Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width ➞ press [OK].
Frame Erase
4-9
4
Special Scanning Features
1
Job Build
This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to be placed at once, by
dividing them into multiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen
glass for scanning. The originals are sent as one document after all of the batches
have been scanned.
IMPORTANT
• The Job Build mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size or Long
Strip Original) mode.
• The Job Build mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending
or Manual Sending mode.
• You cannot change the scan settings while the machine is scanning originals in the Job
Build mode. You need to set the necessary scan settings beforehand, according to the
type of originals and the desired result.
• You can change or specify the following settings before scanning the next batch of
originals (i.e., between batches): the Document Size Select (Auto or manual) mode, scan
exposure, original type, 2-Sided Original, and color mode.
• If you place your originals into the feeder, remove the originals from the original output
area when the scanning of each batch is complete.
• The maximum number of pages that can be sent at one time is 999. When using the Job
Build mode, a message appears to ask you if you want to send the job when 999 pages
of originals have been scanned. If you select to send the job, the scanned 999 pages are
sent. If you cancel the job, the scanned pages are not sent.
Special Scanning Features
4
NOTE
• If you place different size originals into the feeder, set the Different Size Originals mode.
• If you want to scan one-sided and two-sided originals and store them as two-sided
documents, divide the originals into one-sided and two-sided batches. For example, if the
first batch consists of two-sided originals, set the 2-Sided Original mode. Thereafter, you
have to manually set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode for each batch of originals that
you scan.
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ [Option] ➞ [Special Features]
➞ [Job Build].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
4-10
Job Build
2
Press [Done] ➞ [OK].
3
Press
(Start).
NOTE
To cancel scanning, press [Cancel] or
When scanning is complete, place your next batch of originals
➞ press
(Start).
If you want to change the scan settings, change them before pressing
(Start).
4
You can select the document size. (See "Document Size," on p. 3-8.)
You can change the scan exposure and the original type settings. (See "Scan
Exposure and Original Type Settings," on p. 3-13.)
You can change the color mode setting. (See "Changing Color Modes," on p.
3-21.)
You can change the one-sided or two-sided original setting. (See "2-Sided
Original," on p. 3-4.)
● If the original is two-sided:
❑ Press [2-Sided Original].
❑ Select the type of two-sided original ➞ press [OK].
Job Build
4-11
Special Scanning Features
4
(Stop).
Details of each item are shown below.
[Book Type]:
The front and back sides of the original have the same
top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite
top-bottom orientations.
Do not forget to set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, according to the
type of originals that you place next.
To cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, press [2-Sided Original] ➞ [Cancel].
Repeat this step as necessary.
IMPORTANT
The 2-Sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-L1)
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is attached.
4
Special Scanning Features
5
4-12
Job Build
After the last batch of originals is scanned, press [Done].
Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)
This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. To
scan originals with text or lines with a sharper contrast, use [High] as the setting. To
scan originals containing printed images or other halftones with a softer contrast,
use [Low] as the setting.
■ Low
■ High
This setting enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is scanned
with a sharper contrast. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint
pencil drawn images.
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ [Option] ➞ [Special Features]
➞ [Sharpness].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press [Low] or [High] to adjust the sharpness ➞ press [OK].
To scan text or lines clearly, the setting should be towards [High]. To scan
originals containing printed images or other halftones, the setting should be
towards [Low].
Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)
4-13
4
Special Scanning Features
If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo
mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can
lessen this moiré effect by using [Low] as the setting to produce a clearer image.
Image Quality Adjustment
You can adjust the scan exposure to erase the background color of the original, or
prevent the original image on the reverse side of thin originals from appearing on
the scanned pages.
IMPORTANT
• Press [A] (Auto) if you want to set the machine to automatically adjust the scan exposure
(see "Automatic Exposure Adjustment," on p. 3-16).
• If [A] (Auto) is selected as the scan exposure on the Scan Settings screen, pressing
[Image Qual. Adjustment] and making fine adjustments cancels the automatic scan
exposure setting. Similarly, if you select [A] (Auto) for the scan exposure setting when
image quality adjustments have been made, the Image Quality Adjustment mode is
canceled, and the automatic scan exposure setting is used instead.
• The Remove Background mode cannot be used with the Prevent Bleeding mode.
Special Scanning Features
4
■ Remove Background
This mode enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original. This mode
is especially useful for scanning originals, such as catalogues and paper, that have turned
yellow from age.
■ Prevent Bleeding
This mode enables you to prevent the original image on the reverse side of thin originals
from appearing on the scanned pages.
4-14
Image Quality Adjustment
Remove Background
This mode enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original. This
mode is especially useful for scanning originals, such as catalogues and paper, that
have turned yellow from age.
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ [Option] ➞ [Special Features]
➞ [Image Qual. Adjustment].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
2
Press [Remove Background] ➞ [OK].
If the background color remains, or if you want to make the background color
darker when the original is scanned in the Remove Background mode, make fine
adjustments to the density of the background color.
If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color,
press [Fine Adjustment] ➞ press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of each color
that you want to adjust ➞ press [OK].
For example, if the background color (yellow) of the original remains, press [-]
next to <Yellow> to adjust the density.
Adjusting Yellow automatically adjusts the levels of Red and Green to the same
level as Yellow. However, adjusting the levels of Red or Green sets Yellow back to
its default level.
NOTE
• You can adjust the density of each color by pressing [-] or [+]. Press [-] to make the
color lighter, or press [+] to make the color darker.
• If you make fine adjustments to the density, the automatic scan exposure setting is
canceled, and the original is scanned according to the Fine Adjustment settings.
Image Quality Adjustment
4-15
Special Scanning Features
4
Prevent Bleeding
This mode enables you to prevent the original image on the reverse side of thin
originals from appearing on the scanned pages.
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press the
Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ [Option] ➞ [Special Features]
➞ [Image Qual. Adjustment].
For more information on specifying the destination, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Sending Methods."
4
Special Scanning Features
2
Specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent.
Details of each item are shown below.
[-]: This setting prevents dark areas on the reverse side of the original from
appearing on the scanned pages, but light areas on the front side may not
be scanned either.
[+]: This setting may not be able to completely prevent dark areas on the
reverse side of the original from appearing on the scanned pages, but light
areas on the front side of the original are always scanned.
❑ Press [Prevent Bleed-thru] ➞ [Fine Adjustment].
❑ Press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent ➞
press [OK] ➞ [OK].
NOTE
If you make fine adjustments to the density, the automatic scan exposure setting is
canceled, and the original is scanned according to the Fine Adjustment settings.
4-16
Image Quality Adjustment
User Preset Keys
You can set any possible combination of scan settings and store them in a user
preset key in memory. The user preset keys are available for the user to set and
store, and can be assigned names for increased convenience. This feature is useful
for storing frequently used scan settings.
Once user preset keys are stored, they are displayed in the Scan Settings
drop-down list, and can be selected in the same way as the preset scan modes.
NOTE
• The scan settings stored as user preset keys in memory are not erased, even if the main
power is turned OFF.
• There are eight user preset keys.
• You can change the settings and assign names for the preset scan keys.
Storing Scan Settings
1
2
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
specify the scan settings that you want to store.
Press [Store/Erase].
User Preset Keys
4-17
4
Special Scanning Features
The scan modes stored in preset keys are: Clr/B&W 200 x 200 dpi, Clr/B&W 300 x
300 dpi, B&W 200 x 200 dpi, B&W 300 x 300 dpi, Clr/Gray 200 x 200 dpi, Clr/Gray
300 x 300 dpi, Clr/Gray 600 x 600 dpi, and B&W 600 x 600 dpi. (Clr stands for
Color.)
3
Select a user preset key for storing the scan settings ➞ press
[Store].
User Preset Keys
The table below describes the color selection modes and resolutions that can be
stored in, and the icons displayed when color modes are stored.
Special Scanning Features
4
Icon
Color Mode
Resolution
Automatic Color Selection
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi,
200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi
Automatic Color Selection
200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
Full Color
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi,
200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi
Full Color
200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
(Not Stored)
NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• You can assign a name to a user preset key by pressing [Register Name].
● If you select a key without settings:
❑ A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings ➞ press
[Yes].
● If you select a key that already has settings stored in it:
❑ A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous
settings ➞ press [Yes].
4-18
User Preset Keys
Naming a User Preset Key
1
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ [Option] ➞ [Store/
Erase].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Storing Scan Settings," on
p. 4-17.
Select a user preset key to name ➞ press [Register Name].
4
User Preset Keys
NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• You can also name keys with no settings stored in them.
3
Enter a name ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name changes to P1 to
P8.
User Preset Keys
4-19
Special Scanning Features
2
Erasing Scan Settings
1
Press the Scan Settings drop-down list ➞ press [Option] ➞
[Store/Erase].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Storing Scan Settings," on
p. 4-17.
2
Select the user preset key with the scan settings that you want
to erase ➞ press [Erase].
IMPORTANT
Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
Special Scanning Features
4
NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
3
Press [Yes].
NOTE
Key names are not erased. For instructions on changing a key name, see "Naming
a User Preset Key," on p. 4-19.
4-20
User Preset Keys
Sending Documents
5
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the fundamental procedures for sending documents, how to configure
send settings, and other useful features.
Sending Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Sending a Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Sending an E-Mail Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Sending an I-Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Sending a Job to a File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Sending a Job to a User Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Delaying a Send Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Job Done Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Previewing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Stamping Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Setting the File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Sending a Compact PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Trace & Smooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Sending a Searchable PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Encrypting PDF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Adding a Digital Signature to a PDF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Job Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5-1
Sending Methods
You can enter the document's name, subject line, message body text, and replay-to
address for document to be sent. Documents can be sent without changing any of
the send settings, or you can configure them to suit your needs.
When you send a document, you can also send it at a preset time.
IMPORTANT
If you send an image as a TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) file to a Macintosh, the
recipient may not be able to view the image correctly. In this case, send the image as a
PDF file, or view the TIFF file with an application, such as Apple QuickTime Player.
5
Sending Documents
NOTE
• For instructions on placing your originals, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• For instructions on specifying destinations not registered in the Address Book, see
"Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab," on p. 2-2.
• For instructions on specifying a User Inbox as a destination, see "Specifying a User
Inbox," on p. 2-21.
• For instructions on specifying destinations stored in the Address Book, see "Using the
Address Book," on p. 2-24.
• For instructions on specifying destinations using the one-touch buttons, see "Using the
One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-26.
• For instructions on specifying destinations and settings using the favorites buttons, see
"Using the Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-27.
• For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory listings on
a server on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), see "Using
a Server," on p. 2-28.
• For instructions on setting the scan mode for your documents, see "Selecting a Scan
Mode," on p. 3-2.
• If Direct Sending mode is set to 'Off' and Preview mode is set, you can verify the images
from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on
p. 5-18.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the standard mode, press
(Reset).
5-2
Sending Methods
Sending a Fax
You can scan originals and send them as faxes. This section describes the
procedure for specifying a sender's name.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
■ Memory Sending
All of the originals to be sent are first scanned and read into memory, then sent. This
means that you do not need to stay near the machine once the originals have been
scanned.
NOTE
The memory can hold a total of approximately 6,000 pages of sent and received
documents.
■ Direct Sending
The machine sends each page of the document to the destination as it is scanned.
IMPORTANT
• With Direct Sending mode, you can send a document of two or more pages only when
using the feeder. You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on
the platen glass.
• You can specify only one destination at a time for Direct Sending mode.
• Memory Sending is automatically set when using Delayed Send or when multiple
destinations are specified.
• If an error occurs or you cancel transmission in the Direct Sending mode, you can check
how many pages have been sent to the destination by printing the Fax Activity Report, or
on the Log screen for Fax on the System Monitor screen.
• If the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, you can select which line to
send with.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the fax destination ➞ press
[Send Settings].
Sending Methods
5-3
Sending Documents
5
2
Specify each setting ➞ press [Done].
[Sender's Names (TTI)]:
Press [Sender's Names (TTI)] ➞ select sender's name ➞ press [OK].
The name registered under <00> is selected by default.
[Direct]:
5
Sending Documents
You can select either the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode by pressing
[Direct].
To select the Direct Sending mode, press [Direct], and the key lights.
To select the Manual Sending mode, do not press [Direct], and the key remains
unlit.
You can also set Direct Sending mode on the screen for specifying a new fax
destination. (See "Specifying a Fax Number," on p. 2-2.)
[Line Selection]:
If the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, select the line to use for
sending.
Select [Line 1], [Line 2], or [Auto] ➞ press [OK].
[Line 1]: Standard line
[Line 2]: Additional line
[Auto]:
5-4
Sending Methods
Selects the line according to the setting for TX Line Selection in Dual
Line Options under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen). (See "Selecting the Line for Sending,"
on p. 9-55.)
IMPORTANT
• You can restrict sending from line 1 or line 2. (See "Selecting the Line for Sending,"
on p. 9-55.)
• When using manual sending, line 1 is automatically selected, regardless of the line
settings.
• When [Auto] is selected for [Line Selection], the user name displayed/printed on the
recipient's machine will be the user name registered for the line which was used for
sending.
3
Press
(Start).
If you are using Direct Sending mode, it is automatically set to 'Off' after the
transmission is complete.
Sending an E-Mail Message
You can scan a document and send it as an attached file in an e-mail message. You
can add the document's name, a subject line, message body text, and reply-to
address. The scanned document can be sent as a JPEG, TIFF, or PDF file.
IMPORTANT
If you are using Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5, 2000, or 2003, a sending error may
occur when you send an e-mail message in the following cases:
- When a user is logged in to the machine using SDL or the Local Device Authentication
system of SSO
- When <SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)> for <Authent./Encryption> in E-mail/I-Fax
in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'On'
In these cases, you should add the user logged in to the machine using SDL or the Local
Device Authentication system of SSO to [Send on behalf of] in <Delivery Options> in
Exchange General in Exchange. For more information, contact your system
administrator.
Sending Methods
5-5
5
Sending Documents
NOTE
• To use this feature, you must register sender names beforehand. (See "Registering
Sender Names," on p. 1-17.)
• The name registered as the user's name is displayed in <00> of the Sender's
Name List. (See "Registering the Unit's Name," on p. 1-18.)
• If the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, the unit's name
registered for the line that is selected for Priority TX in TX Line Selection in Dual
Line Options under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is displayed. (See "Registering the Unit's Name," on
p. 1-18.)
1
2
5
Place your originals ➞ specify the e-mail address ➞ press
[File Format].
Select a file format.
Sending Documents
NOTE
For instructions on setting the file format, see "Setting the File Format," on p. 5-23.
3
Press [Send Settings] ➞ specify each setting ➞ press [Done].
[Send Doc. Name]:
Press [Send Doc. Name] ➞ enter the name of the document that you want to
send ➞ press [OK].
[DocName OCR]:
When PDF (OCR) is set as the file format, set [DocName OCR] to 'On' to
automatically extract the first text block in the document for use as its filename.
You can set the number of characters that are extracted for [DocName OCR] in
<Num. of Char. for Doc. Name Setting> in PDF (OCR) Settings in TX Settings
under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). (See "PDF (OCR) Mode," on p. 9-24.)
5-6
Sending Methods
The first text block extracted from the first page of the document is automatically
set as the document name. Characters such as ",", "/", "[", or "]", which are invalid
when sending a file, will not be extracted.
If a document name is already entered, the extracted text is appended to the end
of the filename. Characters over the character limit will be cut off.
The encrypted PDF mode and [DocName OCR] cannot be set at the same time.
[Subject]:
Press [Subject] ➞ enter a subject of the e-mail message ➞ press [OK].
[Message]:
Press [Message] ➞ enter a message body text ➞ press [OK].
[Reply-to]:
Press [Reply-to] ➞ select a reply-to address ➞ press [OK].
The selected destination is set as the reply-to e-mail address.
[E-mail Priority]:
Press the E-mail Priority drop-down list ➞ select a priority for your e-mail
message.
IMPORTANT
You need to store reply-to addresses in the Address Book beforehand. (See
"E-Mail Addresses," on p. 10-9.)
Sending Methods
5
Sending Documents
If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a
destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] ➞
enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book," on p. 2-24.)
5-7
NOTE
• When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate image
attached to an e-mail message, and the extension of the document matches the file
format that you select for sending. The file name prefix of the image attached to the
e-mail message is assigned as follows:
- If you set the document's name:
The file name prefix is generated by the document's name and three digits that
signify the page number of the image.
Example: document name_002.tif
- If you do not set the document's name:
The file name prefix is generated by the job number (0001 to 4999) and three
digits that signify the page number of the image.
Example: 1231_002.tif
• If you do not enter a subject, the default subject set in E-mail/I-Fax Common
Settings is used. To access the E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings screen, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Communications Settings] ➞
[E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings]. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings," on p.
11-5.)
• You cannot select multiple destinations for the reply-to address.
• [Access Number] is displayed on the screen for selecting the reply-to address only
if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number
Management," on p. 11-18.)
• If a login service is set for the machine and <Specify Authorized User Reply-to
Destination> in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the e-mail address of the login user is
displayed as the reply-to address. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings," on p.
11-5.)
• For instructions on storing your machine's e-mail address, see the Network Guide.
Sending Documents
5
4
5-8
Press
Sending Methods
(Start).
Sending an I-Fax
You can scan a document and send it to a destination via the Internet as an I-fax.
An I-fax can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes via the Internet. You
can add the document's name, a subject line, message body text, and reply-to
address.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the I-fax destination ➞ press
[Send Settings].
2
Specify each setting ➞ press [Done].
[Send Doc. Name]:
Press [Send Doc. Name] ➞ enter a document name ➞ press [OK].
[Subject]:
Press [Subject] ➞ enter a subject of your I-fax ➞ press [OK].
[Message]:
Press [Message] ➞ enter a message body text ➞ press [OK].
Sending Methods
5-9
5
Sending Documents
IMPORTANT
If you are using Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5, 2000, or 2003, a sending error may
occur when you send an I-fax in the following cases:
- When a user is logged in to the machine using SDL or the Local Device Authentication
system of SSO
- When <SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)> for <Authent./Encryption> in E-mail/I-Fax
in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'On'
In these cases, you should add the user logged in to the machine using SDL or the Local
Device Authentication system of SSO to [Send on behalf of] in <Delivery Options> in
Exchange General in Exchange. For more information, contact your system
administrator.
[Reply-to]:
Press [Reply-to] ➞ select a reply-to address ➞ press [OK].
If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a
destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] ➞
enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book," on p. 2-24.)
A Full Mode Delivery Confirmation message will be sent to the selected reply-to
address also.
IMPORTANT
You need to store reply-to addresses in the Address Book beforehand. (See
"E-Mail Addresses," on p. 10-9.)
NOTE
• When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate TIFF image
attached to the I-fax. The file name prefix of the image attached to the I-fax is
assigned as follows:
- If you set the document's name:
The file name prefix is generated by the document's name and three digits that
signify the page number of the image.
Example: document name_001.tif
- If you do not set the document's name:
The file name prefix is generated by the job number (0001 to 4999) and three
digits that signify the page number of the image.
Example: 1231_001.tif
• If you do not enter a subject, the default subject set in E-mail/I-Fax Common
Settings is used. To access the E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings screen, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Communications Settings] ➞
[E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings]. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings," on p.
11-5.)
• You cannot select multiple destinations for the reply-to address.
• [Access Number] is displayed on the screen for selecting the reply-to address only
if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number
Management," on p. 11-18.)
• If a login service is set for the machine and <Specify Authorized User Reply-to
Destination> in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the e-mail address of the login user is
displayed as the reply-to address. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings," on p.
11-5.)
• For instructions on storing your machine's e-mail address, see the Network Guide.
Sending Documents
5
3
5-10
Press
Sending Methods
(Start).
Sending a Job to a File Server
You can send a job to any computer that acts as a file server on the network. The
following procedure explains how to specify the document's name and the file
format of the image you are sending.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the file server's destination ➞
press [File Format].
2
Select a file format.
NOTE
For instructions on setting the file format, see "Setting the File Format," on p. 5-23.
Sending Methods
5-11
Sending Documents
5
3
Press [Send Settings] ➞ specify a send document name ➞
press [Done].
[Send Doc. Name]:
Press [Send Doc. Name] ➞ enter the document name ➞ press [OK].
[DocName OCR]:
5
Sending Documents
When PDF (OCR) is set as the file format, set [DocName OCR] to 'On' to
automatically extract the first text in the document for use as its filename. You can
set the number of characters that are extracted for [DocName OCR] in <Num. of
Char. for Doc. Name Setting> in PDF (OCR) Settings in TX Settings under
<Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). You can set from 1 to 24 characters for this setting. (See "PDF (OCR)
Mode," on p. 9-24.)
The first text block extracted from the first page of the document is automatically
set as the document name. Characters such as ",", "/", "[", or "]", which are invalid
when sending a file, will not be extracted.
If a document name is already entered, the extracted text is appended to the end
of the filename. Characters over the character limit will be cut off.
The encrypted PDF mode and [DocName OCR] cannot be set at the same time.
IMPORTANT
If you use characters such as ",", "/", "[", or "]" in the document name, you may not
be able to send the file to file servers that run on operating systems that do not
recognize such characters.
5-12
Sending Methods
4
Press
(Start).
Sending Methods
5-13
5
Sending Documents
NOTE
When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate image and
stored in a file server. The extension of the document matches the file format that
you select for sending. The file name prefix of the image attached to the document
you are sending is assigned as follows:
- If you set the document's name and Divide into Pages is turned on:
The file name prefix is generated by the document's name, the year, month, day,
hour, minute, and second the document is sent, and the five digits that signify the
page number of the image.
Example:
document name_20070410203000_00002.tif
document name_20070410203000_00002.jpg
document name_20070410203000_00002.pdf
- If you set the document's name and Divide into Pages is not turned on:
The file name prefix is generated by the document's name and the year, month,
day, hour, minute, and second the document is sent.
Example:
document name_20070410203000.tif
document name_20070410203000.pdf
- If you do not set the document's name and Divide into Pages is turned on:
The file name prefix is generated by the year, month, day, hour, minute, and
second the document is sent, and the five digits that signify the page number of
the image.
Example:
20070410203000_00002.tif
20070410203000_00002.jpg
20070410203000_00002.pdf
- If you do not set the document's name and Divide into Pages is not turned on:
The file name prefix is generated by the year, month, day, hour, minute, and
second the document is sent.
Example:
20070410203000.tif
20070410203000.pdf
Sending a Job to a User Inbox
You can scan a document and store it in a User Inbox. If you include a User Inbox
as one of the destinations to which you are sending your document, the document
is stored in the selected User Inbox for later use. Documents stored in a User Inbox
can be printed and sent to other destinations. The following procedure explains how
to specify the document's name when you want to send it to a User Inbox.
IMPORTANT
• A document stored in a User Inbox is automatically erased after three days. However,
you can set the time that must elapse before the documents in an inbox are automatically
erased. (See Chapter 8, "Customizing Settings," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
• Additional documents cannot be stored in a User Inbox under the following conditions.
(These numbers may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
- When a total of 1,500 documents or images have been stored in any or all of the
inboxes
- When a total of 6,000 pages of documents or images have been stored in any or all of
the inboxes
Sending Documents
5
NOTE
• It is recommended that you delete unnecessary documents or image data from the User
Inboxes to make space for storing new documents.
• For more information on User Inboxes, see the Copying and Mail Box Guide.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the desired User Inbox ➞ press
[Send Settings].
2
Specify a send document name ➞ press [Done].
[Send Doc. Name]:
Press [Send Doc. Name] ➞ enter a document name ➞ press [OK].
5-14
Sending Methods
3
Press
(Start).
Delaying a Send Job
The Delayed Send mode enables you to store a send job in memory, and have it
sent at a later time.
A job set to be
sent at 18:00
Jobs set to be sent at 20:00
Job
Job
Job
Job
A
B
C
D
Two
Destinations
18:00
Three
One
Two
Destinations Destination Destinations
20:00
Job
Job
Job
Job
Job
Job
Job
Job
A
A
B
C
D
B
D
B
Sending Methods
5-15
5
Sending Documents
NOTE
• You can reserve up to 120 jobs (including 64 fax jobs) for delayed sending. However, the
actual number of jobs that can be reserved may be less than 120, depending on the
following conditions:
- If multiple documents are being sent at the same time
- If large document files are being sent
- A large amount of memory is being used for the inboxes
• The number of delayed send jobs which you can reserve may also be reduced if there
are other jobs with no Delayed Send settings, or if there are other factors affecting the
specified destinations.
• Once the delayed documents are sent, the documents are automatically deleted from
memory.
• You can check the status, cancel, or change the destinations of documents for which a
preset send time has been specified. (See "Using the System Monitor Screen," on p.
1-37, and Chapter 8, "Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status.")
• If multiple fax jobs reach their delayed send time simultaneously, documents are sent in
the following order:
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press [Send
Settings].
2
Press [Delayed Send].
3
Enter the send time using
Sending Documents
5
-
(numeric keys).
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
➞
0705
11:18 p.m. ➞
2318
Examples: 7:05 a.m.
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the document will be sent at that
time on the next day.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the send time, press
entry ➞ enter another four digit number.
4
Press [OK] ➞ [Done].
5
Press
(Clear) to clear your
(Start).
NOTE
• To cancel the currently set Delayed Send settings, press [Send Settings] ➞
[Delayed Send] ➞ [Cancel].
• You can only cancel delayed send jobs from the System Monitor screen. (See
"Using the System Monitor Screen," on p. 1-37.)
5-16
Sending Methods
Job Done Notice
You can send a job done notice to a specified e-mail address to notify you when a
send job is complete.
IMPORTANT
To send a job done notice, you need to store e-mail addresses in the Address Book
beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses," on p. 10-5.)
1
2
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press [Send
Settings].
Press [Job Done Notice].
Sending Documents
5
3
Select the destination where the job done notice is to be sent
➞ press [OK].
If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a
destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] ➞
enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book," on p. 2-24.)
NOTE
• [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in
Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-18.)
• For instructions on specifying addresses stored in the Address Book, see "Using
the Address Book," on p. 2-24.
• You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.
4
Press [Done].
Sending Methods
5-17
5
Press
(Start).
NOTE
To cancel this setting, press [Send Settings] ➞ [Job Done Notice] ➞ [Cancel].
Previewing Originals
This mode enables you to preview the scanned data of your originals and to check
the page count before sending your document. You can verify the scanned data of
your originals on the Preview screen.
IMPORTANT
The Preview mode cannot be used when sending a fax document with the Direct
Sending or Manual Sending mode.
Sending Documents
5
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press [Send
Settings].
2
Press [Preview] ➞ [Done].
[Preview] is lit when it is on.
[Preview] is not lit when it is off.
3
Press
(Start).
NOTE
If the Preview key is not lit, the Preview display setting is turned off, and the
Preview screen is not displayed. In this case, the scanned data is sent to the
specified destination when scanning is complete.
5-18
Sending Methods
4
Press [
5
Select whether to erase the page.
] or [
] to specify the page that you want to verify.
To erase the page, press [Page Erase].
If you do not want to erase the page, proceed to step 9.
Select [Erase Single Page] or [Erase Pages Consecutively] ➞
select the pages you want to erase.
● If you select [Erase Single Page]:
❑ Press [-] or [+] to specify the page you want to erase.
● If you select [Erase Pages Consecutively]:
❑ Press [First Page] and [Last Page] to specify the first and the last page of the
range you want to erase by pressing [-] or [+].
7
Press [Start].
8
Press [Yes].
9
Verify the images ➞ press [Start Send].
You can press [
] (reduce) or [
] (enlarge) to zoom in or out.
You can press [ ], [ ], [▼], or [▲] to specify the area to display when you zoom
in or out on the page.
When your image is enlarged or reduced, you can see the general location of
which area you are previewing with
(above the reduce and enlarge icons).
Sending Methods
5-19
Sending Documents
6
5
NOTE
The number of scanned pages is displayed on the Send Process screen.
Stamping Originals
The machine can print a stamp (approximately 1/8" (3 mm) in diameter) on the front
side of scanned and sent originals.
Position at which
stamp is applied
Position at which
stamp is applied
5
Sending Documents
Vertical Placement
Horizontal Placement
IMPORTANT
• The Stamp mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size) or 2-Page
Separation mode.
• The Stamp mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending or
Manual Sending mode.
NOTE
The stamp is applied to the originals that are scanned from the feeder.
1
Place your originals in the feeder ➞ specify the destination ➞
press [Send Settings].
NOTE
You can also set the Stamp mode by pressing [Stamp] in Edit Standard Send
Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings
(from the Additional Functions).
5-20
Sending Methods
2
Press [Stamp] ➞ [Done].
To cancel the Stamp mode, press [Stamp] again.
Press
(Start).
NOTE
If the stamp is not marked clearly, see Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance," in the
Reference Guide.
Sending Methods
5-21
5
Sending Documents
3
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
You can select TIFF, JPEG, or PDF as the file format to send a document in. If you
select PDF as the file format, you can also specify the Trace and Smooth, Compact,
OCR (Text Searchable), Encrypt, and/or Add Digital Signatures modes.
NOTE
• For instructions on placing your originals, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• For instructions on specifying addresses not registered in the Address Book, see
"Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab," on p. 2-2.
• For instructions on specifying addresses using the Address Book, see "Using the
Address Book," on p. 2-24.
• For instructions on specifying addresses using the one-touch buttons, see "Using the
One-Touch Buttons," on p. 2-26.
• For instructions on specifying addresses and settings using the favorites buttons, see
"Using the Favorites Buttons," on p. 2-27.
• For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory listings on
a server on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), see "Using
a Server," on p. 2-28.
• For instructions on setting the scan mode for your documents, see "Selecting a Scan
Mode," on p. 3-2.
• Specify an e-mail or file server destination.
• You can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See
"Previewing Originals," on p. 5-18.)
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the standard mode, press
(Reset).
Sending Documents
5
5-22
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
Setting the File Format
You can send a scanned document to a file server or as an e-mail attachment. The
following procedure explains how to set the file format of the sent document.
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press [File
Format].
2
Sending Documents
5
Select a file format.
[File Formats]:
[TIFF/PDF Auto Select]:
Sends the file in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or
PDF (Grayscale/Color) format. If you select this file
format, [TIFF/PDF] is displayed on the Send Basic
Features screen.
[TIFF/JPEG Auto Select]: Sends images in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or
JPEG (Grayscale/Color) format. If you select this file
format, [TIFF/JPEG] is displayed on the Send Basic
Features screen.
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
5-23
[PDF]:
Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color
mode. You can also specify [Trace & Smooth],
[Compact], [OCR (Text Searchable)], [Encrypt], and/or
[Add Digital Signatures].
[JPEG]:
Sends the file in the JPEG format, if you select a color
mode other than Black-and-White.
[TIFF]:
Sends the file in the TIFF format, only if you select the
Black-and-White mode.
● If you select [TIFF/PDF Auto Select], [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select], or
[JPEG] as the file format:
❑ Press [OK].
Sending Documents
5
If you select [TIFF/PDF Auto Select], the Divide into Pages mode is not
available.
If you select [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select] or [JPEG], [Divide into Pages] is set to
'On'.
5-24
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
● If you select [PDF] or [TIFF] as the file format:
❑ Specify whether to divide your documents into separate pages ➞ press [OK].
If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each
of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key
lights.
If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do
not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.
For information on the type of PDF, see the following sections.
• [Compact]: See "Sending a Compact PDF," on p. 5-26.
• [Trace & Smooth]: See "Trace & Smooth," on p. 5-28.
• [OCR (Text Searchable)]: See "Sending a Searchable PDF," on p. 5-29.
• [Encrypt]: See "Encrypting PDF Files," on p. 5-31.
• [Add Digital Signatures]: See "Adding a Digital Signature to a PDF," on p.
5-36.
NOTE
• To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF
format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
• To view a JPEG file, software that supports the JPEG format (such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer for Windows) is required.
• To view a TIFF file, software that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for
Windows) is required.
3
Press
(Start).
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
5-25
Sending Documents
5
You can select the type of PDF from <PDF options>.
Sending a Compact PDF
This mode enables you to send files containing text originals or text/photo originals
using a high compression ratio. If you select [Compact] as the PDF file format, it is
recommended that you set the original type setting to either 'Text/Photo' or 'Text',
depending on the image type. If you select [Compact], [PDF (Compact)] is
displayed as the file format on the Send Basic Features screen. You can also select
[OCR (Text Searchable)].
IMPORTANT
• If you send a compact PDF, select any of the following combination of a color mode and
resolution:
- Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale) and 300 x 300 dpi
- Full Color and 300 x 300 dpi
- Grayscale and 300 x 300 dpi
• If the document is a long strip original (33 1/2" (850 mm) or longer), you cannot send a
compact PDF. (Long strip originals of up to 24 7/8" (630 mm) can be scanned using the
scanning area of the machine, but long strip originals longer than 24 7/8" (630 mm) can
only be received by I-fax, etc.)
Sending Documents
5
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature Set
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated.
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press [File
Format].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Setting the File Format," on p. 5-23.
2
5-26
Press [Compact].
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
3
Specify whether to divide your documents into separate
pages ➞ press [OK].
If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of
which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.
If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not
press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.
NOTE
• To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF
format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
• If you select [Compact], you can also set [OCR (Text Searchable)] at the same
time. In that case, [PDF (Compact)] is displayed as the file format on the Send
Basic Features screen.
• For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary," on p. 14-25.
4
Press
(Start).
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
5-27
5
Sending Documents
IMPORTANT
• If [Compact] is selected for the PDF file format, the resolution is automatically
changed to [300x300 dpi]. If the color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/
Black-and-White)] or [Black and White], the color mode is automatically changed to
[Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)] or [Grayscale], respectively. If you want
to send the document with the resolution setting and the color mode that you
specify, change the PDF file format to anything other than [Compact] or [Trace &
Smooth].
• If [PDF (Compact)] is selected as the file format in Standard Send Settings in Edit
Standard Send Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in
Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) and you are
sending documents by fax or I-fax, a message prompting you to change the file
format may appear on the screen. In this case, change the file format to anything
other than [PDF (Compact)] or [PDF (Trace)].
• If [PDF (Compact)] is selected as the file format, documents can be sent only at a
zoom ratio of 100%.
Trace & Smooth
Trace & Smooth is an advanced setting of compact PDF, which enables you to
convert the text and the line drawings of a scanned image to scalable outline data.
The outline data (Trace) can be extracted and used in Adobe Illustrator. The
smoothing process can also be applied to the text of the outline data, so it has less
of a jagged edge when seen on a PC monitor or in print.
IMPORTANT
• If you send a trace and smooth PDF, select any of the following combination of a color
mode and resolution:
- Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale) and 300 x 300 dpi
- Full Color and 300 x 300 dpi
- Grayscale and 300 x 300 dpi
• Long strip originals (17" (432mm) or longer) cannot be used with the Trace & Smooth
mode.
• If you set the Trace & Smooth mode, the machine automatically recognizes which parts
of the document are text or line drawings. the machine may not recognize which parts of
the scanned document are text and line drawings correctly, depending on the scanned
document.
• If you set the Trace & Smooth mode, smoothing is only performed on the areas of the
document that are correctly recognized as text.
• The text and background of a PDF containing outline data may become misaligned or
text and line drawings may not be displayed when opened in Adobe Illustrator, depending
on the version of Adobe Illustrator used to open the PDF.
Sending Documents
5
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature Set
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated.
• The Trace & Smooth mode cannot be set by itself. If you select [Trace & Smooth],
[Compact] is automatically set to 'On'.
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press [File
Format].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Setting the File Format," on p. 5-23.
5-28
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
2
Press [Trace & Smooth].
3
Follow steps 3 and 4 of "Sending a Compact PDF," on p. 5-26.
Sending a Searchable PDF
This mode enables you to perform OCR (optical character recognition) to extract
data that can be recognized as text from the scanned image, and add it as a
transparent layer of text to create a PDF file that is searchable.
IMPORTANT
PDF (OCR) and Long Strip Original (17" (432 mm) or more) cannot be set at the same
time.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature Set
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated.
1
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press [File
Format].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Setting the File Format," on p. 5-23.
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
5-29
Sending Documents
5
2
3
Press [OCR (Text Searchable)].
Specify whether to divide your documents into separate
pages ➞ press [OK].
If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of
which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.
5
Sending Documents
If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not
press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.
IMPORTANT
Even if [PDF (OCR)] is selected as the file format, text may not be detected
correctly, depending on the background color, style and size of the characters in
the image.
NOTE
• To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF
format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
• For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary," on p. 14-25.
• If you select PDF (OCR) as the file format, and <Smart Scan> in PDF (OCR)
Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the orientation of the original is
detected, and the document is automatically rotated, if necessary, before it is sent.
• If you select [OCR (Text Searchable)], you can also set [Compact] at the same
time. In that case, [PDF (Compact)] is displayed as the file format on the Send
Basic Features screen.
4
5-30
Press
(Start).
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
Encrypting PDF Files
This mode enables you to encrypt PDF files that you send to an e-mail address or
file server for enhanced security. If a password is set for a PDF file, only users who
enter the correct password at the other party's machine can open, print, or change
the received PDF.
IMPORTANT
This mode can be used only if an e-mail address or file server is specified as the
destination. If a fax number, I-fax address, or inbox is specified as the destination, you
cannot send the job as an encrypted PDF file.
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated.
• The encrypted PDF mode and [DocName OCR] cannot be set at the same time.
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press [File
Format].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Setting the File Format," on p. 5-23.
2
Press [Encrypt].
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
5-31
Sending Documents
5
3
Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
<Encryption Level>:
Press the Encryption Level drop-down list ➞ select [Low (40-bit RC4)/Acrobat 3.0
and later], [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later], or [High (128-bit AES)/
Acrobat 7.0 and later].
Adobe Acrobat 5.0 or later is required for opening PDF files whose encryption
level is set to [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later].
Sending Documents
5
Adobe Acrobat 7.0 or later is required for opening PDF files whose encryption
level is set to [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later].
[Password Required to Open a Document]:
Select this key to set a password for opening the received PDF files. You can
specify a password by pressing [Password to Open a Doc.].
The received encrypted PDF files cannot be opened without entering the
password.
[Password to Open a Doc.]:
Press [Password to Open a Doc.] ➞ enter the password ➞ press [OK].
Re-enter the password for confirmation on the Confirm screen ➞ press [OK].
[Password Required to Change Permiss.]:
Select [Password Required to Change Permiss.] to set a password for printing or
editing the received PDF file. When selecting this key, you can specify detailed
settings, such as [Allow Printing], [Allow Changes], and [Enable Accessibility,
Copy, Extraction of Images]. Set the password in [Permission Password].
If [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set, the received encrypted PDF
files cannot be printed or edited without entering the password.
[Permission Password]:
Press [Permission Password] ➞ enter the password ➞ press [OK].
Re-enter the password for confirmation on the Confirm screen ➞ press [OK].
5-32
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
<Allow Printing>:
If [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected as the encryption level
Press the Allow Printing drop-down list ➞ select whether to allow printing of the
received PDF files. You can select this setting only if [Password Required to
Change Permiss.] is set to 'On'.
Printing is not allowed. Even if [Do Not Allow] is
selected, the document can be printed if it is opened
with the permission password if the recipient is using
Adobe Acrobat 5 or earlier.
• [Allow (Low Res. only)]: Only low-resolution printing is allowed. ([Allow (Low
Res. only)] is displayed only if [High (128-bit RC4)/
Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat
7.0 and later] is selected.)
• [Allow]:
Printing is allowed.
<Allow Changes>:
If [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected as the encryption level
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
5-33
5
Sending Documents
• [Do Not Allow]:
Press the Allow Changes drop-down list ➞ select whether to allow changing of
the received PDF files. You can select this setting only if [Password Required to
Change Permiss.] is set to 'On'.
5
• [Do Not Allow]:
Changing of documents is not
allowed.
• [Insert, Delete, or Rotate Pages]:
Inserting, deleting, and rotating
pages is allowed. ([Insert, Delete, or
Rotate Pages] is displayed only if
[High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and
later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat
7.0 and later] is selected.)
• [Add Digital Signatures]:
Adding digital signatures is allowed.
([Add Digital Signatures] is displayed
only if [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat
5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/
Acrobat 7.0 and later] is selected.)
Sending Documents
• [Add Comments and Digital Signatures]: Adding comments and digital
signatures is allowed.
• [Changes but Comment
Add/Page Extract.]:
Changing of documents except for
adding comments and extracting
pages is allowed. ([Changes except
Comment Add/Page Extract.] is
displayed only if [Low (40-bit RC4)/
Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected.)
• [Changes but Page Extraction]:
Changing of documents except for
extracting pages is allowed.
[Enable Accessibility, Copy, Extraction of Images]:
You can select this setting only if [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set
to 'On'.
If [Low (40-bit RC4)/Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected, you can select this setting.
Select this key to allow copying of images and page extraction. In addition, it
also has a function for reading aloud text inside a document for the visually
impaired.
If [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0
and later] is selected, [Enable Copying and Extraction of Image and Text] and
[Enable Access for the Visually Impaired] are displayed and you can set these
settings separately.
5-34
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
IMPORTANT
• If you did not enter a password in [Password to Open a Doc.] or [Permission
Password], enter the password in the screen that appears after pressing (Start).
You can store the settings for encrypted PDF files in a favorites button. If you do not
want to set a password for [Password to Open a Doc.] and [Permission Password]
in a favorites button, leave their text boxes blank.
• If you recall the Encrypted PDF settings by pressing [Recall], [Password to Open a
Doc.] and [Permission Password] become blank.
• You cannot set the same password for both [Password to Open a Doc.] and
[Permission Password].
• [Password to Open a Doc.] and [Permission Password] are displayed as asterisks
(********) on the Encrypted PDF screen.
• Even if you set restrictions for a PDF file with [Permission Password], some of
these restrictions may be ignored if the recipient opens the PDF with certain
software.
4
Press [OK].
5
Press
(Start).
NOTE
• If fax, I-fax, or User Inbox destinations are specified, the message telling you the
send job is canceled appears. Press [OK] ➞ check the destinations.
• To cancel the settings, press [File Format] ➞ [Encrypt] ➞ [Cancel].
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
5-35
5
Sending Documents
NOTE
• To open or print a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe
Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
• To change a PDF file or to enable copying and extraction of images, Adobe Acrobat
is required.
• Adding digital signatures and comments, and the ability to insert, delete, and rotate
pages are features of Adobe Acrobat.
• If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you enter on the
Password Required to Open a Document screen and the Permission Password
screen is not displayed as asterisks. (See Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings,"
in the Reference Guide.)
Adding a Digital Signature to a PDF
This mode enables you to send PDF documents with a digital signature.
You can add the following two types of digital signatures:
■ Device Signature
This mode uses the device signature certificate and key pair inside the machine to add a
digital signature to the document, which enables the recipient to verify which device
scanned it. The recipient can verify the device that signed the document, and whether the
document has been changed after it was signed.
■ User Signature
This mode uses information about the user currently logged in to the machine using a
SDL or SSO login service and the user signature certificate and key pair inside the
machine to add a digital signature to the document, which enables the recipient to verify
which user signed it. The recipient can verify the user that signed the document, and
whether the document has been changed after it was signed.
Sending Documents
5
IMPORTANT
• You can add only a digital signature to documents sent in either the PDF, PDF (Trace),
PDF (Compact), or PDF (OCR) file format. You cannot add a digital signature to
documents sent in the TIFF or JPEG format.
• If an error occurs when sending a multiple page PDF document with a digital signature,
the document will not be able to be opened by the recipient.
NOTE
• If you select to add both a device signature and user signature, the device signature is
added before the user signature.
• If the recipient verifies a PDF that has had both a device signature and user signature
added to it using software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe
Acrobat), only the user signature can be verified. The device signature causes the
document to be handled as if it has been altered.
• If you change the file format to a format other than 'PDF' after setting to add a digital
signature, a message confirming whether you want to change the file format is displayed.
If you change the file format, the digital signatures you have set to add are canceled.
• For information on validating certificates, registering certificates in the trusted certificates
list, and verifying signatures on the recipient side, see the documentation for the software
that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat).
5-36
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
Adding a Device Signature
1
Place your originals ➞ specify the destination ➞ press [File
Format].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Setting the File Format," on p. 5-23.
2
Press [Add Digital Signatures].
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
5-37
5
Sending Documents
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated.
• You can only add device signatures to PDF documents if the optional Universal Send
PDF Security Feature Set (standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/
C3080i) is activated and you have generated a device signature certificate and key pair in
Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). For more
information, see Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.
• <Certificate Thumbprint> contains sender information used to validate the reliability of a
PDF with a device signature, by matching it with the MD5 or SHA-1 message digest
number. For more information on confirming <Certificate Thumbprint> and other device
signature information, see "Confirming the Device Signature Certificate," on p. 9-28, or
Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.
• If the SDL or SSO login service is set and an e-mail address is registered for the user, in
addition to adding the device signature, the [Author] property of the PDF is set to the
e-mail address of the user.
3
Press [Device Signature] ➞ [OK] ➞ [OK].
4
Press
(Start).
Adding a User Signature
5
Sending Documents
You can add a user signature using information about the user currently logged in
to the machine using a login service and the user signature certificate and key pair
inside the machine.
IMPORTANT
You cannot forward a received fax/I-fax document with a user signature from the
machine.
NOTE
• This mode is available only under the following conditions:
- The optional Digital User Signature PDF Kit is activated.
- A user certificate and key pair for each user is issued by the certificate authority.
• For information on the certificate authorities that you can use for issuing user certificates
for each user, see the Before Using the Digital User Signature PDF Kit, included with the
Digital User Signature PDF Kit.
• The following conditions are necessary to add a user signature to a PDF:
- A login service (SDL or SSO) must be set for the machine.
- A user certificate must be installed in the machine using the Remote UI. (See Chapter
3, "Customizing Settings," in the Remote UI Guide.)
1
Log in to the machine using a login service.
For more information on the SDL and SSO login services, see Chapter 2, "Basic
Operations," in the Reference Guide.
5-38
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
2
Place your originals and specify the destination ➞ press [File
Format] ➞ [Add Digital Signatures].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of "Adding a Device Signature," on p.
5-37.
3
Press [User Signature] ➞ [OK] ➞ [OK].
4
Press
Sending Documents
5
(Start).
Setting the File Format to Send a Document in
5-39
Job Recall
You can recall the last three addresses, scan settings, and send settings which
have been set, and then send your documents.
IMPORTANT
• The machine considers any one of the following operations a send job:
- When settings, such as the destination, scan settings, and send settings, are specified,
and the control panel power switch, (Start), or (Reset) is pressed
- When the Auto Clear mode activates or after the Auto Sleep time has elapsed, after
send settings are specified
• The Standard mode is not stored in Recall memory.
• Identical send settings are stored only once in Recall memory.
• If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the Recall mode cannot be used.
• If a destination type in Restrict New Addresses in Restrict the Send Function in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', all stored settings in the
Recall mode are erased, regardless of the destination type.
Sending Documents
5
NOTE
The three most recent settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the
main power is turned OFF.
1
Place your originals ➞ press [Recall].
NOTE
For instructions on placing your originals, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
5-40
Job Recall
Select [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before] ➞ confirm the
settings ➞ press [OK].
IMPORTANT
• If the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, the unit name registered
for the line that is selected for Priority TX in TX Line Selection in Dual Line Options
under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is displayed. (See "Selecting the Line for Sending," on p. 9-55.)
• When [Auto] is selected for <Line Selection>, the user name displayed/printed on
the recipient's machine will be the user name registered for the line which was
used for sending.
NOTE
• You can change the settings in a recalled send job.
• If there are multiple destinations stored in Recall memory, the order of the
destinations shown in the list may not correspond to the order in which they were
set.
3
Press
(Start).
NOTE
If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the
Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p.
5-18.)
Job Recall
5-41
5
Sending Documents
2
Sending Documents
5
5-42
Job Recall
Receiving Documents
6
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the basic reception features. You can receive document transmissions
automatically, forward received documents to a specified destination, or print a received
document from memory.
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Receiving Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Processing Received Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Setting the Memory Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Forwarding Received Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Erasing Received Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Available Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6-1
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
■ Receiving Print Jobs
The machine receives and prints print jobs sent from a computer.
■ Receiving I-Fax Documents
The I-fax function is similar to e-mail. However, instead of sending and receiving
messages over the Internet, I-fax enables you to send and receive scanned document
images via the Internet.
You can set the machine to automatically forward received I-fax documents to specified
destinations. For more information on specifying forwarding settings, see "Forwarding
Settings," on p. 11-25.
NOTE
• If files (images) that are attached to received I-fax documents are not compatible with this
machine, the machine does not process (print, forward, or store) these files, but erases
them instead. The names of the erased files and the message "Could not create image"
are printed with the text of the received I-fax.
• If a received I-fax document does not contain an e-mail message, and contains only a
TIFF file attachment, the sender's name and subject of the e-mail (each up to 24
characters) are printed as the header of the TIFF image.
Receiving Documents
6
■ Receiving Fax Documents
This machine's Super G3 fax function is compatible with most Super G3 fax machines
used in office environments.
You can automatically forward received fax documents to specified destinations. For more
information on specifying forwarding settings, see "Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-25.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
6-2
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
Receiving Documents
1
When documents are being received, the Processing/Data
indicator on the control panel flashes a green light.
NOTE
During reception, the transaction number and information related to the sender are
displayed on the touch panel display.
2
When document reception is complete, the Processing/Data
indicator on the control panel maintains a steady green light.
This indicates that documents are stored in memory.
NOTE
• The Processing/Data indicator flashes or maintains a steady green light even when
the machine enters the Sleep mode.
• The Error indicator flashes a red light when either the amount of available memory
is low or paper needs to be loaded into a paper drawer.
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6-3
Receiving Documents
6
3
The document is printed.
The Processing/Data indicator goes out when documents stored in memory are
printed.
NOTE
• If there is no paper on which the received documents can be printed, the received
documents are stored in memory.
• The memory can hold a total of approximately 6,000 pages of sent and received
documents.
• Documents which have been stored in memory because the paper has run out, are
automatically printed when paper is loaded into a paper drawer.
• If a printing error occurs, the Error indicator flashes a red light.
Receiving Documents
6
6-4
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
Processing Received Documents
When the machine receives I-fax/fax documents, they are processed as shown
below:
Sender
*1
Default settings
or normal operating
I-fax
Documents
Divided
I-fax
Documents
Fax
Documents
Without Settings
Conditional operation
Reception
Password
Does Not Match/
No Subaddress/
Password Set
With Settings
Matches
Divided Data
RX Inbox
Confirming Details, Erase, Print
before erasing documents
Subaddress/
Password Matches*2
Forwarding
*5
w/o Conditions
Store
Memory Lock
Setting
Handle Documents
*8
with Forwarding Errors
Prints
ON
*6
Prints
*6
Memory RX Inbox
Confirming Details,
Erase, Print,
Send of Received documents
6
Forwarded to
specified
destination
*9
Confirming Details, Erase,
Print of received documents
Print Queue
Print Queue
*11
Confidential Fax Inbox
Destination(s)
Stored
Destinations
Not Stored
OFF
Forwarding
Error
OFF/
Does Not Meet
the Conditions
*4
*3
ON
Forwarding
Settings
Receiving Documents
Divided Data Combined
Reception
Rejected
Reception
Rejected
RX Password Verification
Prints
*10
*7
Store in
the Status Screen
Confirming Details,
Resend,
Change Destinations,
Erase of documents
with transmission error
*10
Forwarding
Done Notice
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6-5
*1 Received fax documents can be forwarded if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed.
*2 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document match the information registered in Forwarding
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the documents are forwarded to their forwarding
destinations regardless of the reception password setting.
*3 If Store/Print Received Doc. in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set
to 'On', forwarded documents are either printed or stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
*4 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document do not match the information registered in
Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the document is rejected.
*5 If Forward w/o Conditions is set up in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen),
all received documents that do not match the specified forwarding conditions are forwarded to the destination
selected for Forward w/o Conditions.
*6 If documents are received while paper is jammed, or paper or toner has run out, they are printed after the paper jam
is cleared, paper is loaded, or toner is added.
*7 If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the status of any job with a forwarding error will be saved on the System Monitor
screen.
*8 Documents with forwarding errors are handled as follows, depending on the settings for Handle Documents with
Forwarding Errors in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen):
•[Always Print]: All documents with forwarding errors are printed.
•[Store/Print]: Documents with forwarding errors are stored in the Memory RX Inbox when Memory Lock is turned
'On'. If Memory Lock is turned 'Off', the documents are printed.
*9 If the Forwarding Done Notice is specified in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen), a notification e-mail is sent when the forwarding job completes successfully.
*10 If the Forwarding Done Notice is specified in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen), a notification e-mail is sent when the forwarding job completes successfully. However, if <Notice Only for
Errors> is also specified, a notification e-mail is sent only when the document fails to be forwarded.
Receiving Documents
6
*11 The received fax/I-fax documents can be stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox by specifying the Confidential Fax
Inbox as forwarding destination. Only the received documents that match the specified forwarding conditions can be
stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox.
NOTE
• If the memory is full, no additional jobs can be processed.
• For information on the following settings, see their respective sections:
- Memory RX Inbox, Fax Memory Lock, and I-Fax Memory Lock (See "Storing Received
Fax Documents in Memory," on p. 11-12, or "Storing Received I-Fax Documents in
Memory," on p. 11-13.)
- Confidential Fax Inbox and Forwarding Settings (See "Forwarding Settings," on p.
11-25.)
6-6
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
Setting the Memory Lock Mode
You can set to store the received fax/I-fax documents in the Memory RX Inbox
without printing them. After verifying the documents on the Memory RX Inbox
screen, you can print or send them whenever necessary.
If you set Use Fax Memory Lock or Use I-Fax Memory Lock mode to 'On', you can
turn Fax Memory Lock or I-Fax Memory Lock for documents sent to the Memory RX
Inbox 'On' or 'Off' as necessary. If Fax Memory Lock or I-Fax Memory Lock mode is
set to 'On', received documents are stored in the Memory RX Inbox instead of
being printed. (See Chapter 6, "Sending and Receiving Documents Using the
Inboxes," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
NOTE
To receive documents in memory, you must first set Use Fax Memory Lock or Use I-Fax
Memory Lock in Memory RX Inbox Settings in Communications Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. (See "Storing Received Fax
Documents in Memory," on p. 11-12, or "Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory,"
on p. 11-13.)
Forwarding Received Documents
If you receive a fax/I-fax document, and it conforms to the specified forwarding
conditions, the document is automatically forwarded to the specified destination.
You can register the forwarding conditions and destinations in Forwarding Settings
in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Forwarding
Settings," on p. 11-25.)
NOTE
To be able to forward received documents, you must first set Validate/Invalidate to 'On' in
Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See
"Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-25.)
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6-7
6
Receiving Documents
IMPORTANT
Additional documents cannot be stored in the Memory RX Inbox under the following
conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard
disk.)
- When a total of 1,500 documents or images have been stored in any or all of the
inboxes
- When a total of 6,000 pages of documents or images have been stored in any or all of
the inboxes
Erasing Received Documents
You can erase any received document stored in the Memory RX Inbox or the
Confidential Fax Inboxes. If the memory is full, the machine cannot send or receive
any more documents. It is recommended that you erase unnecessary documents
as often as possible.
NOTE
Additional documents cannot be stored in the Memory RX Inbox or the Confidential Fax
Inbox under the following conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the
remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
- When a total of 1,500 documents or images have been stored in any or all of the
inboxes
- When a total of 6,000 pages of documents or images have been stored in any or all of
the inboxes
1
Press [Mail Box] ➞ select [Memory RX Inbox] or [Conf. Fax
Inbox].
Receiving Documents
6
Details of each item are shown below.
[Memory RX Inbox]: To select a received document that has been stored in the
Memory RX Inbox.
[Conf. Fax Inbox]:
6-8
To select a received document that has been forwarded to a
Confidential Fax Inbox.
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
2
Select the desired inbox and the document that you want to
erase ➞ press [Erase].
In the example above, Memory RX Inbox is specified.
To erase multiple documents in the memory RX Inbox or a Confidential Fax
Inbox, select and erase one document at a time.
3
Press [Yes].
4
Press [Done].
5
Press [Send].
Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents
6-9
6
Receiving Documents
NOTE
• You can cancel a selection by selecting the document again.
• If the document is stored in an inbox, that inbox is displayed with the (
) icon.
• If an inbox is set with a password, a locked mark (
) is displayed next to the icon
of that inbox.
• If you make a mistake when selecting an inbox, press [Done] ➞ select the correct
inbox.
Available Paper Sizes
When received documents are printed, they are printed from the paper drawer that
has the same paper size as the received document. If paper of the correct size is
not available, the machine automatically selects a different paper size in the
following order. (If all the switches in Select Drawer in RX Setting under <Common
Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are
set to 'On'.) The paper size is automatically selected in the same order, even if
paper runs out during printing.
11" x 17" originals
11" x 17" ➞ LGL*1 ➞ STMT x 2
LGL originals
LGL ➞ LTR x 2 ➞ STMT x 2 ➞ 11" x 17"
6
LTR originals
LTR ➞ LGL ➞ STMT x 2 ➞ 11" x 17"
Receiving Documents
■ Available Paper Sizes for Received Documents
STMT originals
STMT ➞ LTR ➞ LGL ➞ 11" x 17"
*1 Received documents are automatically reduced before being printed on the paper size indicated.
IMPORTANT
Received documents can be printed on the following paper sizes and paper types:
Paper Sizes:
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, or STMT
Paper Types: plain, recycled, color, or irregular paper types (paper with the following
settings; Basis Weight: 17 to 28 lb bond (64 to 105 g/m2), Type:
Normal, Finish: Uncoated or Recycled.)
NOTE
• You can specify each paper drawer for the fax/I-fax function. The default setting is 'On',
except for the stack bypass. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference
Guide.)
• You can set the machine to reduce received documents from 75% to 97% in 1%
increments if the document is larger than any of the available paper sizes. (See
"Reducing a Received Document," on p. 9-40.)
• You can change the order of paper selection. (See "Paper Drawer Selection," on p. 9-38.)
• You can set the machine to print received documents on both sides of the paper. (See
"2-Sided Printing," on p. 9-37.)
• Received documents are output face down, in the order in which the pages are received.
6-10
Available Paper Sizes
Special Fax Functions
7
CHAPTER
This chapter describes special fax sending and receiving features.
Sending with a Subaddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Using a PIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Setting PIN Code Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Dialing with a PIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Fax Information Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-1
Sending with a Subaddress
If the destination fax machine is compatible with ITU-T (International
Telecommunications Union-Telecommunications Sector) standard subaddress and
passwords, you can send or receive documents with increased security by
attaching a subaddress and a password to all of your fax transactions.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
1
Place your originals ➞ press [New Address] ➞ [Fax] ➞ enter
the fax number.
Special Fax Functions
7
7-2
Sending with a Subaddress
Details of each item are shown below.
[Pause]:
Press to insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number that
you are dialing. If you insert a pause, the letter <p> is displayed
between the numbers, and the letter <P> appears at the end of
the number. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause
after the country code, and at the end of the telephone number.
(See "Pause Time," on p. 9-47.)
[Tone]:
Press when you want to directly call an extension line that is
connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) which accepts
only tone signals. (See "Fax Information Services," on p. 7-8.)
[ ] [ ]:
Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press when an incorrect number is entered. The last number
entered is deleted, enabling you to enter the correct number.
Press to enter the PIN (Personal Identification Number) code. You
can press this key only if [Option] is selected for PIN code
position. If [Prefix], [Suffix], or [Off] is selected for PIN code
position, this key is grayed out. (See "Using a PIN Code," on p.
7-5.)
[Direct]:
Press to send documents directly to the recipient. If you do not
select Direct Sending mode, Memory Sending mode is used. (See
"Sending a Fax," on p. 5-3.)
[Next]:
Press to specify another destination after specifying the first
destination using
(numeric keys).
[Option]:
Displayed if the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed. Press to set the subaddress and password, or to select
the line type of the additional line.
[Subaddress]: Press to set up an optional subaddress and password.
[On-hook]:
Press to use tone dialing. (See "Fax Information Services," on p.
7-8.)
IMPORTANT
You cannot insert a pause at the beginning of a number.
NOTE
• For instructions on placing your originals, see Chapter 2, "Basic Operations," in the
Reference Guide.
• If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds
long.
Sending with a Subaddress
7-3
7
Special Fax Functions
[PIN Code]:
2
Press [Subaddress].
If the Optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, press [Option].
3
Press [Subaddress] or [Password] ➞ enter the subaddress
and password using
(numeric keys), , and
➞ press
[OK].
If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not need
to enter a password.
Press [Space] to insert a space.
Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.
4
Press
(Start).
NOTE
If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the
Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals," on p.
5-18.)
Special Fax Functions
7
7-4
Sending with a Subaddress
Using a PIN Code
The PIN (Personal Identification Number) code prevents unauthorized personnel
from making calls. To protect privileged access to the telephone lines, only
authorized users are entrusted with the PIN codes for daily operations. Some PBX
(Private Branch eXchange) systems require that a PIN code be entered when
dialing a number to make a call or send a document by fax. Depending on the
requirements of the PBX system, the PIN code may be entered either before the
number as a prefix, or after the number as a suffix.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
Setting PIN Code Access
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [Fax Settings].
Press [PIN Code Access].
Using a PIN Code
7
Special Fax Functions
If your PBX requires a PIN Code to get an outside line, your machine can be set to
prompt the user to enter the PIN Code before dialing.
7-5
3
Press [On] ➞ select the desired type of PIN code ➞ press [OK]
➞ [OK].
If you do not want to set the PIN Code, press [Off] ➞ [OK] ➞ [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[Option]: If your PBX requires a PIN Code depending on the destination, select
[Option]. If PIN Code Access is set to 'Option', the PIN Code key is
enabled on the Fax screen.
[Prefix]:
If your PBX always requires a PIN Code before the destination, select
[Prefix].
[Suffix]:
If your PBX always requires a PIN Code after the destination, select
[Suffix].
Dialing with a PIN Code
This section describes the procedure for dialing fax numbers with a PIN code.
NOTE
• If PIN Code Access is set to 'On', the machine automatically displays a screen prompting
you to enter the PIN Code when you press (Start).
• The position to enter PIN codes depends on the type of PBX system you are using.
Special Fax Functions
7
1
2
Place your originals ➞ make sure the machine is ready to
send ➞ press [New Address] ➞ [Fax].
Enter the fax number with a PIN code according to the PIN
code position set for your machine ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
If PIN Code Position is set to [Option], PIN codes are not displayed when you are
entering the fax number, for increased security (only <C> appears). PIN codes also
do not appear in printed activity reports.
7-6
Using a PIN Code
● If you select [Option] for the PIN code position:
❑ Enter the fax number using
(numeric keys), , and
➞ press [PIN
Code] when you reach the desired PIN code position ➞ continue entering the
rest of the fax number.
[PIN Code] can be pressed either before the fax number, after the fax number,
or while specifying the fax number.
<C> is displayed on the screen after you press [PIN Code].
● If you select [Prefix] or [Suffix] for the PIN code position:
❑ Enter the fax number using
-
(numeric keys),
, and
.
Special Fax Functions
7
3
Press
(Start) ➞ enter the PIN code using
keys) ➞ press [OK].
-
(numeric
NOTE
The PIN code that you have entered appears as asterisks on the Pin Code screen.
Using a PIN Code
7-7
Fax Information Services
Many fax information services for banks, airline reservations, hotel reservations,
etc., require tone dialing for their services. If your machine is connected to a rotary
pulse telephone line, follow the procedure below to temporarily set the machine for
tone dialing.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you hear the dial tone before entering the fax number. If you enter the fax
number before hearing the dial tone, the call may not be connected, or an incorrect
number may be dialed.
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
• When you use fax information services, you cannot specify a destination that is stored in
the Address Book or use the Job Recall mode.
Special Fax Functions
7
1
Press [New Address] ➞ [Fax].
2
Press [On-hook] ➞ enter the number of the fax information
service using
(numeric keys).
IMPORTANT
If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached, the line will be disconnected if you
press [On-hook], and then remove the control card while the line is engaged.
7-8
Fax Information Services
● If you press [One-touch Buttons]:
❑ Select the desired one-touch button.
One-touch buttons are assigned a three digit number. To specify a destination
using a one-touch button's three digit number, enter the three digit number
using
(numeric keys).
❑ Press [OK].
NOTE
For more information on one-touch buttons, see "Using the One-Touch Buttons," on
p. 2-26.
3
When your call is answered and you hear the recorded
message of the fax information service, press [Tone].
If you are already using this machine with tone dialing, this step is not necessary.
The volume of the dial tone can be adjusted by pressing [
].
Enter the numbers requested by the fax information service
using
(numeric keys), , and .
NOTE
If you require more information about the service, contact the company providing
the service.
5
Press [RX Start] if you require a faxed copy of the information.
If you do not require a faxed copy of the information, press [End].
Fax Information Services
7-9
7
Special Fax Functions
4
] or [
Special Fax Functions
7
7-10
Fax Information Services
Checking/Changing the Send/
Receive Status
8
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how you can check/change the status of send and receive jobs.
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Checking Send Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Changing the Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Resending a Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Printing the Send Job Status/Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking the Status of Fax Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Checking Fax Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Printing the Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Checking Receive Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Printing the Receive Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Checking the Arrival of a Receive Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Checking the Status of Jobs That Have Been Forwarded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
8-1
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
This section describes how to check/change the status of send jobs. For more
information, see Chapter 5, "Checking Job and Device Status," in the Reference
Guide.
NOTE
• If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'Off', [Log] is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
• Send jobs to e-mail, I-fax, and file servers can be checked/changed.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, fax
jobs in addition to the above mentioned jobs can be checked/changed.
• The maximum number of send jobs that are displayed on the Send Status screen is 120.
• The maximum number of send and receive jobs that are displayed on the Send Log
screen is 100.
Checking Send Job Details
You can check detailed information of any send job, such as the destination and the
date and time the job was specified.
8
1
8-2
Press [System Monitor].
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
Press [Send] ➞ [Status] or [Log].
3
Select a job whose detailed information you want to check ➞
press [Details].
IMPORTANT
You cannot check the status of fax jobs sent with the Direct Sending or Manual
Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver because the statuses of
those jobs are not displayed. To check their statuses, see the Send Job Status
screen for Fax.
NOTE
• If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off' when multiple
destinations are selected for a send job, <Finished.> is displayed for those
destinations to which the job was sent successfully, and <Error> is displayed for
those destinations that had transmission errors. When multiple destinations are
simultaneously specified for a send job, and you select and cancel the transmission
to any one of those destinations, or the retransmission of an error job or an
interrupted job is completed successfully, information on all of those simultaneously
specified destinations is displayed in the log.
• If you send documents using the Full mode to a machine that does not support the
Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. In this case, the job
concerned is not considered as complete even though the actual sending of the
document is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result...> on the
Status screen until the time set for <Full Mode TX Timeout> in I-Fax Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) has lapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is
shown as <-> when sending of the document to a server or other destination could
not be verified.
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
8-3
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
2
8
● If you select a job with only one destination in [Status]:
❑ Check the details.
To change the destination, press [Change Destination]. (See "Changing the
Destination," on p. 8-5.)
To resend the job, press [Resend]. (See "Resending a Job," on p. 8-7.)
● If you select a job with multiple destinations in [Status]:
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
❑ Check the details.
❑ Press [Broadcast List].
❑ Check the status for each destination.
To change the destination, press [Change Destination]. (See "Changing the
Destination," on p. 8-5.)
To resend the job, press [Resend]. (See "Resending a Job," on p. 8-7.)
● If you select a job in [Log]:
❑ Check the details.
8
8-4
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
Changing the Destination
IMPORTANT
• You can only change the destination for send jobs that have been canceled due to a
transmission error or jobs that have been set with the Delayed Send mode and are still
waiting in the send queue.
• To be able to change the destination for send jobs that have been canceled due to a
transmission error, you must first set Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common
Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'.
(See "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 9-11.)
• You cannot change more than one destination at the same time. You also cannot change
the destination of a whole group at once.
• You cannot change the destination of a send job if another job with the same job number
is being sent or is waiting in the send queue. This restriction does not apply to Delayed
Send jobs.
• You cannot change the destinations of fax jobs sent with the Direct Sending or Manual
Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver because the statuses of those
jobs are not displayed.
• If a destination type in Restrict New Addresses in Restrict the Send Function in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', you cannot change the
destination, regardless of the destination type.
NOTE
• You cannot change the destination type. For example, you cannot change the destination
of a job from an e-mail address to an I-fax address. Also, you cannot change the
destination of a job from a fax number to a User Inbox.
• If a job is specified to be stored in a User Inbox, you cannot change the inbox in which to
store the job.
1
Press [System Monitor].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Checking Send Job Details," on p.
8-2.
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
8-5
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
You can change the destination of a send job from the System Monitor screen.
8
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
2
Press [Send] ➞ [Status].
3
Select the job whose destination you want to change ➞ press
[Details].
4
Select the destination that you want to change.
● If there is only one destination:
❑ Press [Change Destination].
● If there are multiple destinations:
❑ Press [Broadcast List].
8
❑ Select the destination that you want to change ➞ press [Change Destination].
5
Change the destination.
The types of destinations and the settings that you can change are:
• E-mail: E-mail Address
6
8-6
• I-Fax:
I-Fax Address, Mode, Send Via Server (On/Off)
• File:
Host Name, Folder Path, User, Password
• Fax:
Fax Number (If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3
Multi-Line Fax Board is installed.)
Press [OK].
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
Resending a Job
IMPORTANT
• To be able to resend jobs that have been canceled due to a transmission error, you must
first set Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Checking Send Job
Details," on p. 8-2.)
• You cannot resend fax jobs sent with the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, or
sent from computers via the fax driver because the statuses of those jobs are not
displayed.
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Send] ➞ [Status].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Changing the Destination,"
on p. 8-5.
2
Select the job that you want to resend ➞ press [Details].
3
Select the destination to resend the job to.
8
● If there is only one destination:
❑ Press [Resend].
● If there are multiple destinations for the same sending method:
❑ Press [Broadcast List].
❑ Select the destination to resend the job to ➞ press [Resend].
NOTE
The job is placed in the send queue if there is another job being sent or waiting to
be processed.
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
You can resend jobs that are canceled due to transmission errors.
8-7
Printing the Send Job Status/Log
1
Press [System Monitor] ➞ [Send] ➞ select [Status] or [Log].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Checking Send Job
Details," on p. 8-2.
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
Details of each item are shown below.
[Status]: Press this key if you want to print the send job list (Send Job List).
[Log]:
2
Press this key if you want to print the send job log (Activity Report).
Press [Print List].
IMPORTANT
You cannot print the Send Job List for fax jobs sent with the Direct Sending or
Manual Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver because the
statuses of those jobs are not displayed.
NOTE
• The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below:
: A job for which an Activity Report has already been printed
: A job for which an Activity Report has not yet been printed
• The send job status/log can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR (plain,
recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference
Guide.)
8
3
8-8
Press [Yes].
Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs
Checking the Status of Fax Jobs
NOTE
• If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'Off', [Log] is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
• The maximum number of jobs that are displayed is:
- Send Job Status screen:
64 jobs
- Received Job Status screen: 1 job (The optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.)
2 jobs (The optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed.)
- Log screen:
100 jobs
Checking Fax Job Details
You can check the detailed information of any fax job, such as the destination and
the date and time the job was specified.
1
Press [System Monitor].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Checking Send Job Details," on p.
8-2.
Checking the Status of Fax Jobs
8-9
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
This section describes how to check the status of fax jobs. For more information,
see Chapter 5, "Checking Job and Device Status," in the Reference Guide.
8
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
2
Press [Fax] ➞ [Send Job Status], [Received Job Status], or
[Log].
● If you select [Send Job Status]:
❑ Select the job whose detailed information you want to check ➞ press [Details].
● If you select [Received Job Status]:
❑ Press [Details].
NOTE
If the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, you can select between
two received fax jobs to check.
● If you select [Log]:
8
❑ Select the job whose detailed information you want to check ➞ press [Details].
3
Check the details of the selected job.
If you selected a job with multiple destinations in [Send Job Status], press
[Broadcast List] ➞ check the status of each destinations ➞ press [Done].
8-10
Checking the Status of Fax Jobs
Printing the Fax Activity Report
1
Press [System Monitor].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Checking Send Job Details," on p.
8-2.
2
Press [Fax] ➞ [Log].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
You can print the Fax Activity Report, which includes the fax transmission's start
time, destination, job number, transmission mode, number of pages, and
transmission result.
8
3
Press [Print List].
NOTE
• The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below:
: A job for which a Fax Activity Report has already been printed
: A job for which a Fax Activity Report has not yet been printed
• The Fax Activity Report can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR (plain,
recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference
Guide.)
4
Press [Yes].
Checking the Status of Fax Jobs
8-11
Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
You can check the details of received documents stored in memory, as well as the
status of forwarded jobs and receive jobs.
NOTE
• If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'Off', <Activity Report (RX)>, [Details], and [Print List] on the Receive screen are not
displayed on the System Monitor screen.
• Up to 100 documents for the total of send and receive jobs combined can be displayed
on the job log (Activity Report (RX)) screen.
Checking Receive Job Details
You can check the detailed information of any received job, such as the destination
and the date and time the job was received.
1
8
Press [System Monitor].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Checking Send Job Details," on p.
8-2.
2
3
8-12
Press [Receive] ➞ select a job whose detailed information you
want to check ➞ press [Details].
Check the details of the selected job.
Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs
Printing the Receive Job Log
You can print the receive job log (Activity Report (RX)).
Press [System Monitor].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Checking Send Job Details," on p.
8-2.
2
Press [Receive] ➞ [Print List].
NOTE
• The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below:
: A job for which an Activity Report has already been printed
: A job for which an Activity Report has not yet been printed
• The receive job log can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR (plain,
recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference
Guide.)
3
Press [Yes].
8
Checking the Arrival of a Receive Job
The machine regularly checks for the arrival of an I-fax. However, you can check for
the arrival of an I-fax at any time by performing the procedure below.
1
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
1
Press [System Monitor].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Checking Send Job Details," on p.
8-2.
Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs
8-13
2
Press [Receive] ➞ [Checking RX of I-Fax Jobs].
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
The screen below is displayed while the machine is checking for the arrival of an
I-fax.
NOTE
To be able to use [Checking RX of I-Fax Jobs], you must first set the POP setting in
E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) to 'On' so that you can receive documents using POP. (See Chapter 3,
"Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Checking the Status of Jobs That Have Been Forwarded
You can check the details of jobs that have been forwarded, depending on the
forwarding settings.
8
1
Press [System Monitor].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Checking Send Job Details," on p.
8-2.
2
8-14
Press [Receive] ➞ [Forwarding Status].
Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs
3
Select a job whose detailed information you want to check ➞
press [Details].
NOTE
If 120 send jobs have accumulated on the job status screen, jobs that are waiting to
be forwarded are displayed on the Forwarding Status screen.
Check the details of the selected job.
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
4
8
Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs
8-15
Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status
8
8-16
Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs
Customizing Communications
Settings
9
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to store and change the default settings of the Send/Receive
function to suit your needs.
What are Additional Functions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Communications Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Automatic Document Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Number of Retry Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Standard Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Favorites Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Registering a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Naming a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Registering a Comment for a Favorites Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Erasing a Favorites Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Displaying Confirmation for Favorites Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
PDF Compression Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
PDF (OCR) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
PDF (Trace & Smooth) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Confirming the Device Signature Certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Checking a User Signature Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Initial Send Screen Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Printing the TX Terminal ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With WebDAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Initializing TX Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
2-Sided Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Paper Drawer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
9-1
9. Customizing Communications Settings
Reducing a Received Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
2 On 1 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Gamma Value for YCbCr Received Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Adjusting the Alarm and Monitor Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
ECM Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Customizing Communications Settings
Pause Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Auto Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
ECM Reception. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Registering the Fax Number for an Additional Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Registering the Unit Name for an Additional Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Selecting the Telephone Line Type for an Additional Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Selecting the Line for Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
9
9-2
What are Additional Functions?
Additional Functions enable you to customize the machine's various settings.
1
Press
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are not changed when you press
(Reset).
(Additional Functions).
The Additional Functions screen is displayed.
2
Select an Additional Functions setting.
9
If you select [System Settings] and the System Manager ID and System
Password have been set, press [System Settings] ➞ enter the System Manager
ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) ➞ press
(Log in/Out).
If a password has been set for the Address Book in Restrict the Send Function in
System Settings, press [Address Book Settings] ➞ enter the password using (numeric keys) ➞ press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password," on p. 11-17.)
What are Additional Functions?
9-3
3
Press a mode key to specify its settings.
Customizing Communications Settings
For more information on the settings you can specify by pressing the keys on the
Additional Functions screen, see "Communications Settings Table," on p. 9-6,
"Address Book Settings Table," on p. 10-2, "System Settings Table," on p. 11-2,
and "Report Settings Table," on p. 12-2.
NOTE
Some screens are divided into several screens, press [▼] or [▲] to scroll through
the lists.
9
4
Specify the desired mode ➞ press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
9-4
What are Additional Functions?
Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen
appears.
Customizing Communications Settings
5
9
What are Additional Functions?
9-5
Communications Settings Table
The following items can be stored or set in Communications Settings from the
Additional Functions screen.
■ Common Settings
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Customizing Communications Settings
TX Settings
9
Sender's Names
(TTI)*2
01 to 99: Register/Edit, Erase
No
p. 1-17
Unit Name
24 characters maximum
No
p. 1-18
Erase Failed TX
On*1, Off
Yes
p. 9-11
Data Compression
Ratio
High Ratio, Normal*1, Low Ratio
Yes
p. 9-12
Handle Documents
with Forwarding Errors
Always Print, Store/Print, Off*1
Yes
p. 9-13
Retry Times
0 to 5 times; 3 times*1
Yes
p. 9-14
Edit Standard Send
Settings
Scanning Mode: Clr/B&W 200x200
dpi*1
File Format: TIFF/PDF Auto Select*1
Stamp: Off*1
No
p. 9-15
Register Favorites
Button
Register/Edit, Erase: M1 to M18
Display Comment: On, Off*1
Yes
p. 9-17
Display Confirmation
for Favorites Button
On*1, Off
No
p. 9-21
Yes
p. 9-22
Image Level in Text/Photo Mode or
Photo Mode:
Image Level for PDF
(Compct)*3
Data Size Priority, Normal*1, Image
Priority
Image Level in Text Mode:
Data Size Priority, Normal*1, Image
Priority
9-6
Communications Settings Table
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Yes
p. 9-24
PDF (Trace & Smooth)
Settings*3
Outline Graphics: On, Off*1
Graphics Recognition Level:
Normal*1, Moderate, High
Background Image Level: Data Size
Priority, Normal*1, Image Priority
Yes
p. 9-26
Check Device
Signature Certificate*4
Certificate Details: Certificate
Verification
No
p. 9-28
Check User Signature
Certificate*5
Certificate Details: Certificate
Verification
No
p. 9-29
Default Screen for
Send
Favorites Buttons, One-touch
Buttons, New Address*1
No
p. 9-30
Yes
p. 9-31
Item
Settings
Smart Scan: On*1, Off
PDF (OCR) Settings*3
Number of Characters for Document
Name Setting:
On*1;
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or
Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed:
TX Terminal ID
TX Terminal ID: On
Printing Position: Outside
Display Destination Name: On
Telephone # Mark: FAX
9
Off
Use Chunked
Encoding with
WebDAV Sending
On*1, Off
Yes
p. 9-34
Gamma Value for
YCbCr Send Jobs
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4,
Gamma 1.8*1, Gamma 2.2
Yes
p. 9-35
Initialize TX Settings
Initialize
No
p. 9-36
Yes
p. 9-37
Yes
p. 9-38
RX Settings
2-Sided Print
On, Off*1
On*1,
Select Drawer
Switch A:
Off
Switch B: On*1, Off
Switch C: On*1, Off
Switch D: On*1, Off
Customizing Communications Settings
1 to 24 characters; 24 characters*1
Communications Settings Table
9-7
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Yes
p. 9-40
On*1;
Receive Reduction
RX Reduction: Auto
Reduce %: 90%
Reduce Direction: Vertical Only
Customizing Communications Settings
Off
Received Page Footer
On, Off*1
Yes
p. 9-42
2 On 1 Log
On, Off*1
Yes
p. 9-43
Gamma Value for
YCbCr Received jobs
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4,
Gamma 1.8*1, Gamma 2.2
Yes
p. 9-35
*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates item that appears only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed.
*3 Indicates item that appears only if the optional Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature Set (standard-equipped
for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated.
*4 Indicates item that appears only if the optional Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set (standard-equipped for
the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated.
*5 Indicates item that appears only if the optional Digital User Signature PDF Kit is activated.
9
9-8
Communications Settings Table
■ Fax Settings*2
Delivered
Applicable
Page
20 digits maximum
No
p. 1-16
Tone*1
No
p. 1-14
Item
Settings
User Settings
Unit Telephone #
Tel Line Type
Pulse,
Volume Control
Alarm Volume: 0 to 8; 4*1
Monitor Volume: 0 to 8; 4*1
Yes
p. 9-45
ECM TX
On*1, Off
Yes
p. 9-46
Pause Time
1 to 15 seconds; 2 seconds*1
Yes
p. 9-47
Yes
p. 9-48
On*1, Off
Yes
p. 9-50
On*1, Off
Yes
p. 9-51
Unit Telephone #
20 digits maximum
No
p. 9-52
Unit Name
24 characters maximum
No
p. 9-53
Tel Line Type
Pulse, Tone*1
No
p. 9-54
TX Line Selection
Line 1: Priority TX*1, Prohibit TX
Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
No
p. 9-55
On*1
Option:
Redial Times: 1 to 10 times; 2 times*1
Redial Interval: 2 to 99 minutes; 2
minutes*1
TX Error Resend:
Error and 1st page*1, All pages, Off
Auto Redial
Off
Check Dial Tone
Before Sending
RX Settings
ECM RX
Dual Line Options*6
*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates item that appears only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed.
*6 Indicates item that appears only if the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed.
Communications Settings Table
9-9
Customizing Communications Settings
TX Settings
9
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
• For instructions on setting the modes not described in this manual, refer to the other
manuals listed in "Manuals for the Machine," on p. ii.
• The Communications Settings screen consists of a list of individual settings. Select the
item and press [▼] or [▲] to scroll to the desired setting.
• Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set,
is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device
Information Delivery Settings mode, see Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the
Reference Guide.
9
9-10
Communications Settings Table
Automatic Document Deletion
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Erase Failed
TX].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]: Erases jobs after sending, whether the transmission ends successfully or
with an error.
[Off]: Stores a job in memory if the transmission ends in an error. From the
System Monitor screen, you can resend jobs whose transmissions have
failed, or change the destinations and resend the jobs. (See "Changing the
Destination," on p. 8-5, and "Resending a Job," on p. 8-7.)
IMPORTANT
Even if the Erase Failed TX mode is set to 'Off', fax documents sent in the Direct
Sending or Manual Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver do not
remain in memory when the transmission ends in an error.
Automatic Document Deletion
9-11
Customizing Communications Settings
If transmission of a document has failed, this mode automatically erases that
document from memory.
9
Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs
You can set the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio
reduces the data size, but results in low quality images. On the contrary, a low
compression ratio increases the data size, but results in high quality images.
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
• If [PDF (Compact)] or [PDF (Trace)] is selected as the file format, set [Data Compression
Ratio] to 'Normal' or 'Low Ratio' in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in
Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If [Data Compression
Ratio] is set to 'High Ratio', the images that are output may be of a low quality even if
'Image Priority' is selected in Image Level for PDF (Compct) in TX Settings under
<Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, and
you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.
9
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Data
Compression Ratio].
2
Select [High Ratio], [Normal], or [Low Ratio] ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[High Ratio]: The data size is small, but the image quality is low.
[Normal]:
The data size and image quality are in between those of [High
Ratio] and [Low Ratio].
[Low Ratio]: The data size is large, but the image quality is high.
9-12
Data Compression Ratio for Color Send Jobs
Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded
NOTE
If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the status of any job with a
forwarding error will be saved on the System Monitor screen. The document will not be
processed according to the settings you make for Handle Documents with Forwarding
Errors. (See "Automatic Document Deletion," on p. 9-11.)
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Handle
Documents with Forwarding Errors].
2
Select [Always Print], [Store/Print], or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[Always Print]: Documents that fail to be forwarded are printed.
[Store/Print]:
Documents that fail to be forwarded are stored in the Memory RX
Inbox. The machine automatically prints the documents that fail
to be forwarded if Use Fax Memory Lock or Use I-Fax Memory
Lock mode is set to 'Off'. (See "Storing Received Fax Documents
in Memory," on p. 11-12, "Storing Received I-Fax Documents in
Memory," on p. 11-13.)
[Off]:
Documents that fail to be forwarded are not printed.
Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded
9-13
Customizing Communications Settings
You can set how the machine handles the documents that fail to be forwarded.
9
Number of Retry Attempts
Retry Times is the mode which automatically resends data when the data cannot
be sent. This occurs because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an
error occurs. This setting determines the number of retry attempts. You can set
from one to five retry attempts, or select '0' to turn the Retry Times mode 'Off'.
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed and
you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Retry Times].
2
Press [-] or [+] to set the number of Retry Times ➞ press [OK].
If the number of retry times is set to '0', the machine will not resend the data.
9
9-14
Number of Retry Attempts
Standard Send Settings
NOTE
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed and
you are sending documents by fax, the file format set here is disabled.
• You can change the file format.
• If you send documents by fax or I-fax, the file format set here is disabled. However, if
[PDF (Trace)] or [PDF (Compact)] is selected as the file format in the Standard Send
Settings and you are sending documents by fax or I-fax, a message prompting you to
change the file format may appear on the screen. If this happens, change the File Format
setting to anything other than [PDF (Trace)] or [PDF (Compact)].
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Edit Standard
Send Settings].
2
Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Communications Settings
This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the Send function,
including the scan mode and file format. (See "Selecting a Scan Mode," on p. 3-2,
and "Sending Methods," on p. 5-2.)
9
[Scanning Mode]:
Press the Scanning Mode drop-down list ➞ select a scan mode.
You can also select a scan mode that you have already stored. (See "User Preset
Keys," on p. 4-17.)
Standard Send Settings
9-15
[Stamp]:
Press [Stamp].
To cancel this setting, press [Stamp] again.
[File Formats]:
Press [File Format] ➞ select a file format.
The file format can be selected from the following formats. For more information
on each format, see the following section.
• [TIFF/PDF Auto Select], [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select], [JPEG], [TIFF]: See "Setting
the File Format," on p. 5-23.
• [PDF]:
Customizing Communications Settings
- [Compact]: See "Sending a Compact PDF," on p. 5-26.
- [Trace & Smooth]: See "Trace & Smooth," on p. 5-28.
- [OCR (Text Searchable)]: See "Sending a Searchable PDF," on p. 5-29.
NOTE
• For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary," on p. 14-25.
• [Trace & Smooth] appears only if the optional Universal Send PDF Advanced
Feature Set (standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is
activated.
• [Compact] appears only if the optional Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature Set
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated.
• [OCR (Text Searchable)] appears only if the optional Universal Send PDF
Advanced Feature Set (standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/
C3080i) is activated.
• To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode on the Send
Basic Features screen, press (Reset).
9
9-16
Standard Send Settings
Favorites Buttons
NOTE
• The send settings registered as favorites buttons in memory are not erased, even if the
power is turned OFF.
• If an address included in a favorites button is deleted from the Address Book, it is also
deleted from the settings registered in the favorites button.
Registering a Favorites Button
1
2
Specify the send settings that you want to register ➞ press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings] ➞ [TX
Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Register Favorites
Button].
9
Select a Favorites Button ([M1] to [M18]) for registering the
send settings ➞ press [Register/Edit].
NOTE
Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
Favorites Buttons
Customizing Communications Settings
You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them in a
favorites button in memory. There are 18 favorites buttons and they can be
assigned names and comments for increased convenience. This feature is useful
for registering frequently used send settings.
9-17
3
Press [Store].
NOTE
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• You can assign a name to a favorites button by pressing [Name].
• You can also assign a comment to a favorites button by pressing [Comment].
● If you select a key without settings:
❑ A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings ➞ press
[Yes].
Customizing Communications Settings
● If you select a key that already has settings stored in it:
❑ A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous
settings ➞ press [Yes].
Naming a Favorites Button
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Register
Favorites Button].
2
Select a Favorites Button ([M1] to [M18]) to name ➞ press
[Register/Edit].
9
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of "Registering a Favorites Button," on
p. 9-17.
NOTE
Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
3
Press [Name].
NOTE
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• You can also name keys with no settings stored in them.
9-18
Favorites Buttons
4
Enter a name ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its
current name (default M1 to M18).
Registering a Comment for a Favorites Button
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Register
Favorites Button].
If Display Comment is set to 'On', the registered comments are displayed to the
right of the favorites button when you press [Favorites] on the Send Basic
Features screen.
2
Select a Favorites Button ([M1] to [M18]) to register with a
comment ➞ press [Register/Edit].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of "Registering a Favorites Button," on
p. 9-17.
NOTE
Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
Customizing Communications Settings
1
9
3
Press [Comment].
NOTE
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
• You can also register comments on keys with no settings stored in them.
4
Enter a comment ➞ press [OK].
Favorites Buttons
9-19
Erasing a Favorites Button
1
Customizing Communications Settings
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings>➞ [Register
Favorites Button].
Select the favorites button with the send settings that you
want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
IMPORTANT
Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
NOTE
• Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle
( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
9
3
Press [Yes].
NOTE
• Key names are not erased. For instructions on changing a key name, see "Naming
a Favorites Button," on p. 9-18.
• Comments are not erased. For instructions on changing a comment, see
"Registering a Comment for a Favorites Button," on p. 9-19.
9-20
Favorites Buttons
Displaying Confirmation for Favorites Buttons
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Display
Confirmation for Favorites Button].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]: A confirmation screen is displayed when a favorites button is recalled.
[Off]: A confirmation screen is not displayed when a favorites button is recalled.
Customizing Communications Settings
This mode enables you to set whether to display a confirmation screen when
recalling favorites buttons.
9
Displaying Confirmation for Favorites Buttons
9-21
PDF Compression Priority
If PDF (Trace) or PDF (Compact) is selected as the file format, you can set the
image quality level of the document.
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature Set
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed and
you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Image Level for
PDF (Compct)].
2
Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
9
Details of each item are shown below.
[Data Size Priority]: The data size is small, but the image quality is low.
9-22
[Normal]:
The data size and image quality are in between those of
[Data Size Priority] and [Image Priority].
[Image Priority]:
The data size is large, but the image quality is high.
PDF Compression Priority
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
• The setting made for <Image Level in Text Mode> or <Image Level in Text/Photo
Mode or Photo Mode> is enabled only if the Text/Photo mode or Photo mode is
selected from the Original Type drop-down list. However, if [PDF (Trace)] is
selected as the file format and Text mode selected as the original type, this setting
is disabled.
• If an original with many colors is scanned, the compression level is determined by
the data size and the number of colors, according to the selected image level.
However, if the original is in monochrome or has few colors, it does not matter
which image level you select.
9
PDF Compression Priority
9-23
PDF (OCR) Mode
This mode enables you to perform OCR (optical character recognition) on a
scanned original to create a PDF with searchable text.
Customizing Communications Settings
You can set the Smart Scan mode and the Document Name OCR mode. Smart
Scan is a mode which automatically detects the orientation of the characters on the
original when sending it. The Document Name OCR mode enables you to use text
extracted from the original as the filename of the document to be sent. You can set
the number of characters to use for Document Name OCR. (See "Sending
Methods," on p. 5-2.)
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature Set
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated. For more
information on the different file formats, see "Glossary," on p. 14-25.
• The encrypted PDF mode and [DocName OCR] cannot be used at the same time.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [PDF (OCR)
Settings].
2
Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
9
9-24
PDF (OCR) Mode
<Smart Scan>:
[On]: The orientation of the original is detected, and the document is
automatically rotated before sending.
[Off]: The orientation of the original is not detected, and the document is sent as
is.
<Number of Characters for Document Name Setting>:
Customizing Communications Settings
Press [-] or [+] to set the number of characters.
9
PDF (OCR) Mode
9-25
PDF (Trace & Smooth) Settings
When outlining documents that are to be sent, you can change the recognition rate
of line drawings of the original.
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature Set
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line FAX Board is installed and
you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [PDF (Trace &
Smooth) Settings].
2
Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
9
<Outline Graphics>:
[On]:
Outlining of the graphics is performed.
[Off]:
Outlining of the graphics is not performed.
<Graphics Recognition Level>
[Normal]:
Sets a standard recognition level. (The data size becomes small.)
[Moderate]: The recognition level and data size are in between those of
[Normal] and [High].
[High]:
9-26
Sets the highest recognition level. (The data size becomes large.)
PDF (Trace & Smooth) Settings
<Background Image Level>:
[Normal]:
The data size and background image quality are in between
those of [Data Size Priority] and [Image Priority].
[Image Priority]:
The data size is large, but the background image quality is
high.
NOTE
For <Graphics Recognition Level>, by increasing the recognition level, the data
size becomes larger as well. It is recommended that you first use [Normal], and if
desirable results are not obtained, to try increasing the recognition level in the
order of [Moderate] and [High].
Customizing Communications Settings
[Data Size Priority]: The data size is small, but the background image quality is
low.
9
PDF (Trace & Smooth) Settings
9-27
Confirming the Device Signature Certificate
You can confirm the certificate and key pair required for adding a device signature
to PDF files.
Customizing Communications Settings
IMPORTANT
You cannot press [Check Device Signature Certificate] if the certificate and key pair for
adding a device signature have not been generated. For more information on the
certificate and key pair for adding a device signature, see Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP
Network," in the Network Guide.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated.
1
2
9
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Check Device
Signature Certificate].
To verify a certificate, select the certificate you want to verify
➞ press [Certificate Details] ➞ [Certificate Verification].
NOTE
<Certificate Thumbprint> contains sender information used to validate the reliability
of a PDF with a device signature, by matching it with the MD5 or SHA-1 message
digest number. For more information on confirming <Certificate Thumbprint> and
other device signature information, see Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in
the Network Guide.
9-28
Confirming the Device Signature Certificate
Checking a User Signature Certificate
You can confirm the certificate and key pair required for adding a user signature to
PDF files.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Digital User Signature PDF Kit is activated, and
you are logged in to the machine using the SDL or SSO login service.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Check User
Signature Certificate].
To verify a certificate, select the certificate you want to verify
➞ press [Certificate Details] ➞ [Certificate Verification].
Checking a User Signature Certificate
9-29
Customizing Communications Settings
IMPORTANT
You cannot press [Check User Signature Certificate] if the certificate and key pair for
adding a user signature have not been installed. For more information on installing a user
certificate, see the Remote UI Guide.
9
Initial Send Screen Display
This mode enables you to set whether [Favorites], [One-touch], or [New Address]
tabs will be displayed on the initial Send Basic Features screen when the power is
turned ON, or the Auto Clear mode is activated. You can also switch the screen to
the Send Basic Features screen, which displays enlarged Favorites Buttons.
Customizing Communications Settings
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Default Screen
for Send].
Select [Favorites Buttons], [One-touch Buttons], or [New
Address] ➞ press [OK].
● If you select [Favorites Buttons]:
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Enlarged Display> ➞ press [OK].
9
<Enlarged Display>:
[On]: Switches the screen to the Send Basic Features screen, and displays
enlarged favorites buttons.
[Off]: Switches the screen to the Send Basic Features screen, and displays
regular size favorites buttons.
9-30
Initial Send Screen Display
Printing the TX Terminal ID
IMPORTANT
In the United States, this setting must be set to 'On'. Please see "FCC (Federal
Communications Commission)," on p. xvii, and "Things You Must Do Before Using This
Machine," on p. 1-11, for details on FCC rules governing the use of facsimile equipment
in the United States.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [TX Terminal ID].
Select [On] or [Off].
● If you select [On] (The optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3
Multi-Line Fax Board is not installed):
Customizing Communications Settings
The TX Terminal ID setting enables you to specify whether the Terminal ID
information is printed at the top of every document that you send via fax or I-fax.
Information such as your fax number, name, and I-fax address is printed, enabling
the recipient to know who sent the document.
9
❑ Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
Printing the TX Terminal ID
9-31
< Printing Position>:
[Inside]:
The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the
recipient's paper.
[Outside]: The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on the
recipient's paper.
<Display Destination Name>:
[On]:
The destination name registered in the Address Book is displayed
in the Terminal ID information.
[Off]:
The destination name registered in the Address Book is not
displayed in the Terminal ID information.
Customizing Communications Settings
Example: If you set TX Terminal ID and Display Destination Name to 'On', the
Terminal ID information is printed on the recipient's paper as
follows:
02/14/2007 15:00
02/14/2007 15:00
9
● If you select [On] (The optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3
Multi-Line Fax Board is installed):
❑ Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
9-32
Printing the TX Terminal ID
<Printing Position>:
[Inside]:
The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the
recipient's paper.
[Outside]: The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on
the recipient's paper.
<Display Destination Name>:
[On]:
The destination name registered in the Address Book is displayed
in the Terminal ID information.
[Off]:
The destination name registered in the Address Book is not
displayed in the Terminal ID information.
[FAX]:
"FAX" is printed before the fax number.
[TEL]:
"TEL" is printed before the telephone number.
Example: If you set TX Terminal ID and Display Destination Name to 'On', the
Terminal ID information is printed on the recipient's paper as
follows:
11/13/2007 TUE
Customizing Communications Settings
<Telephone # Mark>:
9
11/13/2007 TUE
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
Printing the TX Terminal ID
9-33
Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With
WebDAV
Chunked encoding is a function for sending a file with an unknown size by dividing
it into chunks of a known length. It enables the sending time to be reduced because
it is not necessary to calculate the size of the file before sending it.
You can set whether to divide data into chunks when sending with WebDAV.
Customizing Communications Settings
IMPORTANT
You may not be able to send files with chunked encoding, depending on certain
conditions for the WebDAV server and proxy server.
NOTE
If [Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending] is set to 'Off', the speed when sending
with WebDAV is slightly slower than normal.
9
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Use Chunked
Encoding with WebDAV Sending].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]: Divide data into chunks when sending with WebDAV.
[Off]: Do not divide data into chunks when sending with WebDAV.
9-34
Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With WebDAV
Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs
NOTE
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed and
you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Gamma Value
for YCbCr Send Jobs].
Select the gamma value ([Gamma 1.0], [Gamma 1.4], [Gamma
1.8], or [Gamma 2.2]) ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Communications Settings
If you are sending to an e-mail or file server destination, you can specify the gamma
value used when converting scanned RGB image data to YCbCr. By setting a
gamma value corresponding to the gamma value at the receiving end, sent image
data can be printed with the appropriate image quality at the receiving end.
9
Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs
9-35
Initializing TX Settings
You can restore almost all of the TX settings to their default settings.
IMPORTANT
You cannot initialize the Sender's Names (TTI), Unit Name, Handle Documents with
Forwarding Errors, and TX Terminal ID settings.
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
If you initialize the TX Settings, the settings stored in the favorites buttons are also
initialized.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Initialize TX
Settings].
Press [Yes].
9
9-36
Initializing TX Settings
2-Sided Printing
You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This
enables you to save paper.
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [2-Sided Print].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Communications Settings
1
9
2-Sided Printing
9-37
Paper Drawer Selection
You can set how the machine prints documents when there is no paper matching
the size of the received document.
There are four printing methods (Switches A, B, C, and D):
Customizing Communications Settings
• Switch
A: The image is printed over two sheets of paper that have the same
combined size as the received document.
Received Data (Original)
11" x 17"
• Switch
Output
LTR
LTR
B: The image is printed with blank space on paper that has the same width
as the received document.
Received Data (Original)
Output
9
LTR
• Switch
11" x 17"
C: The image is reduced and printed on paper that differs in width from the
received document.
Received Data (Original)
Output
LTRR
11" x 17"
9-38
Paper Drawer Selection
• Switch
D: The image is printed on paper that is larger in size than the received
document.
Received Data (Original)
Output
LTRR
NOTE
For more information on selecting a paper source for printing received documents, see
Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Select Drawer].
2
Select [On] or [Off] for the respective switches ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Communications Settings
11" x 17"
9
Paper Drawer Selection
9-39
Reducing a Received Document
You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the
whole document is printed within the printable area of the paper.
Customizing Communications Settings
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Receive
Reduction].
Select [On] or [Off].
IMPORTANT
• If you select [Off], the received document is not automatically reduced to fit the size
of the paper. If the size of the received document exceeds the printable area, the
image is divided into equal sections and printed onto separate sheets of paper.
• Regardless of the settings you set for Receive Reduction, if the area of the image
which exceeds the printable area is less than 1/2" (12 mm), it will not be printed.
9
9-40
Reducing a Received Document
● If you select [On]:
❑ Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
[Auto]:
The image is automatically reduced by a suitable
reduction ratio that can range from the value set for
<Reduce %> up to 100% of the received document size.
[Fixed Reduction]: The image is reduced by the reduction ratio set for
<Reduce %>.
<Reduce %>:
Press [-] or [+] to specify the reduction ratio.
<Reduce Direction>:
[Vertical & Horizontal]: The image is reduced in both the vertical and
horizontal directions.
[Vertical Only]:
The image is reduced in the vertical direction only.
● If you select [Off]:
Customizing Communications Settings
<RX Reduction>:
9
❑ Press [OK].
Reducing a Received Document
9-41
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document
Customizing Communications Settings
You can set whether the machine prints the date, day, and time received,
transaction number, and page number at the bottom of the received document.
11/20/2007
TUE
11:20
JOB NO. 5010
001
Page Number
Transaction Number
Time Received
Day Received
Date Received
9
9-42
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Received Page
Footer].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document
2 On 1 Log
This mode enables you to print two received documents of the same paper size
onto a single sheet of paper.
The 2 On 1 Log mode is available only under the following conditions:
same paper drawer must be selected for printing two consecutive pages of
the received document.
• The paper in the selected paper drawer must be large enough for two consecutive
pages to be printed out.
- Example: If the LTR paper drawer is empty, but the 11" x 17" drawer is loaded,
you can print two LTR documents onto a single sheet of 11" x 17" paper.
NOTE
When the 2 On 1 Log mode is set to 'On', documents are printed with a dotted line in the
middle. If the document is printed with sender information, the dotted line is not printed in
the area where the sender information is located.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [2 On 1 Log].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Communications Settings
• The
9
2 On 1 Log
9-43
Gamma Value for YCbCr Received Jobs
You can set the gamma value to use when receiving documents. This enables you
to print received documents with the appropriate image quality.
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed and
you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [Gamma Value
for YCbCr Received Jobs].
Select the gamma value ([Gamma 1.0], [Gamma 1.4], [Gamma
1.8], or [Gamma 2.2]) ➞ press [OK].
9
9-44
Gamma Value for YCbCr Received Jobs
Adjusting the Alarm and Monitor Volume
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
• The alarm tone sounds when sending or receiving is canceled.
• The monitor tone sounds when it connects to the recipient's fax machine.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [User Settings] under <Fax Settings> ➞ [Volume Control].
Select [ ] or [ ] to set the Alarm Volume and Monitor
Volume ➞ press [OK].
You can set the volume to any level on a scale of 0 to 8.
If you set the volume all the way to the left, the volume is muted and no tone will
sound.
Customizing Communications Settings
You can set the volume for the alarm and monitor tones that this machine sounds
during a fax transmission.
9
Adjusting the Alarm and Monitor Volume
9-45
ECM Transmission
ECM (Error Correction Mode) reduces the effect of system and line errors on
documents that occur during sending or receiving with another fax machine that
supports ECM. If the other machine does not support ECM, this setting is ignored.
If transmission speed appears to be extremely slow, you may be able to speed up
transmission time by turning ECM 'Off'.
Customizing Communications Settings
IMPORTANT
• If you want to transmit using ECM, it is necessary that ECM Transmission be set in both
the destination machine and this machine. This function does not operate unless ECM is
set in both machines.
• Even when ECM is set, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line
connection.
• If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to send the documents.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
9
9-46
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Fax Settings> ➞ [ECM TX].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
ECM Transmission
Pause Time
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
• You can insert a pause on the screen where you specify the fax number. (See "Specifying
a Fax Number," on p. 2-2.)
• Pauses entered at the end of dialed fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Fax Settings> ➞ [Pause Time].
2
Press [-] or [+] to set the pause time ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Communications Settings
Some overseas dialing may be affected by the distance or complex routing of
connections when dialing the international access code, country code, and the
destination's telephone number all at once. In such cases, insert a pause after the
international access code. When the machine dials the number, it will pause where
the pause was inserted in the number. This helps to improve the connection.
9
Pause Time
9-47
Auto Redial
Auto Redial enables the machine to automatically redial the recipient's fax number
if the recipient cannot be reached due to a busy line, or if a sending error occurs.
Auto Redial can be turned 'On' or 'Off'. If you set Auto Redial to 'On', you can set
how many times the machine redials, the redial interval, and whether the document
should be resent due to an error.
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
• If a sending error occurs when the receiving end answers the call, it may be because of a
misdialed number. To prevent the machine from constantly redialing to the same number
even though it was wrong, the machine will only redial once, regardless of the Redial
Times setting. However, if the receiving end does not answer the call, the machine will
dial the number of times set for the Redial Times setting.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Fax Settings> ➞ [Auto Redial].
2
9
Select [On] or [Off].
● If you select [On]:
❑ Press [Option] ➞ specify each setting ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
9-48
Auto Redial
<Redial Times>:
Press [-] or [+] to set the number of redial times.
<Redial Interval>:
Press [-] or [+] to set the redial interval.
<TX Error Resend>:
[Error and 1st page]: Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. The
first page of the document, the error page, and all
subsequent pages are resent.
[All pages]:
Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. All
pages of the document are resent.
[Off]:
Redialing does not take place if a sending error occurs.
Customizing Communications Settings
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
9
Auto Redial
9-49
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending
The following redirection problem may happen with certain kinds of fax machines
on the market made by companies other than Canon. The Check Dial Tone Before
Sending mode prevents this rare occurrence from happening.
Customizing Communications Settings
If you are sending a fax document from your machine at the same time another fax
machine (made by a company other than Canon) is trying to send you a fax, your
fax document may end up being redirected to that fax machine, instead of the
original destination you had intended.
Setting Check Dial Tone Before Sending to 'On' enables you to avoid such sending
problems.
IMPORTANT
If the phone line your machine is using is connected to a PBX or network adapter, you
may not be able to send faxes if Check Dial Tone Before Sending mode is set to 'On'.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
9
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [TX Settings] under <Fax Settings> ➞ [Check Dial Tone
Before Sending].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
• The Check Dial Tone Before Sending mode is enabled only after you restart the
machine (the main power switch is turned OFF, and then back ON).
• For more information on how to turn the main power ON and OFF, see Chapter 1,
"Before You Start Using This Machine," in the Reference Guide.
9-50
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending
ECM Reception
You can receive incoming documents using ECM (Error Correction Mode).
IMPORTANT
• If you want to communicate using ECM, it is necessary that ECM Reception be set in
both the destination machine and this machine. This function does not operate unless
ECM is set in both machines.
• Even when ECM is set, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line
connection.
• If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to receive the documents.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [RX Settings] under <Fax Settings> ➞ [ECM RX].
Customizing Communications Settings
ECM is a mode which automatically corrects errors in an image while it is being
received.
9
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
ECM Reception
9-51
Registering the Fax Number for an Additional Line
If the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, you must register a
different fax number for the additional line. This number is printed on the document
that you fax to the receiving party.
The number may also be displayed on the touch panel display of the receiving
party's machine, depending on their type of machine.
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [Dual Line Options] under <Fax Settings> ➞ [Unit Telephone
#].
Enter the machine's telephone number using
keys) ➞ press [OK].
-
(numeric
Details of each item are shown below.
9
[Space]:
Press to insert a space between the area code and the local fax
number.
[+]:
Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code, and
before the fax number.
[ ][ ]:
Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.
9-52
Registering the Fax Number for an Additional Line
Registering the Unit Name for an Additional Line
Your name or company's name must be registered as the unit's name (a
department name is optional) for an additional line.
Some fax models also display sender information on the touch panel display during
transmission.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [Dual Line Options] under <Fax Settings> ➞ [Unit Name].
2
Enter a name ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Communications Settings
When you send a document, the recipient's machine displays or prints your name
or company's name (and department's name, if applicable) as the sender's
information on the recording paper.
9
Registering the Unit Name for an Additional Line
9-53
Selecting the Telephone Line Type for an Additional
Line
Set the type of additional telephone line that is connected to the machine.
If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to communicate with other machines.
Be sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct
setting.
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [Dual Line Options] under <Fax Settings> ➞ [Tel Line Type].
2
Select the type of telephone line ➞ press [OK].
If you do not know the telephone line type, call your telephone service provider
for details.
9
9-54
Selecting the Telephone Line Type for an Additional Line
Selecting the Line for Sending
You can register the method for selecting the line to use for sending.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Communications Settings]
➞ [Dual Line Options] under <Fax Settings> ➞ [TX Line
Selection].
2
Select the line to use for sending ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Communications Settings
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed.
• If you select another line for sending on the Send Settings screen or One-touch Buttons
screen, that setting takes priority.
9
<Line 1>:
[Priority TX]:
Sends with line 1 if this line is not in use.
[Prohibit TX]: Prohibits sending with line 1. (Line 1 is only used for receiving.)
Documents are always sent with line 2. If line 2 is in use, the
machine waits to send the document.
Selecting the Line for Sending
9-55
<Line 2>:
[Priority TX]: Sends with line 2 if this line is not in use or sends with line 1 if line 2
is in use.
[Prohibit TX]: Prohibits sending with line 2. (Line 2 is only used for receiving.)
Documents are always sent with line 1. If line 1 is in use, the
machine waits to send the document.
Customizing Communications Settings
IMPORTANT
Even if you set to prohibit using line 1 for sending document, line 1 is still used for
manual sending.
9
9-56
Selecting the Line for Sending
Storing/Editing Address Book
Settings
10
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to register various addresses in the Address Book and how to edit
and erase registered information.
Address Book Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
About the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Storing New Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Fax Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
E-Mail Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
I-Fax Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
File Server Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Group Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19
Addresses Obtained via a Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-23
Editing Address Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Erasing Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Naming an Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Erasing One-Touch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
10-1
Address Book Settings Table
The following items can be stored or set in Address Book Settings from the
Additional Functions screen.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Register Address
Register New Address
Edit
Erase
Yes
p. 10-5
Register Address Book Name
Register Name
Yes
p. 10-34
One-touch Buttons
Register/Edit, Erase
Yes
p. 10-35
NOTE
• For instructions on setting the modes not described in this manual, refer to the other
manuals listed in "Manuals for the Machine," on p. ii.
• Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set,
is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device
Information Delivery Settings mode, see Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the
Reference Guide.
10
10-2
Address Book Settings Table
About the Address Book
The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax, e-mail, I-fax, and file server
destinations. The Address Book is divided into 10 subaddress books and one-touch
buttons. You can store up to 1,800 destinations, including 1,600 destinations in the
subaddress books, and 200 destinations in one-touch buttons. Registering a
destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that destination's
address each time you send a job. By storing your own e-mail address, you can
specify a reply-to e-mail address and use the Job Done Notice function.
NOTE
• Since each address entry is treated as a single entry, if an e-mail address is registered in
a group address, that e-mail address and the group address are counted as two entries.
In the same way, if a fax number is registered in a group address, the fax number and
group address are counted as two entries.
• E-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and group addresses can also
be registered in the Address Book.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line FAX Board is installed, fax
numbers in addition to the above mentioned destinations can be registered in the
Address Book.
• Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file,
which can later be imported in the machine. For information on exporting the Address
Book, see Chapter 3, "Customizing Settings," in the Remote UI Guide.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
The following types of destinations can be stored in the Address Book.
10
■ Fax
You can store fax numbers, as well as subaddress and password information.
A fax number obtained by searching through the directory listings on a server on the
network using LDAP can also be stored.
■ E-mail
You can store e-mail addresses.
An e-mail address obtained by searching through the directory listings on a server on the
network using LDAP can also be stored.
■ I-Fax
You can store the I-fax address, the mode, and the destination conditions.
An e-mail address obtained by searching through the directory listings on a server on the
network using LDAP can also be stored as an I-fax address.
About the Address Book
10-3
■ File
You can register a protocol, host name, folder path, etc. for storing scanned documents in
a file server.
NOTE
For examples of settings needed for sending to a file server, see the Network Guide.
■ Group
You can register multiple destinations of various types in a group address. You can group
and use these registered destinations according to your needs.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
NOTE
• You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations must be
registered in the Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address.
• When you register destinations in a group address, you can select and store only
destinations registered in the same subaddress book.
10
10-4
About the Address Book
Storing New Addresses
NOTE
• If you want to manage destinations with the Access Number Management mode, set the
Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-18.)
• If there is any required destination setting that has not yet been set after registering the
access number, the screen for specifying the destination settings is displayed again.
• If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'Off' when Access Number Management in Restrict the Send
Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the
access number that you enter is not displayed as asterisks on the Access Number
Settings screen. (See Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
• You can enter up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than seven
digits, the machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
Fax Numbers
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
If you register a destination in the Address Book, you can save yourself the effort of
entering the destination every time it is used. That destination can also be selected
from the Address Book for use in any other customized setting.
10
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
FAX Board is installed.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address].
Storing New Addresses
10-5
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
2
Press [Register New Address].
3
Press [Fax].
4
Press [Name].
5
Enter a name for the recipient of the fax ➞ press [OK].
10
NOTE
The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the destination list
when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book
screen.
10-6
Storing New Addresses
6
Press the Address Book drop-down list ➞ select one of the
numbered subaddress books.
Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called
subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.
The fax number that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you
select here.
Enter the recipient's fax number using
, and .
-
(numeric keys),
Details of each item are shown below.
[Pause]:
Press to insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number that
you are dialing. If you insert a pause, the letter <p> is displayed
between the numbers, and the letter <P> appears at the end of
the number. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause
after the country code, and at the end of the telephone number.
(See "Pause Time," on p. 9-47.)
[Tone]:
Press when you want to directly call an extension line that is
connected to a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) which accepts
only tone signals. If you press [Tone], the letter <T> appears. (See
"Fax Information Services," on p. 7-8.)
[ ] [ ]:
Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.
[Space]:
Press to insert a space between numbers.
[+]:
Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code, and
before the fax number.
[Option]:
Press to specify the subaddress, password, ECM TX, sending
speed, and type of call settings. These settings are optional.
[PIN Code]:
Press to enter the PIN (Personal Identification Number) code. You
can press this key only if [Option] is selected for PIN code
position. If [Prefix], [Suffix], or [Off] is selected for PIN code
position, this key is grayed out. (See "Using a PIN Code," on p.
7-5.)
IMPORTANT
You cannot insert a pause or a space at the beginning of a number.
NOTE
If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds
long.
Storing New Addresses
10-7
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
7
10
● If you press [Option]:
❑ Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
[Subaddress] and [Password]:
Press [Subaddress] ➞ enter the recipient's subaddress using
keys), , and .
-
Press [Password] ➞ enter the recipient's password using
keys), , and .
(numeric
-
(numeric
Press [Confirm] ➞ re-enter the recipient's password for confirmation ➞ press
[OK].
Press [Space] to insert a space.
Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit entered.
If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not
need to enter a password.
<ECM TX>:
Select [On] or [Off].
<Sending Speed>:
Press the Sending Speed drop-down list ➞ select the desired sending speed.
If your document transmissions are slow in starting, this may mean that the
telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You
can select [33600 bps], [14400 bps], [9600 bps], or [4800 bps].
10
<Long Distance>:
Press the Long Distance drop-down list ➞ select the type of call.
Select [Long Distance (1)] if transmission errors occur frequently when you
make overseas calls (when the number is stored in the Address Book). If
errors persist, try selecting [Long Distance (2)] or [Long Distance (3)].
<Line Selection>:
Press the Line Selection drop-down list ➞ select the line.
[Line 1]: Standard Line
[Line 2]: Additional Line
10-8
Storing New Addresses
[Auto]:
A line is selected according to the settings you made for TX Line
Selection in Dual Line Options under <Fax Settings> in
Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
(See "Selecting the Line for Sending," on p. 9-55.)
IMPORTANT
If you want to attach a subaddress to your send job, make sure that the recipient's
fax machine supports ITU-T standard subaddresses.
8
Finish storing the address.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On':
❑ Press [Next].
❑ Press [Access Number].
❑ Press [Access Number] ➞ enter the access number using
-
(numeric
keys).
❑ Press [Confirm] ➞ re-enter the access number for confirmation ➞ press [OK] ➞
[OK].
If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK]
without entering any number.
10
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off':
❑ Press [OK].
E-Mail Addresses
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address] ➞ [Register New Address].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax Numbers," on p. 10-5.
Storing New Addresses
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
NOTE
• The Line Selection drop-down list is displayed only if the optional Super G3
Multi-Line FAX Board is installed.
• If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password you enter is not displayed
as asterisks. (See Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
10-9
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
2
Press [E-mail].
3
Press [Name].
4
Enter a name for the e-mail address ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the address list
when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book
screen.
10
5
Press the Address Book drop-down list ➞ select one of the
numbered subaddress books.
Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called
subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.
The e-mail address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you
select here.
6
10-10
Press [E-mail Address] ➞ enter the e-mail address ➞ press
[OK].
Storing New Addresses
7
Select [On] or [Off] for <Divided Data Destination>.
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]: Select [On] if the destination's e-mail software has a function to combine
divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for
Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen), the data is divided into multiple parts before being sent. Once the
destination machine receives all the parts of the data, it combines them
into one item of data.
IMPORTANT
Make sure to check the specifications of the destination's e-mail software before
setting this mode. A sending error may occur if the destination's e-mail software is
not able to combine divided data.
NOTE
For more information on the maximum data size for sending, see "E-Mail/I-Fax
Common Settings," on p. 11-5.
8
Finish storing the address.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On':
10
❑ Press [Next].
❑ Press [Access Number].
❑ Press [Access Number] ➞ enter the access number using
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
[Off]: Select [Off] if the destination's e-mail software has no function to combine
divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for
Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen), the data is divided into pages and sent as multiple e-mail
messages.
-
(numeric
keys).
❑ Press [Confirm] ➞ re-enter the access number for confirmation using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
If you do not want to set an access number for this e-mail address, press [OK]
without entering any number.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off':
❑ Press [OK].
Storing New Addresses
10-11
I-Fax Addresses
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address] ➞ [Register New Address].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax Numbers," on p. 10-5.
2
Press [I-Fax].
3
Press [Name].
4
Enter a name for the I-fax address ➞ press [OK].
10
NOTE
The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the address list
when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book
screen.
10-12
Storing New Addresses
5
Press the Address Book drop-down list ➞ select one of the
numbered subaddress books.
Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called
subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.
The I-fax address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you
select here.
6
Press the Mode drop-down list ➞ select [Simple] or [Full].
<Mode>:
[Simple]: Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet.
Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet, and enables you to
receive a delivery confirmation message telling you whether your I-fax
was sent successfully.
In order for you to receive a confirmation message telling you the delivery status
of your I-fax document, the recipient's machine must have I-fax capabilities and
be compatible with the Full mode.
NOTE
If you send documents using the Full mode to a machine that does not support the
Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. When this happens, the job
concerned is not considered as complete even though the actual sending of the
document is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result...> on the
Status screen until the time set for Full Mode TX Timeout in I-Fax Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) has lapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is
shown as <-> when sending of the document to a server or other destination could
not be verified.
7
Press [I-Fax Address] ➞ enter the I-fax address ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
If you do not send documents via a server, and if the recipient's IP address is not
registered with a DNS server, enter the domain name in the following format:
(user)@(the recipient's IP address).
8
Press [Standard Field 1] and [Standard Field 2] ➞ enter their
respective standard fields ➞ press [OK].
Standard Field 1 and Standard Field 2 are settings required for using an Internet
fax service. For details, contact your service provider.
If you do not use an Internet fax service, this step is not necessary.
Storing New Addresses
10-13
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
[Full]:
10
NOTE
After pressing [OK], the standard field that you entered appears as asterisks
(********) on the I-fax settings screen.
9
Select [On] or [Off] for <Send Via Server>.
<Send Via Server>:
[On]: Sends documents via a server. You can send documents to destinations
via the Internet in the same way as e-mail.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
[Off]: Does not send documents via a server. You can send large amounts of
image data to a recipient within the same LAN (Local Area Network)
environment without placing a burden on the mail server. This enables you
to send documents quickly and directly to the recipient. To use this setting,
it is necessary to set up an MX (Mail eXchange) record on the DNS server.
Ask your System Manager whether this type of sending is possible before
you set Send Via Server to 'Off'.
If you specify the Standard Field settings, set Send Via Server to 'On'.
IMPORTANT
To be able to specify the Send Via Server setting, set <Use Send Via Server> to
'On' on the I-Fax Settings screen beforehand. It is recommended to set <Allow
MDN Not Via Server> to 'On' on the same screen. To access the I-Fax Settings
screen, press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Communications
Settings] ➞ [I-Fax Settings]. If <Use Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', <Send Via
Server> is grayed out. (See "I-Fax Settings," on p. 11-7.)
NOTE
Even if <Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', delivery confirmation of documents sent
using the Full mode is carried out via the server.
10
10-14
Storing New Addresses
Press [Destination Conditions] ➞ select [On] or [Off] for
<Receive Divided Data>.
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]: Select [On] if the destination machine has a function to combine divided
data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum
Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the
data is divided into multiple parts before being sent. Once the destination
machine receives all the parts of the data, it combines them into one item
of data.
[Off]: Select [Off] if the destination machine has no function to combine divided
data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum
Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), a
sending error occurs.
IMPORTANT
Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's
machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the
recipient's machine does not support.
NOTE
For more information on the maximum data size for sending, see "E-Mail/I-Fax
Common Settings," on p. 11-5.
Storing New Addresses
10-15
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
10
10
11
Specify the receiving conditions of the destination.
● If you want to send in black-and-white:
❑ Press [Off] for <Receive in Color>.
❑ Set the paper size, compression method, and resolution ➞ press [OK].
The following conditions are always selected:
• Paper Size:
A4/LTR
• Compression Method: MH (Modified Huffman)
• Resolution:
200 x 100 dpi and 200 x 200 dpi
LTR, LGL, and STMT are included in [A4/LTR].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
IMPORTANT
Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's
machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the
recipient's machine does not support.
NOTE
Available compression methods are:
- MH (Modified Huffman) - a coding system that horizontally scans and
compresses extended areas of white and black dots.
- MR (Modified Read) - a coding system that horizontally and vertically scans and
compresses white and black areas. Faster than MH.
- MMR (Modified Modified Read) - an adaptation of Modified Read, originally for
use in digital machines. Faster than MR.
● If you want to send in color:
❑ Press [On] for <Receive in Color> ➞ press [Next].
10
❑ Set the paper size and resolution ➞ press [OK].
The following conditions are always selected:
• Paper Size: A4/LTR
• Resolution: 200 x 200 dpi
LTR, LGL, and STMT are included in [A4/LTR].
IMPORTANT
Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's
machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the
recipient's machine does not support.
10-16
Storing New Addresses
12
Finish storing the address.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On':
❑ Press [Next].
❑ Press [Access Number].
❑ Press [Access Number] ➞ enter the access number using
-
(numeric
keys).
❑ Press [Confirm] ➞ re-enter the access number for confirmation using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
If you do not want to set an access number for this I-fax address, press [OK]
without entering any number.
❑ Press [OK].
File Server Addresses
IMPORTANT
If Language Switch in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'On', the Host Name and Folder Path of the file server destination may not be displayed
correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
NOTE
• For examples of the settings needed to send to a file server, see the Network Guide.
• UPN can be used only if you are sending to a computer belonging to a domain operated
with Active Directory.
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off':
10
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address] ➞ [Register New Address].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax Numbers," on p. 10-5.
Storing New Addresses
10-17
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
2
Press [File].
3
Press [Name].
4
Enter a name for the file server address ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the address list
when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book
screen.
10
5
Press the Address Book drop-down list ➞ select one of the
numbered subaddress books.
Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called
subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.
The file server address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that
you select here.
10-18
Storing New Addresses
6
Press the Protocol drop-down list ➞ select the desired
protocol.
NOTE
For more information on the available protocols, see "Using the Keyboard," on p.
2-12.
7
Set [Host Name], [Folder Path], [User], and [Password].
NOTE
For instructions on specifying each of the settings for FTP, Windows (SMB),
NetWare (IPX), and WebDAV, see "Specifying a File Server," on p. 2-11.
Finish storing the address.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On':
❑ Press [Next].
❑ Press [Access Number].
❑ Press [Access Number] ➞ enter the access number using
-
(numeric
keys).
❑ Press [Confirm] ➞ re-enter the access number for confirmation using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
If you do not want to set an access number for this file server address, press
[OK] without entering any number.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off':
10
❑ Press [OK].
Group Addresses
The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 256 stored
destinations as a single destination.
IMPORTANT
If you want to store a group address, the destinations must be stored beforehand, such
as fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and file server addresses.
Storing New Addresses
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
8
10-19
NOTE
• If you want to store a group address, you can only select destinations that you registered
in the same subaddress book.
• E-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and a User Inbox can be stored
in a group address.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line FAX Board is installed, fax
numbers in addition to the above mentioned destinations can be stored in a group
address.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address] ➞ [Register New Address].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax Numbers," on p. 10-5.
10
10-20
2
Press [Group].
3
Press [Name].
Storing New Addresses
4
Enter a name for the group address ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the address list
when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book
screen.
5
Press the Address Book drop-down list ➞ select one of the
numbered subaddress books.
Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called
subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.
6
Select [Address Book] or [Store In Usr Inbox].
To store destinations in a group address, those destinations must be stored in the
subaddress book that contains the group address.
You cannot store destinations from different subaddress books in the group
address. For example, you cannot store e-mail addresses from Address Book 1
and file server addresses from Address Book 2 into the same group address.
● If you select [Address Book]:
❑ Select the destination ➞ press [OK].
If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to
select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access
Number] ➞ enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book," on p.
2-24.)
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination once more to clear the
check mark.
Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for
each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the
displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by
pressing the Type drop-down list.
You can select a destination and press [Details] to confirm the detailed
information related to the selected destinations. Press [Done] to return to the
previous screen.
Repeat step 6 to add other destinations.
Storing New Addresses
10-21
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
The group address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you
select here.
10
NOTE
[Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in
Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-18.)
● If you select [Store In Usr Inbox]:
❑ Select the User Inbox from the Inbox Selection screen ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
Only one User Inbox can be stored in a group address.
● To erase a destination:
❑ Select a destination from the group address ➞ press [Erase].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
7
Finish storing the address.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On':
❑ Press [Next].
❑ Press [Access Number].
❑ Press [Access Number] ➞ enter the access number using
-
(numeric
keys).
❑ Press [Confirm] ➞ re-enter the access number for confirmation using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
If you do not want to set an access number for this group address, press [OK]
without entering any number.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off':
10
❑ Press [OK].
10-22
Storing New Addresses
Addresses Obtained via a Server
You can store an address that is obtained by searching the directory listings on the
network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address] ➞ [Register New Address].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Fax Numbers," on p. 10-5.
2
Press [Network Add. Book].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
NOTE
• You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network
environment.
• For more information on LDAP servers, see "LDAP Server Settings," on p. 11-46.
• The information that can be obtained via the LDAP server is names and e-mail
addresses. If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line FAX Board is
installed, fax numbers in addition to the above mentioned information can be also
obtained via the LDAP server.
10
Storing New Addresses
10-23
3
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
4
Press the Server to Search drop-down list ➞ select the desired
server to search.
Specify the search criteria.
NOTE
If you want to search for a destination that is registered with an e-mail address and
a fax number, you can search for the e-mail address by entering the fax number as
the search criterion, and vice versa.
● To use Simple Search:
❑ Press [Name], [E-mail], or [Fax] ➞ enter the name, e-mail address, or fax
number for which you want to search ➞ press [OK].
The search criteria boxes that are not filled out are not searched.
To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, press
[Detailed Search], and follow the directions below. The search criteria you
entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed Search.
10
● To use Detailed Search:
❑ Press [Detailed Search].
❑ Press the search category drop-down list ➞ select the desired search category.
The available search categories are:
[Name]:
Search by name.
[E-mail]:
Search by e-mail address.
[Fax]:
Search by fax number.
[Organization]:
Search by organization name.
[OrgnztionUnit]: Search by organizational unit (e.g., departments in an
organization).
10-24
Storing New Addresses
For example, if cn(common name)=user1, ou(organization unit)=salesdept,
o(organization)=canon, c(country)=jp is the distinguished name in the
directory, enter the organization/organizationUnit of the user as follows:
organization=canon
organizationUnit=salesdept
NOTE
• The organization/organizationUnit can be used as search categories only if the
information has been registered on the LDAP Server.
• Detailed Search by organization/organizationUnit may not be performed,
depending on whether the attribute types have been registered on the LDAP
server, and depending on the type of application on the server.
• You can also add additional user-defined search attributes. For more information
on registering or editing a search attribute, see "Registering/Editing LDAP Search
Attributes," on p. 11-52.
condition ➞ press [Settings].
You can select from the following search conditions:
[contains]:
The result must contain the entered name, e-mail
address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[does not contain]: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail
address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[equals]:
The result must be exactly the same as the entered
name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or
organizational unit.
[differs from]:
The result must be different from the entered name,
e-mail address, fax number, organization, or
organizational unit.
[begins with]:
The result must begin with the same first few letters that
you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number,
organization, or organizational unit.
[ends with]:
The result must end with the same last few letters that you
entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number,
organization, or organizational unit.
Storing New Addresses
10-25
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Press the search condition drop-down list ➞ select the desired search
10
❑ Enter the search criterion ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press [Add].
To continue adding more search criteria, press [or] or [and] ➞ repeat step 4.
[or]:
The machine searches and returns a result for either of the specified
search criteria.
[and]: The machine searches and returns a result for all of the specified
search criteria.
To edit the search criteria, select the search criterion that you want to edit ➞
press [Edit] ➞ [Settings].
To delete the search criteria, select the criterion that you want to erase ➞
press [Erase].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
NOTE
• You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
• If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both [or] and [and]
together.
• If you press [Simple Search] after specifying search criteria on the Detailed Search
screen, the display changes to the Simple Search screen, and the specified
detailed search criteria are deleted.
5
Press [Start Searching].
To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press
[Cancel]. If the machine finds some results before you press [Cancel], these
search results are displayed.
IMPORTANT
• Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of
the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If
you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the
time settings on the server and the machine.
• The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in
Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If
the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of
addresses to search, or change the search criteria. (See "LDAP Server Settings,"
on p. 11-46.)
10
NOTE
If you press [Start Searching] without specifying any search criteria, all the
addresses stored on the LDAP server are displayed.
10-26
Storing New Addresses
● If the Enter Network Password screen is displayed:
❑ Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
The Enter Network Password screen is displayed if either one of the following
is true:
• If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use', and <Display authentication
dialog when searching> is set to 'On'.
• If the user name, password, and domain name specified in Register LDAP
Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are
incorrect.
[User]:
Press [User] ➞ enter the user name ➞ press [OK].
[Password]:
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks
(********) on the Enter Network Password screen.
6
Select the destination that you want to store in the Address
Book from the search results ➞ press [Next].
To continue searching, press [Back].
You can select multiple destinations.
If you want to select the first 64 destinations, press [Select All (Max 64
destinations)]. (If a destination is selected, the key changes to [Clear Selection].)
E-mail addresses that meet the specified search criteria are displayed. You can
register the selected e-mail address as an I-fax address by pressing [Register
e-mail address for I-Fax]. To register e-mail addresses as I-fax addresses,
register one e-mail address at a time.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line FAX Board is installed,
fax numbers that meet the specified search criteria are also displayed.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line FAX Board is installed,
you can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing
the Type drop-down list.
NOTE
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check
mark.
Storing New Addresses
10-27
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
Press [Password] ➞ enter the password ➞ press [OK].
10
7
Store the selected destination.
IMPORTANT
The information that can be obtained via the LDAP server consists of only names
and e-mail addresses, and fax numbers.
● If only one destination is selected:
❑ Verify the address ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, edit the contents of the address.
If the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', press [Next].
Press [Access Number].
Press [Access Number] ➞ enter the access number using
keys).
-
(numeric
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
Press [Confirm] ➞ re-enter the access number for confirmation using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK] ➞[OK].
-
If you do not want to set an access number for this address, press [OK]
without entering any number.
● If multiple destinations are selected:
❑ Select the subaddress book in which to store the addresses ➞ press [OK].
If the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', press [Access
Number].
Press [Access Number] ➞ enter the access number using
keys).
-
Press [Confirm] ➞ re-enter the password for confirmation using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
10
(numeric
-
If you do not want to set an access number for these addresses, press [OK]
without entering any number.
❑ If you want to register a fax number or I-fax address as a new destination, read
the displayed message ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
The maximum number of destinations that can be selected at one time is 64.
10-28
Storing New Addresses
● If you want to register the selected destination as an I-fax address:
❑ Verify the address ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, edit the contents of the address.
If the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', press [Next].
Press [Access Number].
Press [Access Number] ➞ enter the access number using
keys).
-
(numeric
Press [Confirm] ➞ re-enter the access number for confirmation using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
-
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
If you do not want to set an access number for this address, press [OK]
without entering any number.
10
Storing New Addresses
10-29
Editing Address Details
You can change destination details as necessary.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address].
2
Select the destination to be changed ➞ press [Edit].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each
letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range
of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing
the Type drop-down list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to
10. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.
You cannot select a one-touch button stored in a subaddress book.
If you select [All] in the Address Book drop-down list, the destinations stored in
the one-touch buttons are displayed. However, you cannot edit these
destinations. For instructions on storing and editing one-touch buttons, see
"Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons," on p. 10-35.
If you select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access
Number] and then enter the access number using
(numeric keys). If you
press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with an
access number are displayed.
10
NOTE
[Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in
Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-18.)
3
Edit the address details.
You cannot change the address book of a group address, or change a
destination registered as a group address.
10-30
Editing Address Details
NOTE
• For instructions on setting fax numbers, see "Fax Numbers," on p. 10-5.
• For instructions on setting e-mail addresses, see "E-Mail Addresses," on p. 10-9.
• For instructions on setting I-fax addresses, see "I-Fax Addresses," on p. 10-12.
• For instructions on setting file server addresses, see "File Server Addresses," on p.
10-17.
• For instructions on setting group addresses, see "Group Addresses," on p. 10-19.
Finish editing the address details.
● If Access Number Management is set to 'On':
❑ Press [Next].
❑ Press [Access Number].
❑ Press [Access Number] ➞ enter the access number using
-
(numeric
keys).
❑ Press [Confirm] ➞ re-enter the access number for confirmation using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
If you do not want to set an access number for this e-mail address, press [OK]
without entering any number.
You can enter up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than
seven digits, the machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros
are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
10
● If Access Number Management is set to 'Off':
❑ Press [OK].
Editing Address Details
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
4
10-31
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
NOTE
• If you want to manage destinations with the Access Number Management mode,
set the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. (See "Access Number
Management," on p. 11-18.)
• If there is any required destination setting that has not yet been set after registering
the access number, the screen for specifying the destination settings is displayed
again.
• If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off' when Access Number Management in
Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'On', the access number that you enter is not displayed as
asterisks on the Access Number Settings screen. (See Chapter 6, "System
Manager Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
10
10-32
Editing Address Details
Erasing Addresses
You can erase destinations stored in the address book.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address].
2
Select the destination to be erased ➞ press [Erase].
Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each
letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range
of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing
the Type drop-down list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to
10. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.
You cannot select a one-touch button stored in a subaddress book.
If you select [All] in the Address Book drop-down list, the destinations stored in
the one-touch buttons are displayed. However, you cannot erase these
destinations. For instructions on erasing one-touch buttons, see "Erasing
One-Touch Buttons," on p. 10-39.
If you select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access
Number] and then enter the access number using
(numeric keys). If you
press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with an
access number are displayed.
NOTE
[Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in
Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-18.)
3
Press [Yes].
Erasing Addresses
10-33
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
You cannot erase multiple destinations at the same time.
10
Naming an Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
You can assign a name to any subaddress book.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address Book Name].
2
Select a subaddress book to name ➞ press [Register Name].
3
Enter a name ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the subaddress book name
reverts to its current name (default Address Book 1 to 10).
4
Press [OK].
10
10-34
Naming an Address Book
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
You can store up to 200 destinations in the one-touch buttons. This section
describes how to store/edit the destinations with the one-touch buttons feature.
NOTE
• Destinations stored in one-touch buttons are also displayed in the Address Book.
• A new destination cannot be registered in a group destination that is stored in a
one-touch button. The destination must be registered in a one-touch button in advance.
• E-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and group addresses can be
stored in a one-touch button.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line FAX Board is installed, fax
numbers in addition to the above mentioned destinations can be stored in a one-touch
button.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[One-touch Buttons].
2
Select a one-touch button to store or change ➞ press
[Register/Edit].
10
If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [ ] (One-Touch
Button Number) ➞ enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button
using
(numeric keys).
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
IMPORTANT
If Language Switch in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'On', the Host Name and Folder Path of the file server destination may not be displayed
correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
10-35
If you select a one-touch button already storing a destination, proceed to step 4.
NOTE
• One-touch buttons that already have destinations stored in them are displayed with
a colored triangle ( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a one-touch button that already has destinations stored in it, the
destinations are displayed.
• If you register multiple destinations as a group address in a one-touch button, the
number of destinations registered in the group address is displayed.
3
Select [Fax], [E-mail], [I-Fax], [File], [Group], or [Network Add.
Book].
● If you select [Fax] (The optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3
Multi-Line FAX Board is installed):
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Enter a name for the recipient of the fax in accordance with steps 4 and 5 of
"Fax Numbers," on p. 10-5.
❑ Press [One-touch Button Name].
❑ Enter a name for the one-touch button ➞ press [OK].
❑ Enter the fax number of the destination in accordance with step 7 of "Fax
Numbers," on p. 10-5.
● If you select [E-mail]:
❑ Enter a name for the e-mail address in accordance with steps 3 and 4 of
"E-Mail Addresses," on p. 10-9.
❑ Press [One-touch Button Name].
❑ Enter a name for the one-touch button ➞ press [OK].
10
❑ Specify the e-mail address and Divided Data Destination setting in accordance
with steps 6 and 7 of "E-Mail Addresses," on p. 10-9.
● If you select [I-Fax]:
❑ Enter a name for the I-fax address in accordance with steps 3 and 4 of "I-Fax
Addresses," on p. 10-12.
❑ Press [One-touch Button Name].
❑ Enter a name for the one-touch button ➞ press [OK].
❑ Specify the I-fax mode, I-fax address, standard fields, send via server setting,
or destination condition in accordance with steps 6 to 11 of "I-Fax Addresses,"
on p. 10-12.
10-36
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
● If you select [File]:
❑ Enter a name for the file server address in accordance with steps 3 and 4 of
"File Server Addresses," on p. 10-17.
❑ Press [One-touch Button Name].
❑ Enter a name for the one-touch-button ➞ press [OK].
❑ Specify the protocol, host name, folder path, user, and password in accordance
with steps 6 and 7 of "File Server Addresses," on p. 10-17.
● If you select [Group]:
❑ Enter a name for the group address in accordance with steps 3 and 4 of "Group
Addresses," on p. 10-19.
❑ Press [One-touch Button Name].
❑ Press [Specifying Destinations].
❑ Select a destination to store in the group address from [Address Book], the
one-touch buttons, or [Store In Usr Inbox] ➞ press [OK].
Only destinations that are already stored in one-touch buttons can be selected
as part of a one-touch button group address.
If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [ ] (One-Touch
Button Number) ➞ enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch
button using
(numeric keys).
● If you select [Network Add. Book]:
❑ Search destinations in accordance with steps 3 to 5 of "Addresses Obtained
via a Server," on p. 10-23.
❑ Select the destination that you want to store in the one-touch button from the
search results ➞ press [Next].
To continue searching, press [Back].
You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.
E-mail addresses that meet the specified search criteria are displayed. You
can register the selected e-mail address as an I-fax address by pressing
[Register e-mail address for I-Fax]. To register e-mail addresses as I-fax
addresses, register one e-mail address at a time.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line FAX Board is
installed, fax numbers that meet the specified search criteria are also
displayed.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line FAX Board is
installed, you can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list
by pressing the Type drop-down list.
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
10-37
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
❑ Enter a name for the one-touch button ➞ press [OK].
10
NOTE
To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
❑ If necessary, edit the contents of the destination.
❑ Press [One-touch Button Name] ➞ enter a name for the one-touch button ➞
press [OK].
IMPORTANT
The information that can be obtained via the LDAP server consists of only names,
e-mail addresses, and fax numbers.
Press [OK].
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
4
10
10-38
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons
Erasing One-Touch Buttons
You can erase the destinations that you have stored in one-touch buttons.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[One-touch Buttons].
Select the one-touch button containing the destination(s) you
want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [ ] (One-Touch
Button Number) ➞ enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button
using
(numeric keys).
10
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you verify the settings first before you erase them.
NOTE
• One-touch buttons that already have destinations stored in them are displayed with
a colored triangle ( ) in the lower right corner of the key.
• If you select a one-touch button that already has destinations stored in it, the
destinations are displayed.
3
Press [Yes].
Erasing One-Touch Buttons
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
1
10-39
10
10-40
Erasing One-Touch Buttons
Storing/Editing Address Book Settings
System Manager Settings
11
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the settings that can be made by the System Manager (the person in
charge of the machine).
System Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5
E-Mail Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6
I-Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-7
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9
Memory RX Inbox Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11
Restricting the Send Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Address Book Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-17
Access Number Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-18
Restricting New Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-18
Setting Whether to Allow Sending Using the Fax Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-19
Setting to Confirm Entered Fax Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-20
Restricting the Domains to Which E-mail/I-Fax Documents Can Be Sent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-21
Allowing the Sending of PDF Documents With Expired Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-22
Setting to Always Add a Device Signature to PDF Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-23
Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Storing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-26
When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-38
Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-44
Forwarding Received Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-44
Erasing Forwarding Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-45
Printing Forwarding Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-45
LDAP Server Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
Registering an LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-46
Changing an LDAP Server Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-51
Deleting an LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-51
Registering/Editing LDAP Search Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-52
Printing LDAP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-53
11-1
System Settings Table
The following items can be stored or set in System Settings from the Additional
Functions screen.
■ System Settings
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Communications
Settings
E-mail/I-Fax Common
Settings
Maximum Data
Size for Sending
0 (Off), 1 to 99 MB; 3 MB*1
Yes
40 characters maximum; Attached
Image*1
Yes
On, Off*1
No
On, Off*1
No
Full Mode TX
Timeout
1 to 99 hours; 24 hours*1
Yes
Divided Data RX
Timeout
0 to 99 hours; 24 hours*1
Yes
Print MDN/DSN on
Receipt
On, Off*1
Yes
Always send notice
for RX errors
On*1, Off
Yes
Use Send Via
Server
On, Off*1
Yes
Allow MDN Not Via
Server
On*1, Off
Yes
Default Subject
System Manager Settings
Specify Authorized
User Reply-to
Destination
p. 11-5
E-mail Settings
Specify Authorized
User Dest. Sender
p. 11-6
I-Fax Settings
11
11-2
System Settings Table
p. 11-7
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Fax Settings*2
Send Start Speed
33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps,
7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
Yes
Receive Start
Speed
33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps,
7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
Yes
Receive Password
20 digits maximum
No
PIN Code Access
On, Off*1
Yes
Memory RX Inbox
Password
Seven digits maximum
No
Use Fax Memory
Lock*2
On, Off*1
Yes
p. 11-9
Memory RX Inbox
Settings
p. 11-11
Use I-Fax Memory
Lock
On,
Memory Lock Start
Time
Everyday, Select Days, Off*1
Yes
Memory Lock End
Time
Everyday, Select Days, Off*1
Yes
Address Book
Password
Seven digits maximum
Yes
p. 11-17
Access Number
Management
On, Off*1
Yes
p. 11-18
Fax: On, Off*1
E-mail: On, Off*1
I-Fax: On, Off*1
File: On, Off*1
Yes
p. 11-18
Allow Fax Driver TX*2 On*1, Off
Yes
p. 11-19
Confirm Entered Fax
Numbers*2
Yes
p. 11-20
Yes
p. 11-21
Off*1
Restrict the Send
Function
Restrict New
Addresses
E-mail/I-Fax Domain
Sending Restriction
System Manager Settings
Yes
11
On, Off*1
Restrict Sending to Domains: On
Register, Edit, Erase*5
Off*1
System Settings Table
11-3
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Yes
p. 11-22
Yes
p. 11-23
Receive Type*5, Validate/Invalidate,
Register, Edit*5, Erase*5, Forward w/o
Forwarding Settings
Conditions, Print List*5, E-mail
Priority*5
Yes
p. 11-25
Register LDAP
Server
No
p. 11-46
Item
Settings
Allow PDF Send with
On, Off*1
Expired Certificates*3
Always Add Device
Signature to Send
PDF*4
On:
Restrict Sending Files Other
than PDF: On, Off*1
Off*1
Register, Edit, Erase, Register/Edit
LDAP Search, Print List
*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates item that appears only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed.
*3 Indicates item that appears only if the optional Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set (standard-equipped for
the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) or the optional Digital User Signature PDF Kit is activated.
*4 Indicates item that appears only if the optional Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set (standard-equipped for
the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated.
System Manager Settings
*5 Indicates item that is not delivered as device information.
NOTE
• For instructions on setting the modes not described in this manual, refer to the other
manuals listed in "Manuals for the Machine," on p. ii.
• The System Settings screen consists of a list of individual settings. Press [▼] or [▲] to
scroll to the desired setting.
• Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set,
is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device
Information Delivery Settings mode, see Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the
Reference Guide.
11
11-4
System Settings Table
Communications Settings
This section describes the e-mail, I-fax, fax, and Memory RX Inbox settings.
E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings
You can change the e-mail and I-fax transmission settings. The following settings
are available.
■ Maximum Data Size for Sending
Sets the maximum data size for outgoing e-mail messages and I-fax documents. If an
e-mail message exceeds this data size limit, it is split up into several e-mail messages
before being sent. However, if an I-fax transmission exceeds the data size limit, it is
handled as an error, and it is not sent.
NOTE
For information on dividing data before sending it, see "Specifying Destinations Using the
New Address Tab," on p. 2-2, and "Storing New Addresses," on p. 10-5.
■ Default Subject
The subject that you enter here is used as the default subject whenever you do not enter a
subject when sending a job.
■ Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination
If you are using a login service, you can specify whether to set the e-mail address of the
login user as the reply-to destination when sending an e-mail message or I-fax document.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [E-mail/I-Fax Common
Settings].
Communications Settings
11-5
System Manager Settings
IMPORTANT
When sending an e-mail or I-fax document, you can set to divide the data before sending
it if the size of the data exceeds the maximum data size for sending.
11
2
Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
<Maximum Data Size for Sending>:
Specify the maximum data size for sending by pressing [-] or [+].
<Subject>:
Press [Subject] ➞ enter a subject ➞ press [OK].
<Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination>:
[On]: The e-mail address of the login user is set as the reply-to destination.
System Manager Settings
[Off]: The e-mail address set for the machine is set as the reply-to destination.
IMPORTANT
The maximum data size for sending must not be greater than the maximum data
size of the mail server.
NOTE
• If you enter '0' MB as the data size, there is no size limit on the data that is sent.
• If an e-mail address is entered as the reply-to destination on the Send Settings
screen when sending an e-mail message or I-fax document, the e-mail address
specified on the Send Settings screen is given priority, regardless of whether
Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination is set to 'On'.
11
E-Mail Settings
If you are using a login service, you can set whether to display the e-mail address
of the login user in the From field as the sender destination on the received e-mail.
1
11-6
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [E-mail Settings] ➞ [Specify
Authorized User Dest. Sender].
Communications Settings
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below:
[On]: The e-mail address of the authorized user is set as the sender destination
in the From field on the received e-mail message.
[Off]: The e-mail address set for the machine is set as the sender destination in
the From field on the received e-mail message.
I-Fax Settings
You can change the I-fax transmission settings. The following settings are available.
■ Full Mode TX Timeout
Sets the time that elapses before sending operations terminate (automatically) if you do
not receive a notification e-mail message (MDN) from the recipient when you send an
I-fax in the Full Mode.
If it takes longer than the set Divided Data RX Timeout time to receive all the parts of a
divided I-fax document, only the data which has been received is combined to form the
document. Data which can be combined to form complete pages is printed, and any
remaining data is erased.
IMPORTANT
• If you delete the divided data, it cannot be combined to form a document even if the
remaining divided data is received later.
• Divided data cannot be printed as a regular image unless it has been combined.
• If you select [Print When Erased] on the Divided Data RX Inbox screen for the Mail Box
function to print the data which is erased, the data will not be forwarded or stored in
memory. It will only be printed.
System Manager Settings
■ Divided Data RX Timeout
11
■ Print MDN/DSN on Receipt
Sets whether to print notification e-mail messages that inform you of the successful
delivery of I-fax jobs sent using the Full Mode.
■ Always Send Notice for RX Errors
Sets whether to inform the sender that the e-mail message or I-fax was not received
successfully.
■ Use Send Via Server
Determines whether you can select to send jobs via a server on the screen for specifying
I-fax destination settings. To be able to select 'On' or 'Off' for <Send Via Server> on the
I-fax settings screen, set <Use Send Via Server> and <Allow Not Via Server> to 'On'
beforehand.
Communications Settings
11-7
■ Allow MDN Not Via Server
Sets whether to allow the recipient's machine to send MDN (Mail Delivery Notification)
mail directly to the IP address of the sending machine without going via a mail server.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [I-Fax Settings].
2
Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
<Full Mode TX Timeout>:
System Manager Settings
Specify the full mode TX timeout time by pressing [-] or [+].
<Divided Data RX Timeout>:
Specify the divided data RX timeout time by pressing [-] or [+].
<Print MDN/DSN on Receipt>:
[On]: Notification e-mail messages (MDN/DSN) that inform you of the successful
delivery of jobs are printed.
[Off]: Notification e-mail messages (MDN/DSN) that inform you of the successful
delivery of jobs are not printed.
11
<Always send notice for RX errors>:
[On]: If an error occurs, the sender is always informed of the details of the error.
[Off]: If an error occurs, the sender is not informed of the details of the error.
<Use Send Via Server>:
[On]: Enables you to set whether to use the Send Via Server setting as a
condition to send to I-fax addresses.
[Off]: You cannot use the Send Via Server setting as a condition to send to I-fax
addresses.
11-8
Communications Settings
<Allow MDN Not Via Server>:
[On]: Allows the sending of MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail without going
via a mail server.
[Off]: Does not allow the sending of MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail without
going via a mail server.
NOTE
• If you set the divided data RX timeout time to '0', no divided data RX timeout time is
set.
• For I-fax, when <Use Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', even if you enter the
maximum data size for sending, there is no size limit on the data that is sent.
• The maximum data size for sending can be set in 1 MB increments. If the size of an
e-mail exceeds the set limit, the e-mail message is split up by page and sent out as
smaller e-mail messages, each of which is within the set limit. I-fax data that
exceeds the set limit is handled as an error, and is not sent. For more information,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
This section describes settings that the System Manager can make, including how
to set the Send Start Speed, Receive Start Speed, RX (Receive) mode, and how to
register a password. It also describes how to set, change, and erase settings for
transferring received documents, and how to enable or disable certain settings.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
■ Send/Receive Start Speed
This function enables you to change the send and receive start speeds, which is useful
when there is difficulty initiating the sending or receiving of a document.
System Manager Settings
Fax Settings
11
■ Receive Password
This function enables you to set an optional ITU-T standard password. If a subaddress is
not set in a document that was received from another party using the ITU-T standard, an
RX password check takes place. If the RX password found does not match the RX
password set with this mode, or if an RX password is not attached to the document, the
document is not received.
NOTE
ITU-T stands for International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication
Standardization Sector, which is the group that makes recommendations towards the
standardization of worldwide telecommunications.
Communications Settings
11-9
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [Fax Settings].
2
Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
<Send Start Speed>:
Press the Send Start Speed drop-down list ➞ select the desired start speed.
System Manager Settings
If your document transmission is slow in starting, this may mean that the
telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You
can select [33600 bps], [14400 bps], [9600 bps], [7200 bps], [4800 bps], or
[2400 bps].
<Receive Start Speed>:
Press the Receive Start Speed drop-down list ➞ select the desired start speed.
If your document reception is slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone
lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select
[33600 bps], [14400 bps], [9600 bps], [7200 bps], [4800 bps], or [2400 bps].
<Receive Password>:
Press [Settings] ➞ enter [Password] and [Confirm] using
, and .
11
-
(numeric keys),
Press [Space] to insert a space.
Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.
IMPORTANT
Priority is given to a subaddress password if the received document is set with a
subaddress, even if a receive password is set.
11-10
Communications Settings
NOTE
• If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you entered is not
displayed as asterisks. (See Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the
Reference Guide.)
• For instructions on setting a PIN Code, see "Using a PIN Code," on p. 7-5.
Memory RX Inbox Settings
There may be occasions when you want to store all incoming documents into
memory until you are ready to print or send them. Locking the machine to receive
and store all documents in memory is called Memory Lock. After Memory Lock is
turned 'On', the machine will enter the Memory Lock mode. Documents received
when the machine is in the Memory Lock mode are stored in memory until you
unlock the memory with a password, and print or send them.
NOTE
• You can receive I-faxes into memory.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, you
can receive faxes in addition to the I-faxes into memory.
Setting the Memory RX Inbox Password
You can set a seven digit password for the Memory RX (Receive) Inbox, and restrict
its use to only those users who know the password.
NOTE
You can enter up to seven digits for the password. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the
machine stores the password with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞
[Memory RX Inbox Password].
Press [Settings].
Communications Settings
11-11
System Manager Settings
This section explains how to define a memory lock password, receive fax/I-fax
documents in memory, and set the times for the machine to enter and leave the
Memory Lock mode.
11
3
Press [Password] ➞ enter the desired password using
(numeric keys).
4
Press [Confirm] ➞ re-enter the password for confirmation
using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
-
If you do not want to set the Memory RX Inbox with a password, press [OK]
without entering any numbers.
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
NOTE
If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you entered is not
displayed as asterisks. (See Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the
Reference Guide.)
Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory
System Manager Settings
You can set the machine to store received fax documents in memory without
printing them. This is referred to as Fax Memory Lock. You can later check the
received documents in the Memory RX Inbox, and print or send them.
11
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞
[Use Fax Memory Lock].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
IMPORTANT
If the message <Fax Memory RX is on.> does not appear, set the Fax Memory
Lock setting on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection screen of
the Mail Box function to 'On'. (See Chapter 6, "Sending and Receiving Documents
Using the Inboxes," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
11-12
Communications Settings
Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory
You can set the machine to store received I-fax documents in memory without
printing them. This is referred to as I-Fax Memory Lock. You can later check the
received documents in the Memory RX Inbox, and print or send them.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞
[Use I-Fax Memory Lock].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
IMPORTANT
If the message <I-Fax Memory RX is on.> does not appear, set the I-Fax Memory
Lock setting on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection screen of
the Mail Box function to 'On'. (See Chapter 6, "Sending and Receiving Documents
Using the Inboxes," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
Memory Lock Start Time Settings
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞
[Memory Lock Start Time].
System Manager Settings
You can set Memory Lock to start automatically at a specified time.
11
Communications Settings
11-13
2
Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].
● If you select [Everyday]:
❑ Select a number ([1] to [5]) ➞ enter the start time using
-
(numeric keys)
➞ press [OK].
You can store up to five different start times.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples: 7:05 a.m.
➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
System Manager Settings
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
entry ➞ enter another four digit number.
(Clear) to clear your
● If you select [Select Days]:
❑ Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) ➞ select a number ([1] to [5]).
11
❑ Enter the start time using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
You can store up to five different start times for each day of the week.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples: 7:05 a.m.
➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
entry ➞ enter another four digit number.
11-14
Communications Settings
(Clear) to clear your
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
If you select [Off], Memory Lock will not automatically turn on at a specified
time. You can manually turn Memory Lock On or Off by pressing [On] or [Off]
under <Fax Memory Lock> or <I-Fax Memory Lock> on the Memory RX Inbox
screen from the Inbox Selection screen of the Mail Box function. (See Chapter
6, "Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes," in the Copying and
Mail Box Guide.)
NOTE
You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for
Memory Lock End Time, and vice versa.
Memory Lock End Time Settings
You can set Memory Lock to end automatically at a specified time.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [Memory RX Inbox Settings] ➞
[Memory Lock End Time].
System Manager Settings
1
Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].
11
● If you select [Everyday]:
❑ Select a number ([1] to [5]) ➞ enter the end time using
-
(numeric keys) ➞
press [OK].
You can store up to five different end times.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples: 7:05 a.m.
➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
Communications Settings
11-15
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
entry ➞ enter another four digit number.
(Clear) to clear your
● If you select [Select Days]:
❑ Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) ➞ select a number ([1] to [5]).
❑ Enter the end time using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
You can store up to five different end times for each day of the week.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples: 7:05 a.m.
➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
entry ➞ enter another four digit number.
(Clear) to clear your
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
System Manager Settings
If you select [Off], Memory Lock will not automatically turn off at a specified
time. You can manually turn Memory Lock On or Off by pressing [On] or [Off]
under <Fax Memory Lock> or <I-Fax Memory Lock> on the Memory RX Inbox
screen from the Inbox Selection screen of the Mail Box function. (See Chapter
6, "Sending and Receiving Documents Using the Inboxes," in the Copying and
Mail Box Guide.)
NOTE
You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for
Memory Lock End Time, and vice versa.
11
11-16
Communications Settings
Restricting the Send Function
You can set the Address Book with a password and set access numbers to restrict
its use.
Address Book Password
You can set a password for the Address Book. If a password is set, restrictions can
be placed on the registering, editing, and erasing of destinations.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Restrict the Send Function] ➞ [Address Book Password].
Press [Settings].
3
Press [Password] ➞ enter the desired password using
(numeric keys).
4
Press [Confirm] ➞ re-enter the password for confirmation
using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK] ➞ [OK].
-
11
If you do not want to set the Address Book with a password, press [OK] without
entering any numbers.
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
NOTE
If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you entered is not
displayed as asterisks. (See Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the
Reference Guide.)
Restricting the Send Function
System Manager Settings
NOTE
You can enter up to seven digits for the Address Book password. If you enter fewer than
seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
11-17
Access Number Management
You can set an access number for an address in the Address Book to restrict
access to that address, and this restricts other users who do not know the access
number from viewing and utilizing these special addresses.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Restrict the Send Function] ➞ [Access Number
Management].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
If Access Number Management is set to 'On', the Recall mode cannot be used.
Restricting New Addresses
System Manager Settings
This mode enables you to restrict users from adding new destinations (fax, e-mail,
I-fax, or file) to send to. The four types of new destinations can be restricted
independently. The destination types you set to 'On' are grayed out so that they
cannot be selected in [New Address] on the Send Basic Features screen. Setting
this mode with an address book password enables only the following to be specified
as destinations for the destination types in Restrict New Addresses set to 'On'.
• Destinations
stored in the Address Book
• Destinations obtained via LDAP servers
• User Inboxes
• Destinations obtained by pressing one-touch buttons
• Destinations obtained by pressing favorites buttons
• E-mail addresses obtained by pressing [Send to Myself]
11
IMPORTANT
• The following destinations cannot be edited if a destination type in Restrict New
Addresses is set to 'On':
- Destinations obtained via LDAP servers
- Destinations obtained by pressing favorites buttons
- E-mail addresses obtained by pressing [Send to Myself]
- Destinations of a job that is canceled because of transmission errors, or a job that is
waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode
• If a destination type in Restrict New Addresses is set to 'On', all stored settings in the
Recall mode are erased, regardless of the destination type.
11-18
Restricting the Send Function
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Manager Settings]
➞ [Restrict the Send Function] ➞ [Restrict New Addresses].
2
Select [Fax], [E-mail], [I-Fax], or [File].
3
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Setting Whether to Allow Sending Using the Fax Driver
You can set whether to disable the sending of faxes using the fax driver.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Restrict the Send Function] ➞ [Allow Fax Driver TX].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]: Faxes can be sent using the fax driver.
[Off]: Faxes cannot be sent using the fax driver.
11
Restricting the Send Function
11-19
Setting to Confirm Entered Fax Numbers
This mode displays a confirmation screen when a user enters a fax number, to
prevent misdialing.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Restrict the Send Function] ➞ [Confirm Entered Fax Number].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]: Displays a confirmation screen after a fax number is entered.
System Manager Settings
[Off]: Does not display a confirmation screen after a fax number is entered.
11
11-20
Restricting the Send Function
Restricting the Domains to Which E-mail/I-Fax Documents
Can Be Sent
You can restrict the domains to which documents can be sent via e-mail or I-fax. If
you restrict the domains for sending, you can send documents only to destinations
which belong the specified domain.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Restrict the Send Function] ➞ [E-mail/I-Fax Domain Sending
Restriction].
Select [On] for <Restrict Sending to Domains>.
If you select [Off], proceed to step 4.
3
Specify the domains to which you want to allow e-mail or I-fax
documents to be sent.
● If you want to register a domain:
System Manager Settings
1
11
❑ Press [Register].
❑ Press [Domain Name] ➞ enter a domain name ➞ press [OK].
❑ Select [Permit] or [Reject] for <Send to Subdomain> ➞ press [OK].
<Send to Subdomain>:
[Permit]: Allow sending to subdomains of the domain.
[Reject]: Do not allow sending to subdomains of the domain.
NOTE
You can register up to three domains.
Restricting the Send Function
11-21
● If you want to edit a domain:
❑ Select the desired registered domain ➞ press [Edit].
❑ Press [Domain Name] ➞ edit the domain name ➞ press [OK].
❑ Select [Permit] or [Reject] for <Send to Subdomain> ➞ press [OK].
<Send to Subdomain>:
[Permit]: Allow sending to subdomains of the domain.
[Reject]: Do not allow sending to subdomains of the domain.
● If you want to erase a domain:
❑ Select the domain that you want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
❑ Press [Yes].
4
Press [OK].
Allowing the Sending of PDF Documents With Expired
Certificates
System Manager Settings
This mode enables you to set whether to allow the sending of PDF documents
created with expired certificates.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) or the optional Digital
User Signature PDF Kit is activated.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Restrict the Send Function] ➞ [Allow PDF Send with Expired
Certificates].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
11
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]: Allows the sending of PDF documents created with expired certificates.
[Off]: Does not allow the sending of PDF documents created with expired
certificates.
11-22
Restricting the Send Function
Setting to Always Add a Device Signature to PDF
Documents
This mode enables you to set whether to always add a device signature to sent
PDF documents.
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set
(standard-equipped for the Color imageRUNNER C3480i/C3080i) is activated.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Restrict the Send Function] ➞ [Always Add Device Signature
to Send PDF].
Select [On] or [Off].
Details of each item are shown below.
[On]: Always adds a device signature to sent PDF documents.
[Off]: Does not add a device signature to sent PDF documents.
● If you select [On]:
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Restrict Sending Files Other than PDF> ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
1
11
<Restrict Sending Files Other than PDF>
[On]: Only PDF files can be sent.
[Off]: Files other than PDFs can also be sent.
NOTE
If <Restrict Sending Files Other than PDF> is set to 'On', and sending a file in a
format other than PDF is registered in the Favorites Button, the file cannot be sent.
Restricting the Send Function
11-23
● If you select [Off]:
System Manager Settings
❑ Press [OK].
11
11-24
Restricting the Send Function
Forwarding Settings
You can set the machine to store received fax/I-fax documents in Confidential Fax
Inboxes, or forward them to other machines or file servers. If a received document
matches the forwarding conditions, it is forwarded to the specified destination. You
can also set a specified time during which received fax/I-fax documents which
match the forwarding conditions are forwarded. This section explains the conditions
for forwarding, and how to register, change, and erase forwarding destinations.
When the machine receives I-fax/fax documents, they are processed as shown
below:
Sender
*1
Default settings
or normal operating
Divided
I-fax
Documents
Fax
Documents
Without Settings
Conditional operation
Reception
Password
Does Not Match/
No Subaddress/
Password Set
With Settings
Matches
Divided Data
RX Inbox
Subaddress/
Password Matches*2
Divided Data Combined
Forwarding
*5
w/o Conditions
Store
Memory Lock
Setting
Handle Documents
*8
with Forwarding Errors
Prints
ON
*6
Prints
*6
Memory RX Inbox
Confirming Details,
Erase, Print,
Send of Received documents
Forwarded to
specified
destination
*9
11
Confirming Details, Erase,
Print of received documents
Print Queue
Print Queue
*11
Confidential Fax Inbox
Destination(s)
Stored
Destinations
Not Stored
OFF
Forwarding
Error
OFF/
Does Not Meet
the Conditions
*4
*3
ON
Forwarding
Settings
Reception
Rejected
Reception
Rejected
RX Password Verification
Confirming Details, Erase, Print
before erasing documents
System Manager Settings
I-fax
Documents
Prints
*10
*7
Store in
the Status Screen
Confirming Details,
Resend,
Change Destinations,
Erase of documents
with transmission error
*10
Forwarding
Done Notice
Forwarding Settings
11-25
*1 Received fax documents can be forwarded if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed.
*2 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document match the information registered in Forwarding
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the documents are forwarded to their forwarding
destinations regardless of the reception password setting.
*3 If Store/Print Received Doc. in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set
to 'On', forwarded documents are either printed or stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
*4 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document do not match the information registered in
Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the document is rejected.
*5 If Forward w/o Conditions is set up in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen),
all received documents that do not match the specified forwarding conditions are forwarded to the destination
selected for Forward w/o Conditions.
*6 If documents are received while paper is jammed, or paper or toner has run out, they are printed after the paper jam
is cleared, paper is loaded, or toner is added.
*7 If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the status of any job with a forwarding error will be saved on the System Monitor
screen.
*8 Documents with forwarding errors are handled as follows, depending on the settings for Handle Documents with
Forwarding Errors in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen):
• [Always Print]: All documents with forwarding errors are printed.
• [Store/Print]: Documents with forwarding errors are stored in the Memory RX Inbox when Memory Lock is turned
'On'. If Memory Lock is turned 'Off', the documents are printed.
*9 If the Forwarding Done Notice is specified in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen), a notification e-mail is sent when the forwarding job completes successfully.
*10 If the Forwarding Done Notice is specified in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen), a notification e-mail is sent when the forwarding job completes successfully. However, if <Notice Only for
Errors> is also specified, a notification e-mail is sent only when the document fails to be forwarded.
System Manager Settings
*11 The received fax/I-fax documents can be stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox by specifying the Confidential Fax
Inbox as forwarding destination. Only the received documents that match the specified forwarding conditions can be
stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox.
NOTE
The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 150.
Storing Forwarding Settings
1
11
11-26
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
Forwarding Settings
3
Press [Register].
To recall the forwarding settings of a received document that
you have stored, press [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before].
You can recall the last three forwarding settings.
IMPORTANT
• The forwarding settings are stored in memory if you press [OK] on the Register
screen or the Edit screen.
• Identical forwarding settings are stored only once in memory.
NOTE
• The three most recent forwarding settings that were stored in memory are not
erased even when the power is turned OFF.
• The forwarding settings of a received document that were not stored in memory are
not displayed even when you press the recall keys.
4
Press [Condition Name].
Forwarding Settings
11-27
System Manager Settings
2
11
5
Enter a name for the forwarding condition ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
If [Send Doc. Name] is not specified, the first 24 characters of the condition name
are also stored as the document's name. However, you can change the document's
name at any time.
6
System Manager Settings
7
Press [Forwarding Conditions].
Press the Receive Type drop-down list ➞ select [Fax] or
[I-Fax].
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is not
installed, this step is not necessary. If the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board
is installed, you can select the line ([Fax: Line 1], [Fax: Line 2], or [Fax: Line
Shared]).
11
11-28
Forwarding Settings
Set the forwarding conditions.
● If [I-Fax] is selected as the receive type:
❑ Press the To, From, or Subject drop-down list.
The available forwarding conditions are:
[disregarded]:
Disregards the To, From, or Subject information as
forwarding conditions.
[equals]:
Forwards the document if the From or Subject information
matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]:
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]:
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]:
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]:
Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject
information does not contain the characters entered.
[equals] is not an option for <To>.
❑ Select the forwarding condition ➞ press [Set.].
❑ Enter the forwarding criterion ➞ press [OK].
❑ If necessary, repeat this step for the other drop-down list(s).
If you want to change the criteria for the forwarding conditions without
changing the forwarding condition for the To, From, and Subject drop-down
lists, press [Set.] next to the criteria you want to change ➞ enter the new
criteria ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
If [disregarded] is selected as the forwarding condition, you cannot enter any
criteria.
Forwarding Settings
System Manager Settings
8
11
11-29
● If [Fax] is selected as the receive type (The optional Super G3 FAX
Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed):
❑ Select the Fax Number, Subaddress, or Password drop-down list.
The available forwarding conditions are:
[disregarded]:
Disregards the Fax Number information as a forwarding
condition.
[does not exist]:
The Subaddress or Password information does not exist
for the received document.
[equals]:
Forwards the document if the Fax Number, Subaddress,
or Password information matches all of the characters
entered.
[differs from]:
Forwards the document if the Fax Number information
differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]:
Forwards the document if the Fax Number information
begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]:
Forwards the document if the Fax Number information
ends with the characters entered.
[contains]:
Forwards the document if the Fax Number information
contains the characters entered.
System Manager Settings
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number information
does not contain the characters entered.
[does not exist] is not an option for <Fax Number>.
[does not exist] and [equals] are the only forwarding conditions that can be
selected for <Subaddress> and <Password>.
❑ Select the forwarding condition ➞ press [Set.] ➞ enter the forwarding criterion
using
-
(numeric keys).
Details of each item are shown below.
11
11-30
[ ] [ ]:
Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]:
Press to delete the last number entered.
[Space]:
Press to insert a space between numbers.
[+]:
Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country
code, and before the fax number.
Forwarding Settings
❑ If necessary, repeat this step for the other drop-down list(s).
If you want to change the criteria for the forwarding conditions without
changing the forwarding condition for the Fax Number, Subaddress, and
Password drop-down lists, press [Set.] next to the criteria you want to change
➞ enter the new criteria ➞ press [OK].
If you select password as the forwarding conditions, press [Set.] ➞
[Password] ➞ enter a password using - (numeric keys), , and
[Confirm] ➞ re-enter the password for confirmation ➞ press [OK].
. Press
You can enter up to 20 characters for the Fax Number, Subaddress, or
Password forwarding criteria. The characters that can be entered are:
• Fax Number: 0 to 9, [Space], [+]
• Subaddress: 0 to 9,
,
, [Space]
• Password:
,
, [Space]
0 to 9,
NOTE
• If [disregarded] or [does not exist] is selected as the forwarding condition, you
cannot enter any criteria.
• You cannot set the following combinations of conditions.
Subaddress
Password
[disregarded]
[does not exist]
[equals]
Other than [disregarded]
[equals]
[equals]
Other than [disregarded]
[does not exist]
[equals]
Other than [disregarded]
[equals]
[does not exist]
• If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password is not displayed as
asterisks on Password screen, and you do not have to re-enter the password for
confirmation. (See Chapter 6, "System Manager Settings," in the Reference
Guide.)
9
10
11
Press [Done].
Press [Forwarding Destination] ➞ select [Address Book] or
[Conf. Fax Inbox].
Details of each item are shown below.
[Address Book]:
System Manager Settings
Fax Number
Select to forward the received document to another machine
(relay function).
[Conf. Fax Inbox]: Select to store the received document in a Confidential Fax
Inbox.
Forwarding Settings
11-31
NOTE
If the selected destination is a group address which contains a User Inbox as a
destination, the document is not sent and stored in that User Inbox.
● If you select [Address Book]:
❑ Select the forwarding destination ➞ press [OK].
If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to
select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access
Number] ➞ enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book," on p.
2-24.)
Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for
each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the
displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by
pressing the Type drop-down list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1
to 10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses
stored in the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress books to limit the
display of destinations.
You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time. To forward to
multiple destinations, select a group address.
System Manager Settings
You can specify e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and
group addresses as forwarding destinations.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed, you can also specify fax numbers in addition to the above
mentioned destinations as forwarding destinations.
NOTE
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations
in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses," on p. 10-5.)
• [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in
Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-18.)
• If you select a fax number as the forwarding destination, the subaddress and
password registered in the Address Book are ignored.
11
11-32
Forwarding Settings
● If you select [Conf. Fax Inbox]:
❑ Select the desired Confidential Fax Inbox ➞ press [OK].
You cannot select multiple Confidential Fax Inboxes.
If you want to send a link to a Confidential Fax Inbox via e-mail, press [URL
Send].
A message <Confidential Fax Inbox Incoming Notice> is inserted into the
body of the e-mail message stating the link to the Confidential Fax Inbox.
IMPORTANT
Additional documents cannot be stored in a Confidential Fax Inbox under the
following conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the remaining
capacity of the hard disk.)
- When a total of 1,500 documents or images have been stored in any or all of the
inboxes
- When a total of 6,000 pages of documents or images have been stored in any or
all of the inboxes
11
System Manager Settings
NOTE
To be able to send a link via e-mail to the Confidential Fax Inbox in which the
document is stored, it is necessary to register an e-mail address in the Confidential
Fax Inbox beforehand. For instructions on storing an e-mail address in the
machine, see Chapter 8, "Customizing Settings," in the Copying and Mail Box
Guide.
Press [Send Doc. Name].
If you selected a fax number or Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding
destination, proceed to step 13.
12
Enter the name of the document ➞ press [OK].
The condition name is automatically entered as the document's name by default.
However, you can change this name.
13
Press [Forwarding Time].
14
Select [Everyday], [Period Specification], or [Off].
IMPORTANT
You cannot set the same time for both the start time and end time.
Forwarding Settings
11-33
11
● If you select [Everyday]:
❑ Enter the start time and end time using
-
(numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
NOTE
If the end time is set earlier than the start time, the received documents will stop
being forwarded at the specified end time on the following day.
For example:
Start time: 22:00, end time: 21:00
The end time refers to 21:00 on the following day.
● If you select [Period Specification]:
❑ Press [Add].
❑ Press the Start Time drop-down list ➞ select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat])
at which to start forwarding.
❑ Press [ ] next to the Start Time drop-down list ➞ enter the time at which to
start forwarding.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
If you press [All Day], the start and end times are automatically set to '00:00'.
The day for the end time is automatically set to the day following the day for
the start time.
System Manager Settings
❑ Set the end time in the same way as the start time ➞ press [OK].
You can store up to seven different combinations of start and end times.
To change previously stored settings, select the setting that you want to
change ➞ press [Edit].
To erase previously stored settings, select the setting that you want to erase ➞
press [Erase].
NOTE
If the end time is set earlier than the start time and both the start time and the end
time are set for the same day of the week, the received documents will stop being
forwarded at the specified end time on the specified day of the following week.
For example:
Start time: Monday 22:00, end time: Monday 21:00
The end time refers to Monday 21:00 of the following week.
11
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
11-34
Forwarding Settings
15
Press the Store/Print Received Doc. drop-down list ➞ select
[On] or [Off].
If you selected a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, proceed to
step 19.
<Store/Print Received Doc.>:
[On]: The received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
[Off]: The received document is not stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
16
Press [Forwarding Done Notice] ➞ select the destination
where the forwarding done notice is to be sent ➞ press [OK].
If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a
destination that is stored with an access, press [Access Number] ➞ enter the
access number. (See "Using the Address Book," on p. 2-24.)
Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each
letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range
of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to
10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in
the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress books to limit the display of
destinations.
You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.
Forwarding Settings
11-35
System Manager Settings
NOTE
• If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and Memory Lock mode is set to 'On',
the received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Storing Received
I-Fax Documents in Memory," on p. 11-13, "Storing Received Fax Documents in
Memory," on p. 11-12, and Chapter 6, "Receiving Documents.")
• If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and Memory Lock mode is set to 'Off',
the received document is printed. (See "Storing Received I-Fax Documents in
Memory," on p. 11-13, "Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory," on p. 11-12,
and Chapter 6, "Receiving Documents.")
11
NOTE
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• To be able to select a destination for the forwarding done notice, it is necessary to
register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New
Addresses," on p. 10-5.)
• [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in
Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-18.)
17
Select whether to check [Notice Only for Errors].
If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent only when an error occurs,
press [Notice Only for Errors].
If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent every time a received
document is forwarded, do not press [Notice Only for Errors].
18
Press [File Format] ➞ select the file format of the document
you want to forward ➞ [OK].
This part of the procedure is not necessary if any one of the following is true:
System Manager Settings
• A fax number is specified as the forwarding destination
• An I-fax address is specified as the forwarding destination
• A Confidential Fax Inbox is specified as the forwarding destination
If [Fax] is selected as receive type, you can select from the following file formats:
[TIFF]: Sends the file in the TIFF format.
[PDF]: Sends the file in the PDF format. You can also specify [OCR (Text
Searchable)] and/or [Add Digital Signatures].
11
If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of
which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights. If
you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not
press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.
If [I-Fax] is selected as receive type, you can select from the following file
formats:
[TIFF/PDF Auto Select]:
Sends the file in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or
PDF (Grayscale/Color) format. [Divide into Pages] is
not available if this key is selected.
[TIFF/JPEG Auto Select]: Sends images in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or
JPEG (Grayscale/Color) format. [Divide into Pages] is
available if this key is selected.
11-36
Forwarding Settings
[PDF]:
Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color
mode. You can also specify [Trace & Smooth],
[Compact], [OCR (Text Searchable)], and /or [Add
Digital Signatures].
If you want to separate multiple images and send them
as separate files, each of which consists of only one
page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights. If
you want to send multiple images as a single file
without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages],
and the key remains unlit.
NOTE
• To view a JPEG file, software that supports the JPEG format (such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer for Windows) is required.
• To view a TIFF file, software that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for
Windows) is required.
• To view a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/
Adobe Acrobat) is required.
• For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary," on p. 14-25.
Press [OK] ➞ [OK].
IMPORTANT
You cannot set multiple forwarding conditions that contain the same subaddress
setting.
20
If necessary, press the E-mail Priority drop-down list ➞ select
a priority for your forwarded e-mail messages.
This setting is necessary only if the forwarding destination is an e-mail address.
System Manager Settings
19
11
Forwarding Settings
11-37
When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the
Forwarding Conditions
You can store the forwarding destinations of a received document if the forwarding
settings of the received document are not registered, or if the received document
does not match all of the forwarding conditions that you have specified.
IMPORTANT
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed and the
subaddress and password specified from the sending machine do not match the
registered forwarding conditions, the documents are not forwarded to forwarding
destinations registered in Forward w/o Conditions in Forwarding Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), and the faxed documents are not
received.
System Manager Settings
NOTE
Forwarding destinations can be stored one at a time, according to the receive type of the
received document.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings] ➞ [Forward w/o Conditions].
2
Press the Receive Type drop-down list ➞ select [Fax] or
[I-Fax].
11
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is not
installed, this step is not necessary. If the optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board
is installed, you can select the line ([Fax: Line 1] or [Fax: Line 2]).
11-38
Forwarding Settings
Press [Forwarding Destination] ➞ select [Address Book] or
[Conf. Fax Inbox].
Details of each item are shown below.
[Address Book]:
Select to forward the received document to another machine
(relay function).
[Conf. Fax Inbox]: Select to store the received document in a Confidential Fax
Inbox.
NOTE
If the selected destination is a group address which contains a User Inbox as a
destination, the document is not sent and stored in that User Inbox.
● If you select [Address Book]:
❑ Select the forwarding destination ➞ press [OK].
If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to
select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access
Number] ➞ enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book," on p.
2-24.)
Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for
each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the
displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.
You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.
System Manager Settings
3
You can specify e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and
group addresses as forwarding destinations.
11
You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by
pressing the Type drop-down list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1
to 10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses
stored in the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress books to limit the
display of destinations.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed, you can also specify fax numbers in addition to the above
mentioned destinations as forwarding destinations.
Forwarding Settings
11-39
NOTE
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations
in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses," on p. 10-5.)
• [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in
Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-18.)
• If you select a fax number as the forwarding destination, the subaddress and
password registered in the Address Book are ignored.
● If you select [Conf. Fax Inbox]:
❑ Select the desired Confidential Fax Inbox ➞ press [OK].
You cannot select multiple Confidential Fax Inboxes.
If you want to send a link to a Confidential Fax Inbox via e-mail, press [URL
Send].
A message <Confidential Fax Inbox Incoming Notice> is inserted into the
body of the e-mail message stating the link to the Confidential Fax Inbox.
System Manager Settings
IMPORTANT
Additional documents cannot be stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox under the
following conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the remaining
capacity of the hard disk.)
- When a total of 1,500 documents or images have been stored in any or all of the
inboxes
- When a total of 6,000 pages of documents or images have been stored in any or
all of the inboxes
NOTE
To be able to send a link via e-mail to the Confidential Fax Inbox in which the
document is stored, it is necessary to register an e-mail address in the Confidential
Fax Inbox beforehand. For instructions on storing an e-mail address in the
machine, see Chapter 8, "Customizing Settings," in the Copying and Mail Box
Guide.
11
4
Press [Send Doc. Name].
If you selected a fax number or Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding
destination, proceed to step 6.
5
11-40
Enter the name of the document ➞ press [OK].
Forwarding Settings
6
Press the Store/Print Received Doc. drop-down list ➞ select
[On] or [Off].
If you select a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, proceed to
step 11.
<Store/Print Received Doc>:
[On]: The received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
[Off]: The received document is not stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
NOTE
• If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and Memory Lock mode is set to 'On',
the received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Storing Received
I-Fax Documents in Memory," on p. 11-13, "Storing Received Fax Documents in
Memory," on p. 11-12, and Chapter 6, "Receiving Documents.")
• If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and Memory Lock mode is set to 'Off',
the received document is printed. (See "Storing Received I-Fax Documents in
Memory," on p. 11-13, "Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory," on p. 11-12,
and Chapter 6, "Receiving Documents.")
8
Press [Forwarding Done Notice].
Select the destination where the forwarding done notice is to
be sent ➞ press [OK].
If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a
destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] ➞
enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book," on p. 2-24.)
Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each
letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range
of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.
Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to
10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in
the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress books to limit the display of
destinations.
You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.
Forwarding Settings
11-41
System Manager Settings
7
11
NOTE
• To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
• To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination ➞
press [Details].
• To be able to select a destination for the forwarding done notice, it is necessary to
register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New
Addresses," on p. 10-5.)
• [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in
Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management," on p. 11-18.)
9
Select whether to check [Notice Only for Errors].
If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent only when an error occurs,
press [Notice Only for Errors].
If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent every time a received
document is forwarded, do not press [Notice Only for Errors].
Press [File Format] ➞ select the file format of the document
you want to forward ➞ press [OK].
System Manager Settings
10
This part of the procedure is not necessary if any one of the following is true:
11
• An I-fax address is specified as the forwarding destination
• A fax number is specified as the forwarding destination
• A Confidential Fax Inbox is specified as the forwarding destination
11-42
Forwarding Settings
If [Fax] is selected as the receive type, you can select from the following file
formats:
[TIFF]: Sends the file in the TIFF format.
[PDF]: Sends the file in the PDF format. You can also specify [OCR (Text
Searchable)] and/or [Add Digital Signatures].
If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of
which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights. If
you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not
press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.
If [I-Fax] is selected as the receive type, you can select from the following file
formats:
[TIFF/PDF Auto Select]:
Sends the file in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or
PDF (Grayscale/Color) format. [Divide into Pages] is
not available if this key is selected.
[PDF]:
Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color
mode. You can also specify [Trace & Smooth],
[Compact], [OCR (Text Searchable)], and /or [Add
Digital Signatures].
If you want to separate multiple images and send them
as separate files, each of which consists of only one
page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.
If you want to send multiple images as a single file
without dividing them, do not press [Divide into
Pages], and the key remains unlit.
NOTE
• To view a JPEG file, software that supports the JPEG format (such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer for Windows) is required.
• To view a TIFF file, software that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for
Windows) is required.
• To view a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/
Adobe Acrobat) is required.
• For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary," on p. 14-25.
11
Press [OK].
Forwarding Settings
11-43
System Manager Settings
[TIFF/JPEG Auto Select]: Sends images in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or
JPEG (Grayscale/Color) format. [Divide into Pages] is
available if this key is selected.
11
Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings
You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored.
1
2
3
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
Select the forwarding setting whose details you want to check
➞ press [Edit].
Check or change the forwarding settings ➞ press [OK].
NOTE
For instructions on changing forwarding settings, see "Storing Forwarding
Settings," on p. 11-26.
Forwarding Received Documents
System Manager Settings
You can set whether received documents are forwarded.
11
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
2
Select the desired forwarding setting ➞ press [Validate/
Invalidate].
When you select the desired forwarding setting and press [Validate/Invalidate],
the "On" or "Off" status displayed on the left side of the Condition Name is
switched. (i.e., "On" becomes "Off," and "Off" becomes "On.")
<On>: The received document is forwarded to the specified destination if it
matches the forwarding conditions.
<Off>: The received document is not forwarded to the specified destination even
if it matches the forwarding conditions.
To cancel forwarding, press [Validate/Invalidate] again.
11-44
Forwarding Settings
Erasing Forwarding Settings
You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
2
Select the forwarding setting that you want to erase ➞ press
[Erase].
3
Press [Yes].
Printing Forwarding Settings
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Forwarding Settings].
Press [Print List].
NOTE
The forwarding settings can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR paper
(plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in
Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the
Reference Guide.)
3
Press [Yes].
Forwarding Settings
11-45
System Manager Settings
You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings.
11
LDAP Server Settings
If the information for an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server is
registered in the machine, you can search for e-mail addresses and fax numbers
via the LDAP server. E-mail addresses and fax numbers obtained via the server
can be specified as destinations or stored in the Address Book.
NOTE
• The following types of LDAP servers can be used with this machine:
- Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory
- Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later
- Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later
For more information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• You can register up to five LDAP servers.
Registering an LDAP Server
System Manager Settings
You have to specify the relevant information for the LDAP server, such as the server
name and address.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Register LDAP Server] ➞ [Register].
2
Specify each setting ➞ press [Next].
11
[Server Name]:
Enter a server name ➞ press [OK].
11-46
LDAP Server Settings
[Server Address]:
Press [Server Address] ➞ enter the server's address ➞ press [OK].
[Location to Start Search]:
Press [Location to Start Search] ➞ enter the location to start searching ➞ press
[OK].
If the server's LDAP version is 3, then you do not have to specify [Location to
Start Search]. (If the LDAP version is 3, the machine automatically retrieves
settings from the server, and sets the location to start searching.) If the server's
LDAP version is 2, you have to specify [Location to Start Search].
Enter the location to start searching according to the type of LDAP server you are
using, or as described below.
• If you are using Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory:
[Off]: SSL is not used.
System Manager Settings
Add "DC=" to each dot separated series of characters in the Active Directory
domain name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
Example: If <team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp> is the domain name in Active
Directory:
DC=team1, DC=salesdept, DC=canon, DC=co, DC=jp
• If you are using Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later:
Add the corresponding object class "o=", "ou=", or "c=" to each dot-separated
series of characters that configure the distinguished name, and separate each
series of characters by a comma.
Example: If <TEAM1.SALESDEPT.CANON> is the distinguished name in NDS:
ou=team1, ou=salesdept, o=canon
• If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
Enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the node on the directory tree, such as
"ou=team1", "ou=salesdept", "o=canon", or "c=jp".
<Port Number>:
11
<Use SSL>:
[On]: SSL is used. Using SSL encodes the content of the communication, and
ensures greater security.
Press [Port Number] ➞ enter a port number using
-
(numeric keys).
<Max. No. of Addresses to Search>:
Press [Max. No. of Addresses to Search] ➞ enter the maximum number of
addresses to search using
(numeric keys).
<Search Timeout>:
Press [Search Timeout] ➞ enter the timeout time, in seconds, using
(numeric keys) ➞ press [Next].
-
LDAP Server Settings
11-47
IMPORTANT
If <Login Information> is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server and
Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that looks up the host name from the IP address)
is not supported, enter a host name instead of an IP address.
3
Select [Do not use], [Use], or [Use (security auth.)] for <Login
Information>.
IMPORTANT
• [Use (security auth.)] next to <Login Information> can be selected only if the LDAP
server is running on Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory.
• If you entered an IP address in step 2, and Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that
looks up the host name from the IP address) is not supported, select either [Do not
use] or [Use].
• If <Login Information> is set to 'Use (security auth.)', and if Date & Time Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is different from the time
settings on the LDAP server, the machine may not be able to connect to the LDAP
server.
● If [Do not use] is selected:
System Manager Settings
❑ Select the Server LDAP version and character code ➞ press [OK].
11
Select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server's
environment.
11-48
LDAP Server Settings
● If [Use] is selected:
❑ Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
[User]:
[Password]:
Press [Password] ➞ enter a password ➞ press [OK].
Press [Confirm] ➞ re-enter the password for confirmation ➞ press [OK] ➞
[OK].
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks
(********) on the Register screen.
<Display authentication dialog when searching>:
[On]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog
box is displayed even if a password is not required.
[Off]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog
box is not displayed.
<Server LDAP version and character code>:
Select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server's
environment.
LDAP Server Settings
11-49
System Manager Settings
Press [User] ➞ enter a user name ➞ press [OK].
Enter the user name according to the type of LDAP server you are using.
• If you are using Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory:
Press [User] ➞ enter "Windows domain name/Windows user name".
Example: If <team1> is the Windows domain name, and <user1> is the
Windows user name:
team1/user1
• If you are using Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later:
Press [User] ➞ add the corresponding object class "o=", "ou=", or "c=" to
each dot-separated series of characters that configure the distinguished
name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
Example: If <user1.TEAM1.SALESDEPT.CANON> is the distinguished name
in NDS:
cn=user1, ou=team1, ou=salesdept, o=canon
• If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
Press [User] ➞ enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the user, such as
"cn=admin", "ou=team1", or "ou=salesdept".
11
● If [Use (security auth.)] is selected:
❑ Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
[User]:
Press [User] ➞ enter a user name ➞ press [OK].
Example: If <user1> is the Windows user name:
user1
[Password]:
Press [Password] ➞ enter a password ➞ press [OK].
Re-enter the password for confirmation ➞ press [OK].
After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks
(********) on the Register screen.
System Manager Settings
[Domain Name]:
Press [Domain Name] ➞ enter a domain name ➞ press [OK].
Enter the directory tree name of the Active Directory, such as
<team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp>.
<Display authentication dialog when searching>:
[On]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog
box is displayed even if a password is not required.
[Off]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog
box is not displayed.
11
NOTE
If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you enter is not
displayed as asterisks on the Password screen. (See Chapter 6, "System Manager
Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
11-50
LDAP Server Settings
Changing an LDAP Server Setting
You can change the settings for a stored LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol) server.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Register LDAP Server].
2
Select the LDAP server whose settings you want to change ➞
press [Edit].
3
Change the necessary settings ➞ press [Next].
4
Select [Do not use], [Use], or [Use (security auth.)] for <Login
Information> ➞ change the settings for the selected mode ➞
press [OK].
System Manager Settings
Deleting an LDAP Server
You can delete a stored LDAP server.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Register LDAP Server].
2
Select the LDAP server that you want to erase ➞ press
[Erase].
3
11
Press [Yes].
LDAP Server Settings
11-51
Registering/Editing LDAP Search Attributes
You can register or edit the LDAP search attributes.
1
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Register LDAP Server] ➞ [Register/Edit LDAP Search].
Register/edit the LDAP search attributes.
System Manager Settings
● To register a search attribute:
❑ Press [Not Reg'd 1] or [Not Reg'd 2] ➞ [Register/Edit].
❑ Press [Display Name] ➞ enter the name to display ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press [Attribute Name] ➞ enter the attribute name ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press [OK].
● To edit a search attribute:
❑ Select the search attribute that you want to edit ➞ press [Register/Edit].
11
NOTE
You can only edit the two search attributes displayed as 'Not Registered' by default.
You cannot edit the name, e-mail, fax, organization, and organization unit
attributes.
❑ Press [Display Name] ➞ enter the name to display ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press [Attribute Name] ➞ enter the attribute name ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press [OK].
● To erase a search category:
❑ Select the search category that you want to erase ➞ press [Erase].
11-52
LDAP Server Settings
NOTE
You can only edit the two search attributes displayed as 'Not Registered' by default.
You cannot edit the Name, E-mail, Fax, Organization, and OrganizationUnit
attributes.
❑ Press [Yes].
Printing LDAP Server Settings
You can print the LDAP server settings.
NOTE
For more information on the Registered LDAP Server List, see "Registered LDAP Server
List," on p. 14-16.
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Register LDAP Server].
Press [Print List].
NOTE
The Registered LDAP Server List can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or
LTRR paper (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose
settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing
Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
3
Press [Yes].
System Manager Settings
1
11
LDAP Server Settings
11-53
System Manager Settings
11
11-54
LDAP Server Settings
Printing Communication
Reports
12
CHAPTER
This chapter explains the method of setting the contents of a communications report and
printing lists.
Report Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Specifying Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Send TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
Fax TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7
Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8
Fax RX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-9
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-10
Printing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Address Book List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-11
User's Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-12
12-1
Report Settings Table
The following items can be stored or set in Report Settings from the Additional
Functions screen.
■ Settings
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Yes
p. 12-4
Yes
p. 12-5
Yes
p. 12-7
Yes
p. 12-8
Send
TX Report
For Error Only*1, On, Off
Report with TX Image: On*1, Off
Report with Color TX Image: On,
Off*1
Printing Communication Reports
Activity Report
Auto Print
On*1, Off
Daily Activity Report
Time
On, Off*1
Time Settings: 00:00 to 23:59
Send/Receive Separate (Not Selected*1)
Fax*2
Fax TX Report
For Error Only*1, On, Off
Report with TX Image: On*1, Off
Fax Activity Report
12
Auto Print
On*1, Off
Daily Activity Report
Time
On, Off*1
Time Settings: 00:00 to 23:59
Send/Receive Separate (Not Selected*1)
Fax RX Report
For Error Only, On, Off*1
Yes
p. 12-9
Confidential Fax Inbox
RX Report
On*1, Off
Yes
p. 12-10
*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates item that appears only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed.
12-2
Report Settings Table
■ Print List
Item
Settings
Delivered
Applicable
Page
Address Book List
Address Book 1 to 10, One-touch Buttons
Print List: Print
No
p. 12-11
User's Data List
Print List
No
p. 12-12
Print List
No
p. 12-12
Send
Fax*2
User's Data List
*2 Indicates item that appears only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed.
Printing Communication Reports
NOTE
• For instructions on setting the modes not described in this manual, refer to the other
manuals listed in "Manuals for the Machine," on p. ii.
• Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set,
is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device
Information Delivery Settings mode, see Chapter 6, "System Manger Settings," in the
Reference Guide.
12
Report Settings Table
12-3
Specifying Report Settings
You can specify how various reports are printed.
NOTE
The reports can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR paper (plain, recycled, or
color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility
For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'.
(See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
Send TX Report
Printing Communication Reports
The Send TX Report enables you to check whether documents were sent correctly
to their intended destinations. A Send TX Report can be printed automatically after
the documents are sent. You can also set the machine to print a Send TX Report
only when a transmission error occurs, and adjust the Send TX Report setting to
print the first part of the document as part of the report to remind you of the
document's contents.
NOTE
• The results of e-mail, I-fax, file server, and User Inbox transmissions are printed.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line FAX Board is installed, the
results of fax transmissions are included in the Send TX Report. In addition, a Fax TX
Report is printed with the Send TX Report, if Fax TX Report in Fax under <Settings> in
Report Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'For Error Only' or 'On'.
(See "Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report," on p. 14-5.)
• For an example of a Send TX Report, see "Send TX Report/Send Error TX Report," on p.
14-3.
12
1
12-4
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings] ➞ [Send]
under <Settings> ➞ [TX Report].
Specifying Report Settings
2
Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off].
● If you select [For Error Only] or [On]:
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Report with TX Image>.
<Report with TX Image>:
[On]: Part of the sent document is printed on the Send TX Report.
[Off]: The contents of the sent document are not printed on the Send TX
Report.
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Report with Color TX Image> ➞ press [OK].
<Report with Color TX Image>:
[On]: Color documents are printed on the Send TX Report.
[Off]: Color documents are not printed on the Send TX Report.
NOTE
Even if <Report with TX Image> is set to 'On', the original will not be printed in the
following cases:
- If the first page of the original is color, and <Report with Color TX Image> is set to
'Off'
- If the document was sent using the Encrypted PDF mode
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
The Send TX Report is not printed.
Activity Report
The Activity Report is a printed log that shows the results of send and receive jobs.
The Activity Report can be printed at a specified time or it can be printed
automatically when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 100.
The send and receive logs can also be printed separately.
An Activity Report can be printed manually from the System Monitor screen. (See
"Printing the Send Job Status/Log," on p. 8-8, and "Printing the Receive Job Log,"
on p. 8-13.)
Specifying Report Settings
12-5
Printing Communication Reports
[Report with Color TX Image] can only be set if [Report with TX Image] is set to
'On'.
12
Printing Communication Reports
NOTE
• If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'Off', [Activity Report] is not displayed.
• If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is changed
from 'Off' to 'On', the following settings are switched to 'Off' automatically:
- Auto Print
- Daily Activity Report Time
• E-mail, I-fax, file server, and User Inbox transmission logs are printed.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, a list of
fax transmission logs in addition to the above mentioned transmission logs are printed.
• For an example of an Activity Report, see "Activity Report," on p. 14-11.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings] ➞ [Send]
under <Settings> ➞ [Activity Report].
2
Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
<Auto Print>:
[On]: The Activity Report is automatically printed when the number of send and
receive transmissions reaches 100.
[Off]: The Activity Report is not automatically printed when the number of send
and receive transmissions reaches 100.
12
<Daily Activity Report Time>:
[On]: The Daily Activity Report is printed at the specified time.
[Off]: The Daily Activity Report Time setting is not specified.
12-6
Specifying Report Settings
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples: 7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press
➞ enter another four digit number.
(Clear) to clear your entry
If the number of send and receive transmissions exceeds 100 before the
specified time, an Activity Report of the most recent 100 transmissions is printed.
<Send /Receive Separate>:
To print the send and receive logs separately, press [Send/Receive Separate] to
select it.
If it is not necessary to print the send and receive logs separately, do not press
[Send/Receive Separate].
The Fax TX Report enables you to check whether documents were sent correctly to
their intended destinations. A Fax TX Report can be printed automatically after the
documents are sent. You can also set the machine to print a Fax TX Report only
when a transmission error occurs, and adjust the Fax TX Report setting to print the
first part of the document as part of the report to remind you of the document's
contents.
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
• For an example of a Fax TX Report, see "Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report," on p.
14-5.
• If TX Report in Send under <Settings> in Report Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'For Error Only' or 'On', a Send TX Report is printed with the Fax TX
Report.
• If a sequential broadcast transmission is performed when Fax TX Report is set to 'On', a
Fax Multi TX Report is printed.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings] ➞ [Fax]
under <Settings> ➞ [Fax TX Report].
Specifying Report Settings
12-7
Printing Communication Reports
Fax TX Report
12
2
Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off].
● If you select [For Error Only] or [On]:
❑ Select [On] or [Off] for <Report with TX Image> ➞ press [OK].
<Report with TX Image>:
[On]: Part of the sent document is printed on the Fax TX Report.
[Off]: The contents of the sent document are not printed on the Fax TX Report.
● If you select [Off]:
❑ Press [OK].
The Fax TX Report is not printed.
Fax Activity Report
The Fax Activity Report is a printed log that shows the results of send and receive
jobs. The Fax Activity Report can be printed at a specified time or it can be printed
automatically when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 40. The
send and receive logs can also be printed separately.
Printing Communication Reports
A copy of the Fax Activity Report can be printed at any time from the System
Monitor screen. (See "Printing the Fax Activity Report," on p. 8-11.)
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
• If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'Off', [Fax Activity Report] is not displayed.
• If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is changed
from 'Off' to 'On', the following settings are switched to 'Off' automatically:
- Auto Print
- Daily Activity Report Time
• For an example of a Fax Activity Report, see "Fax Activity Report," on p. 14-13.
12
1
12-8
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings] ➞ [Fax]
under <Settings> ➞ [Fax Activity Report].
Specifying Report Settings
2
Specify each setting ➞ press [OK].
<Auto Print>:
[On]: The Activity Report is automatically printed when the number of send and
receive transmissions reaches 40.
[Off]: The Activity Report is not automatically printed when the number of send
and receive transmissions reaches 40.
<Daily Activity Report Time>:
[On]: The Fax Activity Report is printed at the specified time.
[Off]: The Daily Activity Report Time setting is not specified.
Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples: 7:05 a.m.
➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
If you make a mistake when entering the time, press to clear your entry ➞ enter
another four digit number.
<Send/Receive Separate>:
To print the send and receive logs separately, press [Send/Receive Separate] to
select it.
If it is not necessary to print the send and receive logs separately, do not press
[Send/Receive Separate].
Fax RX Report
The Fax RX Report enables you to check whether documents were sent correctly
from the sender's machine and received successfully by this machine. A Fax RX
Report can be printed automatically after documents are received, and you can
also set the machine to print a Fax RX Report only when a reception error occurs.
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
• For an example of a Fax RX Report, see "Fax RX Report," on p. 14-8.
Specifying Report Settings
12-9
Printing Communication Reports
If the number of send and receive transmissions exceeds 40 before the specified
time, a Fax Activity Report of the most recent 40 transmissions is printed.
12
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings] ➞ [Fax]
under <Settings> ➞ [Fax RX Report].
2
Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
Details of each item are shown below.
[For Error Only]: Prints a Fax RX Report only when a reception error occurs.
[On]:
Prints a Fax RX Report each time a document is received.
[Off]:
Does not print a Fax RX Report.
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report
The Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report enables you to check the reception of
documents in Confidential Fax Inboxes.
Printing Communication Reports
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
• For an example of a Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report, see "Confidential Fax Inbox RX
Report," on p. 14-9.
1
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings] ➞ [Fax]
under <Settings> ➞ [Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report].
2
Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].
12
12-10
Specifying Report Settings
Printing Lists
You can print the contents of the Address Book or a list of Send settings that have
been specified from the Additional Functions screen.
NOTE
The lists can be printed only if 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR paper (plain, recycled, or
color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility
For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'.
(See Chapter 4, "Customizing Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
Address Book List
IMPORTANT
Even if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', all of the destinations in the selected
subaddress book (including those stored with Access numbers) are printed in the
Address Book list.
NOTE
For an example of an Address Book List, see "Address Book List," on p. 14-17.
1
2
3
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings] ➞ [Send]
under <Print List> ➞ [Address Book List].
Select one of the subaddress books 1 to 10 or [One-touch
Buttons] ➞ press [Print List].
Press [Yes].
Printing Lists
12-11
Printing Communication Reports
You can print the contents of the Address Book (subaddress books 1 to 10 or
one-touch buttons). This is useful for checking the details of the destinations.
12
User's Data List
You can print a list of Send or Fax settings that have been specified from the
Additional Functions screen. This is useful for checking the details of the settings.
NOTE
• The following two types of User's Data Lists are available:
- Send: Prints all information related to the Send function stored from the Additional
Functions screen.
- Fax:
Prints all information related to the Fax function stored from the Additional
Functions screen.
• For an example of the User's Data List, see "User's Data List," on p. 14-19.
Printing the User's Data List for send
1
Printing Communication Reports
2
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings] ➞ [Send]
under <Print List> ➞ [User's Data List].
Press [Yes].
Printing the User's Data List for fax
1
2
12
12-12
Printing Lists
Press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Report Settings] ➞ [Fax]
under <Print List> ➞ [User's Data List].
Press [Yes].
Troubleshooting
13
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the procedures for taking corrective action in the event that trouble
occurs. The end of the chapter shows you how to respond to error messages and contains a
list of frequently asked questions and answers.
When Problems Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Sending Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
Receiving Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Other Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-7
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Self-Diagnostic Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-9
List of Error Codes without Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14
Questions & Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
13-1
When Problems Occur
Sending Documents
Troubleshooting
Canceling transmissions.
Q
How do you cancel a transmission while a document is being scanned?
A
Press
(Stop) on the control panel, or press [Cancel] on the touch panel
display.
Q
How do you cancel a transmission after the document has been scanned?
A
If you are sending the document by any other sending method besides fax,
press [System Monitor] ➞ [Send] ➞ [Status] ➞ select the document that you
want to cancel ➞ press [Cancel] ➞ [Yes]. However, documents that are being
sent may not be canceled even if you press [Cancel]. (See "Using the System
Monitor Screen," on p. 1-37.)
A
If you are sending the document by fax, press [System Monitor] ➞ [Fax] ➞
[Send Job Status] ➞ select the document that you want to cancel ➞ press
[Cancel] ➞ [Yes]. However, documents that are being sent may not be canceled
even if you press [Cancel]. (See "Using the System Monitor Screen," on p.
1-37.)
Q
Are you sending a fax document using the Direct Sending mode?
A
Press
(Stop) on the control panel, or press [Cancel] on the touch panel
display.
13
13-2
When Problems Occur
Document cannot be sent.
Q
Is the destination setting correct?
A
Check the destination setting of the recipient.
Q
Is the destination stored in the Address Book correct?
A
Check the destination in the Address Book. (See "Editing Address Details," on
p. 10-30.)
Q
Has trouble occurred in the remote machine?
A
Check to ensure that the remote machine can receive documents. If it cannot,
check to see whether the machine is turned OFF, is out of recording paper, or
has insufficient available memory.
Q
If you are sending an e-mail message or I-fax, are the SMTP Server and DNS
Server settings correct?
A
Check the SMTP Server and DNS Server settings.
Q
If you are sending to a file server, are the User and Password settings correct?
A
Check the User and Password settings, and send the document again.
Q
If you are sending to a file server, are the shared folder settings correct?
A
Check the shared folder settings. (See Chapter 5, "Using a NetBIOS Network,"
in the Network Guide.)
Q
Is the telephone line type set correctly?
A
Check the type of telephone line that has been set. (See "Selecting the Type of
Telephone Line," on p. 1-14.)
Q
If you are sending with a subaddress setting, did you enter the correct
subaddress and password for the destination?
Troubleshooting
Document cannot be sent (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax
Board is installed).
A
Check the subaddress and password settings.
13
Q
Is the line connected to a private branch exchange switchboard or terminal
adapter?
A
Set Check Dial Tone Before Sending in TX Settings under <Fax Settings> in
Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See
"Checking the Dial Tone before Sending," on p. 9-50.)
When Problems Occur
13-3
Memory is full.
Q
Are unwanted documents stored in memory?
A
Check the TX Document and RX Document memory, and erase unnecessary
documents and documents with errors from memory. (See "Erasing Received
Documents," on p. 6-8, and Chapter 2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Functions,"
in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
The document does not print clearly on the remote machine.
Q
Is the platen glass clean?
A
Use your machine to make a copy of the document, and check it for streaks. If
streaks appear, clean the platen glass. (See Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance,"
in the Reference Guide.)
The density of the documents sent to a remote machine is too light.
Q
Is the Exposure setting set towards ' ' (Light) and the Original Type setting set
to 'Photo'?
A
Change the Exposure setting to ' ' (Dark) and the Original Type setting to 'Text'.
Try sending the document again. (See "Scan Exposure and Original Type
Settings," on p. 3-13.)
Troubleshooting
The machine will not transmit using a subaddress (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or
Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed).
Q
Are the subaddress and password of the remote machine specified correctly?
A
Check to see if the machine has a subaddress function.
A
Check with the remote party to see if the specified subaddress and the RX
password at both this machine and the remote machine are the same.
Q
Has trouble occurred in the remote machine?
A
Check to make sure that the remote machine can receive documents. If it
cannot, check to see whether the recipient's machine has been turned OFF, is
out of recording paper, or has insufficient available memory.
Q
Are the subaddress and password for the destination stored in the Address
Book correct?
A
Check the subaddress and password settings for the destination stored in the
Address Book.
13
13-4
When Problems Occur
The remote machine is slow to switch over to the receiving mode, and errors always occur (if
the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed).
Q
Is a pause inserted in the fax number?
A
If you are sending to a machine that is slow in switching over to fax receiving,
insert a pause after the destination's fax number.
Receiving Documents
The machine does not receive documents.
Q
Does the machine have sufficient memory?
A
Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to
increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents,"
on p. 6-8, and Chapter 2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Functions," in the
Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
Q
Are network settings specified?
A
Documents cannot be received if the appropriate network settings are not
specified. Confirm this with your System Manager.
Q
Is the RX password set in your machine?
A
If Receive Password is set in Fax Settings in Communications Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), documents can be
received only from senders that use the correct password. Confirm this with
your System Manager. (See "Fax Settings," on p. 11-9.)
Troubleshooting
The machine does not receive documents (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3
Multi-Line Fax Board is installed).
13
When Problems Occur
13-5
Documents cannot be received in Confidential Fax Inboxes.
Q
Are the forwarding conditions in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen) set correctly?
A
Check the Forwarding Conditions, and inform the sender of those settings. (See
"Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-25.)
Q
Is Forwarding Settings set to 'On' using [Validate/Invalidate]?
A
Forwarding Settings must be set to 'On' to be effective. (See "Forwarding
Settings," on p. 11-25.)
Q
Is there sufficient available memory?
A
Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to
increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents,"
on p. 6-8, and Chapter 2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Functions," in the
Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
A
Erase unnecessary documents from the Confidential Fax Inboxes. (See
"Erasing Received Documents," on p. 6-8.)
Troubleshooting
Documents cannot be received in memory.
Q
Is there sufficient available memory?
A
Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to
increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents,"
on p. 6-8, and Chapter 2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Functions," in the
Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
A
Erase unwanted documents from the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Erasing
Received Documents," on p. 6-8.)
The quality of printed originals is uneven.
13
13-6
Q
Is the platen glass of the sender's machine clean?
A
Make a few copies using your machine. If the copies are not streaked, the
problem is in the sending party's machine. Contact the sender and ask them to
send the document again.
When Problems Occur
Other Situations
Transmissions are slow.
Q
Are documents being sent at a high resolution?
A
It is recommended that you send documents containing text only in a lower
resolution.
Fax transmissions are slow (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax
Board is installed).
Q
Is the ECM TX or ECM RX set to 'On'?
A
Set ECM TX and ECM RX to 'Off'. (See "ECM Transmission," on p. 9-46, and
"ECM Reception," on p. 9-51.)
Q
Was the original type set to 'Text/Photo' when sending the document?
A
Select 'Text' from the Original Type drop-down list if the original does not contain
any photos. (See "Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings," on p. 3-13).
Cannot use fax information services (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3
Multi-Line Fax Board is installed).
If your machine is connected to a rotary pulse line, is your machine set for tone
dialing?
A
Set the machine for tone dialing to use fax information services. (See "Fax
Information Services," on p. 7-8.)
Q
Did you receive an instruction from the sender to set the machine to receive?
A
Press [RX Start]. (See "Fax Information Services," on p. 7-8.)
Troubleshooting
Q
13
When Problems Occur
13-7
Documents cannot be sent overseas (error code #18) (if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or
Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed).
Q
Is a pause inserted in the fax number?
A
Insert a pause after the country code, or after the fax number of the recipient,
and then dial the number again. (See "Specifying a Fax Number," on p. 2-2.)
A
Change the Long Distance setting on the Option screen if you are sending
documents to destinations stored in the Address Book. To access the Long
Distance setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [Address Book Settings] ➞
[Register Address] ➞ [Register New Address] ➞ [Fax] ➞ [Option]. (See "Editing
Address Details," on p. 10-30.)
Calls are not connected, or an incorrect number is dialed.
Did you hear the dial tone before entering the fax number?
A
Make sure that you hear the dial tone before entering the fax number. If you
enter the fax number before hearing the dial tone, the call may not be
connected, or an incorrect number may be dialed.
Troubleshooting
Q
13
13-8
When Problems Occur
Error Messages
This section explains the various messages that appear on the touch panel display,
along with possible causes and remedies.
For explanations of messages that are not listed here, see the Reference Guide
and Network Guide.
Self-Diagnostic Display
Perform the necessary procedures according to the displayed self-diagnostic error
message.
Self-diagnostic error messages appear on the touch panel display at the following
times:
• When
scanning or printing cannot be performed because of an operational error
• When you need to make a decision or take some action during scanning or
printing
• When you need to make a decision or take some action while browsing the
network
The following is a list of self-diagnostic error messages, along with their possible
causes and remedies.
Cause
You cannot browse the network. There is a lack of TCP/IP resources because
documents have just been continuously sent or are being continuously sent via
FTP or Windows (SMB).
Remedy
Wait for a while, and try browsing again.
Set the IP Address.
Troubleshooting
Out of resources. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.
13
Cause
This machine is not set with an IP address.
Remedy
Specify the IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), turn the machine's
main power OFF, and then back ON.
Error Messages
13-9
No response from the server. Check the settings.
Cause
The specified server settings are incorrect, or the server is not turned ON.
Alternatively, the machine's TCP/IP resources may be low.
Remedy
Wait for a while, and then try browsing again. If there is still no response from
the server, try selecting another server.
NetWare is in use. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.
Cause
You cannot browse the network because NetWare is printing through a PServer
or NDS PServer.
Remedy
Wait until printing is complete, and then try browsing again.
There are too many subdirectories.
Cause
You have exceeded the maximum number of subdirectory levels allowed.
Remedy
Specify a different destination because the directory level that you are trying to
access cannot be specified.
Troubleshooting
No response.
13
Cause 1
The server was not running when you tried to send.
Remedy
Make sure that the server is ON, and check the destination.
Cause 2
The network connection was lost when you tried to send. (Either you could not
connect to the destination, or the connection was lost before the job could be
completed.)
Remedy
Check the status of the network.
Cause 3
You tried to send via NetWare, but the Tree name was not entered.
Remedy
Enter the Tree name.
Cause 4
A TCP/IP error occurred when you tried to send an e-mail message or I-fax.
Remedy
Check that the network cables and connectors are properly connected.
Check the TCP/IP.
13-10
Cause
The machine's TCP/IP connection is not operating.
Remedy
Check the IP Address Settings (IP Address, DHCP, RARP, BOOTP) in TCP/IP
Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Error Messages
Cannot find the selected server. Check the settings.
Cause 1
The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot be determined.
Remedy 1 Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using
a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Remedy 2 Check whether the DNS server's DNS settings are correct.
Cause 2
If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server,
the machine will not be able to determine the host name.
Remedy
Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using
a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings.
Cause
The machine cannot connect to the specified IP address/port.
Remedy 1 Check the Gateway Address setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings
in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
(See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Remedy 2 Check the Server Address and Port Number in Register LDAP Server in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Registering an LDAP
Server," on p. 11-46.)
Remedy 4 If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server,
check whether UDP (User Datagram Protocol) packages are blocked by the
filter.
Troubleshooting
Remedy 3 Check whether the LDAP server is operating normally.
13
Error Messages
13-11
Check the user name and password or check settings.
Cause 1
When setting Login Information for the LDAP server to 'Use' or 'Use (security
auth.)', the user name or password is incorrect.
Remedy
Check the User Name and Password settings when <Login Information> in
Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) is set to 'Use' or 'Use (security auth.)'. (See "Registering an LDAP
Server," on p. 11-46.)
Cause 2
When setting Login Information for the LDAP server to 'Use (security auth.)', the
domain name is incorrect.
Remedy
Check the Domain Name setting when <Login Information> in Register LDAP
Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use
(security auth.)'. (See "Registering an LDAP Server," on p. 11-46.)
Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings.
Cause
The search could not be completed within the time specified under <Search
Timeout>.
Remedy
Increase the time setting for Search Timeout in Register LDAP Server in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Registering an
LDAP Server," on p. 11-46.)
The number of search results has exceeded limits. Change search conditions and try again.
Cause
The number of addresses that meet the search criteria exceeds the specified
maximum number of addresses to search.
Troubleshooting
Remedy 1 Narrow down the search criteria, and then search again.
Remedy 2 Increase the maximum number of addresses to search. (See "Registering an
LDAP Server," on p. 11-46.)
13
13-12
Error Messages
Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server.
Cause 1
"\" is used in the search criterion.
Remedy
Remove "\" from the search criterion, and then search again.
Cause 2
The combination of characters used in the search criterion does not constitute
an acceptable search criterion.
• There is an unequal number of "(" and ")".
• "*" is not placed within "( )".
Remedy
Make sure that the characters for the search criterion are combined properly,
and then search again.
Cause 3
If <Server LDAP version and character code> is set to 'ver.2 (JIS)', characters
other than ASCII Code (0x20-0x7E) are being used.
Remedy
Omit characters that cannot be used, and then search again.
Cannot start searching because the version setting for the server is incorrect. Check the
settings.
Although 'ver. 3' is set as the server LDAP version number in Register LDAP
Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the LDAP
server is running on version 2.
Remedy
Set Server LDAP version and character code in Register LDAP Server in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'ver. 2'. (See
"Registering an LDAP Server," on p. 11-46.)
Troubleshooting
Cause
13
Error Messages
13-13
List of Error Codes without Messages
If an error occurs while a document is being sent or received, an error code is
displayed on the job log in the System Monitor screen, and is included in various
reports. Check what the error code is, and then take the required steps to solve the
problem. (See "Report and List Samples," on p. 14-2, and Chapter 8, "Checking/
Changing the Send/Receive Status.")
NOTE
If a send job is canceled, <STOP> is printed in the Results column on the Send report.
# 001
Cause 1
Different sized originals were scanned without setting the Different Size
Originals mode.
Remedy
Set the Different Size Originals mode, and then try scanning again.
Cause 2
Different sized originals were scanned in the 2-Sided Original without setting
the Different Size Originals mode.
Remedy
Set the Different Size Originals mode, and then try scanning again.
# 003
Cause
Communications that take longer than the preset time (64 minutes) caused the
error.
Remedy 1 Reduce the resolution or divide the document into two or more parts, and then
try sending the document again. (See "Resolution," on p. 3-12.)
Troubleshooting
Remedy 2 When receiving a document, ask the remote party to either reduce the
resolution at which the document is scanned, or divide the document into two or
more parts before sending it.
# 005
13
13-14
Cause 1
The recipient did not answer within 35 seconds.
Remedy
Confirm that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and then try again.
Cause 2
The receiving machine is not a G3 fax.
Remedy
Check the type of machine that the recipient has.
Error Messages
# 009
Cause 1
There is no paper.
Remedy
Load paper. (See Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance," in the Reference Guide.)
Cause 2
The paper drawer is not correctly inserted into the machine.
Remedy
Insert the paper drawer properly. (See Chapter 7, "Routine Maintenance," in the
Reference Guide.)
# 011
Cause
The document that you are sending is not placed correctly.
Remedy
Place the document properly into the feeder or on the platen glass, and try
sending again.
# 012
Cause
The document could not be sent because the receiving fax machine was out of
paper.
Remedy
Ask the recipient to load paper into their fax machine.
Cause 1
The recipient's machine did not respond when your machine redialed.
Remedy
Confirm that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and then try again.
Cause 2
The documents could not be sent because the recipient's machine was
performing another task.
Remedy
Confirm that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and then try again.
Cause 3
The settings on your machine do not match the settings on the recipient's
machine.
Remedy
Check that the settings on your machine match those on the recipient's
machine, and that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and try
again.
Error Messages
Troubleshooting
# 018
13
13-15
# 022
Cause 1
Forwarding could not be performed because all of the addresses stored in the
specified group destination have been deleted, or a User Inbox is specified as
the group destination.
Remedy
Re-enter group destination, and try sending again.
Cause 2
When transmitting to a destination stored in the Address Book, transmission
could not be performed because the specified destination stored in the Address
Book was deleted while the documents were waiting to be sent.
Remedy
Re-enter the destination in the Address Book, and try sending again.
Cause 3
Transmission via fax driver is not allowed.
Remedy
Allow Fax Driver TX in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off'. Set Allow Fax Driver TX to 'On'.
(See, "Setting Whether to Allow Sending Using the Fax Driver," on p. 11-19.)
Troubleshooting
#037
Cause 1
The document could not be received because there was insufficient memory
available.
Remedy
Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to
increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents,"
on p. 6-8, and Chapter 2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Functions," in the
Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
Cause 2
Data that contains more than 1,000 pages is received.
Remedy
This machine can print or store up to 999 pages of data in memory, but will
delete any data that exceeds this limit. Ask the sender to resend the remaining
pages.
# 080
13
13-16
Cause
A subaddress is not set in the recipient's machine.
Remedy
Try sending the document without a subaddress, or request that the recipient
set the same subaddress as the sender's subaddress.
Error Messages
# 081
Cause
A password is not set in the recipient's machine.
Remedy
Try sending the document without a password, or request that the recipient set
the same password as the sender's password.
# 102
Cause
The subaddress and/or password do not match.
Remedy
Check the subaddress and/or password of the recipient's machine, make sure
that the subaddress and password you are sending with the document matches
the recipient's, and then try again.
# 107
Cause
The document could not be sent because there was insufficient memory
available.
Remedy 1 Resend the document at a lower resolution.
Remedy 2 Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors to make more
memory available. (See "Erasing Received Documents," on p. 6-8, and Chapter
2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Functions," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
Remedy 3 If this problem occurs frequently, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
# 701
Cause 1
The specified Department ID does not exist, or the password has changed.
Remedy
Enter the correct Department ID or password using
the control panel, and then try sending again.
Cause 2
The Department ID or password was changed during the job.
Remedy
Try performing the job again with the new Department ID and password. If you
do not know the password, contact your System Manager.
Cause 3
<Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> in Dept. ID Management in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off'.
Remedy
Set <Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> in Dept. ID Management in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. (See Chapter 6,
"System Manager Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
(numeric keys) on
Error Messages
13-17
Troubleshooting
-
13
# 702
Cause
The document could not be sent because the memory is full.
Remedy 1 Wait a few moments, and then try again after the other send jobs complete.
Remedy 2 Do not send the document to too many recipients at the same time. Send the
document to a smaller number of recipients.
# 703
Cause
The memory for the image data is full.
Remedy 1 Wait a few moments, and then try again after the other send jobs are complete.
Remedy 2 Erase documents stored in inboxes. If the machine still does not operate
normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON. (See Chapter 1, "Before
You Start Using This Machine," in the Reference Guide.)
# 704
Cause
An error occurred while reading address information from the Address Book.
Remedy
Check the address settings. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn
the main power OFF, and then back ON. (See Chapter 1, "Before You Start
Using This Machine," in the Reference Guide.)
Troubleshooting
# 705
13
13-18
Cause
The send operation was interrupted because the size of the image data is larger
than the Maximum Data Size for Sending set in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings
in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen).
Remedy
Change the Maximum Data Size for Sending setting in E-mail/I-Fax Common
Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). Select a lower resolution, or if you are using I-fax, decrease
the number of pages containing images that you are sending each time, so that
you do not exceed the Maximum Data Size for Sending limit. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax
Common Settings," on p. 11-5.) Depending on the destination conditions, it may
be possible to divide the data.
Error Messages
# 706
Cause
The Address Book is being imported or exported from the Remote UI, or it is
being used by another sending component.
Remedy
Wait until the Address Book Import/Export function from the Remote UI or the
other sending component is complete, and then try sending again.
# 711
Cause
The inbox memory is full.
Remedy
Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See "Erasing Received
Documents," on p. 6-8, and Chapter 2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Functions,"
in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
# 712
Cause
The maximum number of documents is already stored in the inbox.
Remedy
Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See "Erasing Received
Documents," on p. 6-8, and Chapter 2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Functions,"
in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
# 713
Cause
The document in the inbox was deleted before its link was sent via e-mail.
Remedy
Store the necessary document in the inbox again, and then try to send the link
via e-mail.
Cause
The server is not functioning. The network is down (the server is unable to
connect to the network or was disconnected).
Remedy
Check the recipient's address. Check that the network is up.
Troubleshooting
# 751
13
Error Messages
13-19
# 752
Cause 1
The server is not functioning. The network is down.
Remedy
Check that the SMTP server is operating properly. Check the network status.
Cause 2
The SMTP server name for e-mail or I-fax is not correct. The domain name or
e-mail address may not be set.
Remedy
Check the SMTP Server name, domain name, and E-mail Address in E-mail/
I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
# 753
Cause
A TCP/IP error occurred while sending an e-mail message. (Socket, Select
error, etc.)
Remedy
Check the network cables and connectors. If the machine still does not operate
normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON. (See Chapter 1, "Before
You Start Using This Machine," in the Reference Guide.)
# 754
The server is not functioning or the network is down. The destination setting is
not correct.
Remedy
Check the server and network. Check the destination's address settings.
Troubleshooting
Cause
13
13-20
Error Messages
# 755
Cause 1
You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not functioning correctly.
Remedy
Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the
Network Guide.)
Cause 2
The IP address is not set.
Remedy
Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the
Network Guide.)
Cause 3
When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the
machine by the DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP server.
Remedy
Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the
Network Guide.)
# 756
Cause
NetWare in NetWare Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off'.
Remedy
Turn NetWare 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Using a NetWare Network (Windows)," in
the Network Guide.)
# 761
A PDF with a digital signature could not be sent because a digital certificate or
key pair registered in the machine is corrupt or could not be accessed.
Remedy 1 If you are sending a PDF with a user signature, confirm that the user certificate
is not corrupt. If the user certificate is corrupt, re-install it. (See Chapter 3,
"Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Remedy 2 If you are sending a PDF with a device signature, confirm that the device
certificate is not corrupt. If the device certificate is corrupt, generate it again.
(See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Error Messages
13-21
Troubleshooting
Cause
13
# 766
Cause
The certificate used to send a PDF with a digital signature has expired.
Remedy 1 Update the certificate, or use a certificate which has not expired.
Remedy 2 Set the date and time of the machine to the correct date and time. (See, "Setting
the Current Date and Time," on p. 1-14.)
# 770
Cause
Data could not be sent with WebDAV, because the WebDAV server or proxy
server does not support SSL communications.
Remedy 1 Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
Remedy 2 Check the proxy server if you are communicating via a proxy server.
Troubleshooting
# 801
Cause 1
A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the SMTP
server to send an e-mail message or send/receive an I-fax.
Remedy
Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.
Cause 2
The SMTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is
not correct. An error occurred on the server side during transmission to a file
server.
Remedy
Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.
Check the destination setting. Check the status and setting of the file server.
Cause 3
You are sending a file to a destination to which you have no write permission.
Remedy
Check the destination setting.
Cause 4
When the machine tried to send a file to the server, a file with the same name
already exists on the FTP server and that file cannot be overwritten.
Remedy
Change the setting on the file server to enable the file to be overwritten, or
contact the server administrator.
Cause 5
When the machine tried to send a file to the server, either the folder name is
incorrectly specified or the password is incorrect.
Remedy
Check the destination setting.
13
13-22
Error Messages
# 802
Cause
The name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax settings in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect.
The DNS server name in DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect.
Connection to the DNS server failed.
Remedy
Check the name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in Network
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Check the DNS server name in DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in
Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
(See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
Check that the DNS server is functioning normally.
# 803
Cause
The connection was interrupted due to reasons on the recipient's side before all
of the pages could be sent.
Remedy
Try sending again.
# 804
Unable to match the specified directory name when sending data to a file
server.
Remedy
Check the destination.
Cause 2
You have no permission to access the folder.
Remedy
Change the setting on the server to enable access to the folder, or contact the
server administrator.
Cause 1
An incorrect user name or password was specified for the sending of a file to a
file server.
Troubleshooting
Cause 1
Remedy
Change the user name or password.
13
Cause 2
An incorrect destination was specified for the sending of an e-mail message or
I-fax.
Remedy
Check the e-mail or I-fax address.
# 806
Error Messages
13-23
# 810
Cause 1
A POP (Post Office Protocol) server connection error occurred while receiving
an I-fax.
Remedy
Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/
IP Network," in the Network Guide.) Confirm that the POP server is functioning
normally. Check the network status.
Cause 2
The POP server returned an error during the connection.
Remedy
Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/
IP Network," in the Network Guide.) Confirm that the POP server is functioning
normally. Check the network status.
Cause 3
A timeout error occurred on the server while connecting to the POP server.
Remedy
Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/
IP Network," in the Network Guide.) Confirm that the POP server is functioning
normally. Check the network status.
# 815
You cannot log on to the file server because the machine is printing a document
sent to that server. Simultaneous connections are not possible.
Remedy
Wait for a few moments before trying to send the data again, or change the
NetWare server to which you are sending your documents. Alternatively, stop
the PServer.
Troubleshooting
Cause
# 818
13
# 819
13-24
Cause
The received data is not in a printable file format.
Remedy
Ask the sender to change the file format and resend the data.
Cause
You have received data that cannot be processed (MIME information is
incorrect).
Remedy
Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.
Error Messages
# 820
Cause
You have received data that cannot be processed (BASE 64 or uuencode is
incorrect).
Remedy
Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.
# 821
Cause
You have received data that cannot be processed (TIFF analysis error).
Remedy
Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.
# 822
Cause
You have received data that cannot be processed (image data cannot be
decoded).
Remedy
Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.
# 827
Cause
You have received data that cannot be processed (contains MIME information
that is not supported).
Remedy
Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data.
Cause
You have received HTML data.
Remedy
Ask the sender to use a file format other than HTML, and then resend the data.
# 829
Cause
Data that contains more than 1,000 pages is received.
Remedy
This machine can print or store up to 999 pages of data in memory, but will
delete any data that exceeds this limit. Ask the sender to resend the remaining
pages.
Error Messages
13-25
Troubleshooting
# 828
13
# 830
Cause
A DSN (Delivery Status Notification) error notification is received because of an
incorrect I-fax address or destination setting, or because the data size of the
sent documents exceeds the mail server capacity.
Remedy 1 Check the I-fax address or destination setting.
Remedy 2 Set Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen) so that it is less than the mail server capability. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax
Common Settings," on p. 11-5.)
Remedy 3 Check the status of the mail server, DNS server, and network.
# 831
Cause
An I-fax document could not be received using SMTP because of the RX/Print
Range setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Remedy
Reset the RX/Print Range setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in
Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
(See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
# 832
Cause
DSN (Delivery Status Notification) mail was not sent because TCP/IP Settings
or E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) have not been set, or because trouble has occurred in the
mail server.
Troubleshooting
Remedy 1 Check the DNS Server Settings and IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings,
and E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network
Guide.)
Remedy 2 Check the status of the mail server and DNS server.
13
13-26
Error Messages
# 833
Cause
MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail was not sent because TCP/IP Settings or
E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) have not been set, or because trouble has occurred in the
mail server.
Remedy 1 Check the DNS Server Settings and IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings,
and E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network
Guide.)
Remedy 2 Check the status of the mail server and DNS server.
# 834
Cause
An MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) error notification is received because of an
incorrect I-fax address or destination setting, or because trouble has occurred in
the network or mail server. Alternatively, the memory of the receiving machine is
full.
Remedy
Check the I-fax address and destination settings.
# 835
Cause
The maximum number of text lines for receiving an I-fax has been exceeded.
Remedy
Ask the sender to reduce the amount of text data in the body of the document,
and then resend the data.
Cause
A connection request was received from a host whose connection is restricted
by IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Remedy
Check the settings in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See
Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the Network Guide.) Make sure that
the connection request is made from an authorized host.
Error Messages
13-27
Troubleshooting
# 837
13
# 839
Cause
The user name or password for the SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH) in
Authent./Encryption in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect.
Remedy
Check the user name and password for SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH) in
Authent./Encryption in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP
Network," in the Network Guide.)
# 841
Cause
The encryption algorithm that matches the mail server does not exist for
sending e-mail or I-fax.
Remedy 1 Set Allow SSL in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the
Network Guide.)
Remedy 2 Add the same encryption algorithm as the mail server in the mail server
settings.
# 842
Cause
Authentication using the client certificate was requested by the mail server for
sending an e-mail message or I-fax.
Remedy 1 Set Allow SSL in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/IP Network," in the
Network Guide.)
Troubleshooting
Remedy 2 Change the mail server settings so that the client certificate is not requested.
# 843
Cause
13
There is large difference between the current time set in the KDC (Key
Distribution Center) server and the time set in the machine.
Remedy 1 Change the current date and time in Date & Time Settings in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Setting the Current Date and
Time," on p. 1-14.)
Remedy 2 Change the current time set in the KDC (Key Distribution Center) server.
13-28
Error Messages
# 847
Cause
Could not save the received document in the Confidential Fax Inbox, as the
memory of the Confidential Fax Inbox is full.
Remedy
Erase unnecessary documents stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox or the
Memory RX Inbox. (See "Erasing Received Documents," on p. 6-8, and Chapter
2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Functions," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
# 851
Cause 1
There is insufficient memory remaining in the system.
Remedy
Check the system's available memory, and delete unnecessary documents in
the inboxes. (See Chapter 2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Functions," in the
Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
Cause 2
The scanned document cannot be stored because there are more than 1,500
documents in the specified inbox.
Remedy
Delete unnecessary documents from the specified inbox. (See Chapter 2,
"Introduction to the Mail Box Functions," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
Cause 3
The memory for image data is full.
Remedy
Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to
increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents,"
on p. 6-8, and Chapter 2, "Introduction to the Mail Box Functions," in the
Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
Cause
An error occurred because the main power switch was turned OFF while a job
was being processed.
Remedy
Check to see if the main power switch is turned ON. Try processing the job
again, if necessary. (See Chapter 1, "Before You Start Using This Machine," in
the Reference Guide.)
Troubleshooting
# 852
13
Error Messages
13-29
# 859
Cause 1
A compression error occurred with the image data.
Remedy
Check the print settings, and try printing again.
Cause 2
An original was not scanned properly, or the orientation of the original was
incorrect.
Remedy
Check the scan settings, and try scanning again.
# 868
Cause
Failed to communicate with the destination when sending with WebDAV,
because access via a proxy server was requested (received HTTP Error 305:
Use Proxy).
Remedy 1 Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
Remedy 2 Check Proxy Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/
IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
# 869
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that authorization failed when
sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 401: Unauthorized).
Remedy 1 Check the user name and password for the destination.
Remedy 2 Check the security settings of the WebDAV server.
Troubleshooting
# 870
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that the request was denied
when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 403: Forbidden).
Remedy 1 Wait a few moments, and then try again.
Remedy 2 Check the destination.
13
Remedy 3 Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
13-30
Error Messages
# 871
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that the specified folder could
not be found when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 404: Not
Found/409: Conflict/410: Gone).
Remedy
Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
# 872
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that access is denied when
sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 405: Method Not Allowed).
Remedy
Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
# 873
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that proxy authentication
failed when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 407: Proxy
Authentication Required).
Remedy
Check Proxy Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Chapter 3, "Using a TCP/
IP Network," in the Network Guide.)
# 874
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that the connection timed out
when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 408: Request Timeout).
Remedy 2 Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
# 875
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that chunked encoding was
denied when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 411: Length
Required).
Remedy 1 Set Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending in TX Settings under
<Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With
WebDAV," on p. 9-34.)
Remedy 2 Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
Error Messages
13-31
Troubleshooting
Remedy 1 Wait a few moments, and then try again.
13
# 876
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that the size of the data was
too large when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 413: Request
Entity Too Large).
Remedy
Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
# 877
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that the URI (host name +
folder path) was too long when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error
414: Request-URI Too Long).
Remedy
Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
# 878
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that the server encountered
an unexpected condition that prevented it from executing the request when
sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 500: Internal Server Error).
Remedy
Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
# 879
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that the server does not
support the necessary functions to execute the request when sending with
WebDAV (received HTTP Error 501: Not Implemented).
Remedy 1 Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
Troubleshooting
Remedy 2 If you are sending via a proxy server without using SSL communication, set Use
Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending in TX Settings under <Common
Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to
'Off'. (See "Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With WebDAV," on p.
9-34.)
# 880
13
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that the proxy server failed to
communicate with the server above it when sending with WebDAV (received
HTTP Error 502: Bad Gateway).
Remedy 1 Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
Remedy 2 Check the settings of the proxy server.
13-32
Error Messages
# 881
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that the server could not
handle the current request when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error
503: Service Unavailable).
Remedy
Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
# 882
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that the proxy server failed to
communicate with the server above it when sending with WebDAV (received
HTTP Error 504: Gateway Timeout).
Remedy 1 Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
Remedy 2 Check the settings of the proxy server.
# 883
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that the server does not
support the necessary functions to execute the request when sending with
WebDAV (received HTTP Error 505: HTTP Version Not Supported).
Remedy
Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
# 884
Received a response from the destination stating that the server does not have
sufficient free disk space to execute the request when sending with WebDAV
(received HTTP Error 507: Insufficient Storage).
Remedy
Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
Troubleshooting
Cause
# 885
Cause
An unexpected error occurred when sending with WebDAV.
Remedy 1 Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
13
Remedy 2 Check the settings of the proxy server.
Error Messages
13-33
# 886
Cause
Received a response from the destination stating that the request was invalid
when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 400: Bad Request).
Remedy
If you are sending via a proxy server without using SSL communication, set Use
Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending in TX Settings under <Common
Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to
'Off'. (See "Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With WebDAV," on p.
9-34.)
# 899
Cause
The e-mail message or I-fax has been successfully sent, but reception may be
incomplete because the transmission was relayed via multiple servers.
Remedy 1 Confirm whether reception was completed.
Remedy 2 Check if you received an error notification.
# 995
Reserved communication jobs were cleared.
Remedy
Reserve the jobs again, if necessary.
Troubleshooting
Cause
13
13-34
Error Messages
Questions & Answers
Q
Can the machine automatically resend documents when there are errors in
transmission?
A
If you are sending the document by any other sending method besides fax, specify the
Retry Times setting. To access the Retry Times setting, press
(Additional Functions)
➞ [Communications Settings] ➞ [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> ➞ [▼] ➞ [Retry
Times]. (See "Number of Retry Attempts," on p. 9-14.)
If you are sending the document by fax, set Auto Redial in TX Settings under <Fax
Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). You can
also make detailed settings, such as the redialing frequency and interval. (See "Auto
Redial," on p. 9-48.)
Q
What happens to documents that are sent to my machine while the power switch on the
control panel is turned OFF?
A
These documents are automatically stored and printed when all documents have been
received.
Q
A
What happens if fax/I-fax documents arrive when the machine is being used for copying?
You can change the order in which these documents print. (See Chapter 4, "Customizing
Settings," in the Reference Guide.)
Q
I frequently send documents using the same settings. Can the machine be set to
automatically restore those settings when the power is turned ON or after an operation
completes?
A
You can store the desired settings in a favorites button and recall them as needed.
Alternatively, you can set the desired settings as the Standard Send Settings so that they
are always specified when the machine is turned ON or after an operation completes.
Q
A
What happens to received documents if a paper jam occurs while they are printing?
If documents are not printed correctly, they are held in memory. When the paper jam is
cleared, printing resumes from the page at which the paper jam occurred.
Questions & Answers
13-35
Troubleshooting
While you are making copies, the documents are automatically received and stored in
the machine's memory, and will be printed automatically when you finish copying.
13
Q
What happens to a document that has not been completely received when a blackout
occurs?
A
The document, up to the last page that was successfully received, is printed.
Q
What happens to documents in memory and the memory settings if power is
interrupted?
A
Documents that are stored in the system's memory remain in memory even when power
to the machine is interrupted. Similarly, the contents of the Address Book are also stored
permanently in memory. However, if power is interrupted while a document is being
received, it is not stored in memory. After the power is restored, the sender or mail
server may resend the interrupted job. If the interrupted job was sent from a POP server
as I-fax, since the job is stored in the POP server, the machine can receive it again.
Q
A
How can I save paper?
You can set for received documents to be printed on both sides of the paper. (See
"2-Sided Printing," on p. 9-37.)
You can set for received documents to be forwarded to e-mail destinations, or receive
documents in memory, and then send them to the desired destinations. (See
"Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-25, and Chapter 6, "Sending and Receiving Documents
Using the Inboxes," in the Copying and Mail Box Guide.)
You can set the machine to not print reports. Two kinds of reports are printed when an
error occurs while sending a fax, the Send TX Report and Fax TX Report. You can save
paper by setting the machine to not print either one of these reports. (See "Specifying
Report Settings," on p. 12-4.)
Troubleshooting
Q
A
Can I turn the machine's power OFF if a document is set with the Delayed Send setting?
When you are not using the machine, you may turn OFF the control panel power switch
on the control panel, but leave the main power switch turned ON. Documents that are
set with the Delayed Send setting are automatically sent from memory when the
specified time arrives.
13
13-36
Questions & Answers
Q
A
Can I change the data size of an e-mail message or I-fax before sending it?
Q
The result in the Activity Report shows "--." How can I tell if the document was
successfully sent?
A
"--" is displayed when sending is successful, but it is not confirmed whether the e-mail
message or I-fax you sent, or the file that you sent to an imageWARE Document
Manager folder, was actually delivered. Contact the recipient to check whether your
document was received.
Troubleshooting
You can specify the Maximum Data Size for Sending setting according to your needs. To
access this setting, press
(Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞
[Communications Settings] ➞ [E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings]. For e-mail, the send job
is split up into several e-mail messages before being sent, so that the data size of each
e-mail message does not exceed the set limit. For I-fax, the send job cannot be sent if
the data size exceeds the set limit when <Send Via Server> is set to 'On'. However,
when <Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', even if you enter the maximum data size for
sending, there is no size limit on the data that is sent.
13
Questions & Answers
13-37
Troubleshooting
13
13-38
Questions & Answers
Appendix
14
CHAPTER
This chapter provides the reports and lists of activity management, specifications, glossary,
and index.
Report and List Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Send Job List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Send TX Report/Send Error TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Fax Multi TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
Fax RX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-8
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-9
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-11
Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-13
Forwarding Conditions List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-15
Registered LDAP Server List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-16
Address Book List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17
User's Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-19
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Universal Color Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-21
Super G3 FAX Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23
Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-24
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
14-1
Report and List Samples
NOTE
The fax numbers and addresses used in these sample reports are fictitious.
Send Job List
You can view the list of send jobs and their statuses. The Send Job List can be
printed from the System Monitor screen. (See "Printing the Send Job Status/Log,"
on p. 8-8.)
12/11/2007 TUE 16:39
. 001
iR C3480i
*********************
***
***
*********************
SET TIME
ST. TIME
12/11 15:49
22:00
DESTINATION ADDRESS
DESTINATION ID
[email protected] t o m
JOB NO.
0001
01
starfish.organization.c f i l e s h a r e
\\swan\share project
12/11 16:35
23:00
012XXXXXXX C a n o n U . S . A
0002
MODE
PGS.
TX
MAIL
TX
BOX
TX
FTP
TX
SMB
TX
FAX
TX
BOX
098XXXXXXX C a n o n C A N A D A
TX
FAX
011XXXXXXX C a n o n E U R O P E
TX
FAX
01
1
1
NOTE
• A list of e-mail, I-fax, and file server transmissions is printed.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, a list of
fax jobs in addition to the above mentioned jobs is printed.
■ SET TIME
Appendix
The date and time that the send job was specified is printed in 24-hour notation. If SDL or
SSO is set as the login service, the user name used for login is printed below the set time.
When the machine cannot specify the user (for example, when automatically forwarding),
the user name is not printed.
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
The time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to be transmitted is printed.
The start time is printed only for send jobs that have been set with the Delayed Send
setting.
14
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The address of the recipient is printed.
14-2
Report and List Samples
■ DESTINATION ID
The name of the recipient is printed.
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending, is printed.
■ MODE
The type and mode of transmission are printed.
Transmission type:
Send (TX)
Mode of transmission: FTP, SMB, IPX, WebDAV, User Inbox (BOX), I-Fax (I-FAX), E-mail
(MAIL), Fax (FAX)
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent is printed.
NOTE
If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit in the display are
printed.
Send TX Report/Send Error TX Report
The Send TX Report is a printed report that informs you of whether a send job has
been successfully delivered to its destination. A Send TX Report can be set to print
automatically after each job is sent, or only when there are transmission errors.
(See "Send TX Report," on p. 12-4.)
12/11/2007 TUE 15:30
. 001
i R C3480i
*****************
*** TX REPORT ***
*****************
JOB NO.
0108
DEPT. ID
1234
ST. TIME
12/11 15:30
PGS.
1
TX/RX INCOMPLETE
-----
TRANSACTION OK
tom
BOX 01
ERROR
Appendix
SEND DOCUMENT NAME
[email protected]
file share
project
starfish.organization.com
\\s w a n\s h a r e
14
Report and List Samples
14-3
NOTE
• The results of e-mail, I-fax, file server, and User Inbox transmissions are printed. Even if
<Report with TX Image> is set to 'On', the contents of the sent document are not printed
on the report in the following cases:
- If the first page of the original is color, and <Report with Color TX Image> is set to 'Off'
- If the document was sent using the Encrypted PDF mode
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, the
results of fax transmissions in addition to the above mentioned transmissions are printed.
• You can also print a Send TX Report with an image of the sent original attached to it.
(See "Send TX Report," on p. 12-4.)
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending, is printed.
■ DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to transmit are
printed.
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent is printed.
■ SEND DOCUMENT NAME
The name given to the document when the send settings were specified is printed.
■ TX/RX INCOMPLETE
If the transmission has been interrupted, the name and address of the destination are
printed.
■ TRANSACTION OK
Appendix
If the transmission completed successfully, the name and address of the destination are
printed.
■ ERROR
If a sending error occurs, the name and address of the destination are printed.
14
NOTE
If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit in the display are
printed.
14-4
Report and List Samples
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report
This report indicates items, such as the fax number of the party to which you sent
documents, the result of communication, and other information, to enable you to
check whether the documents were sent correctly to the intended destination.
You can set whether to automatically print a Fax TX Report after sending
documents. (See "Fax TX Report," on p. 12-7.)
12/11/2007 TUE 13:43
FAX 012XXXXXXX
. 001
iR C3480i
*************************
FAX TX REPORT
***
***
*************************
TRANSMISSION OK
JOB NO.
DEPT. ID
DESTINATION ADDRESS
PSWD/SUBADDRESS
DESTINATION ID
ST. TIME
USAGE T
PGS.
RESULT
0024
1
098XXXXXXX
Canon
12/11 13:42
00’08
1
OK
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
• You can also print a Fax TX Report with an image of the sent original attached to it. (See
"Fax TX Report," on p. 12-7.)
■ REPORT NAME
When the document transmission is completed successfully, a Fax TX Report is printed.
When a send error occurs, a Fax Error TX Report is printed.
■ MESSAGE
A message describing the transmission result is printed.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending, is printed.
■ DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
Appendix
■ JOB NO.
14
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The fax number of the destination is printed, up to the first 20 digits.
Report and List Samples
14-5
■ PSWD/SUBADDRESS
A subaddress is printed, if specified. The password is not printed to maintain security.
■ DESTINATION ID
The name of the remote party is printed.
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to transmit are
printed.
■ USAGE T
The time taken (in minutes and seconds) to send the document from start to finish is
printed.
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent is printed.
■ RESULT
If the documents were transmitted successfully, "OK" is printed.
If a sending error occurred, "NG" (No Good) is printed.
If a sending error occurred, the page number in which the error occurred and the error
code number are printed.
Fax Multi TX Report
This report is used to check whether documents were sent successfully to the
intended destinations when a sequential broadcast transmission was performed.
If a sequential broadcast transmission is performed when Fax TX Report is set to
'On', a Fax Multi TX Report is printed automatically. (See "Fax TX Report" on p.
12-7.)
12/11/2007 TUE 11:18
FAX 012XXXXXXX
i R C3480i
Appendix
*******************************
*** F A X M U L T I T X R E P O R T ***
*******************************
JOB NO.
DEPT. ID
PGS.
TX/RX INCOMPLETE
TRANSACTION OK
ERROR
14
14-6
Report and List Samples
0142
123
1
012XXXXXXX
----098XXXXXXX
. 001
NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
• You can also print a Fax Multi TX Report with an image of the sent original attached to it.
(See "Fax TX Report," on p. 12-7.)
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending, is printed.
■ DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent is printed.
■ TX/RX INCOMPLETE
If a transmission is incomplete, the fax number and the name of the destination are
printed. If there is no applicable destination, "_ _ _" is printed.
■ TRANSACTION OK
The fax number and the name of the destination of a completed transmission are printed.
If there is no applicable destination, "_ _ _" is printed.
■ ERROR
Appendix
If an error in transmission occurs, the fax number and the name of the destination are
printed. If there is no applicable destination, "_ _ _" is printed.
14
Report and List Samples
14-7
Fax RX Report
This report is used to check if documents were received successfully by this
machine.
You can set whether to automatically print a Fax RX Report. (See "Fax RX Report,"
on p. 12-9.)
12/11/2007 TUE 13:03
FAX 012XXXXXXX
i R C3480i
.
001
***************************
FAX RX REPORT
***
***
***************************
RECEPTION OK
JOB NO.
DESTINATION ADDRESS
PSWD/SUBADDRESS
DESTINATION ID
ST. TIME
USAGE T
PGS.
RESULT
5002
012XXXXXXX
Canon
12/11 13:02
00’14
1
OK
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
■ MESSAGE
A message describing the reception result is printed.
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
receiving, is printed.
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The fax number of the sender is printed, up to the first 20 digits.
■ PSWD/SUBADDRESS
A subaddress is printed, if specified. The password is not printed to maintain security.
Appendix
■ DESTINATION ID
The name of the sender is printed.
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
14
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to be received are
printed.
14-8
Report and List Samples
■ USAGE T
The time taken (in minutes and seconds) to receive the document from start to finish is
printed.
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were received is printed.
■ RESULT
If the documents were received successfully, "OK" is printed.
If a reception error occurred, "NG" (No Good) is printed.
If a reception error occurred, the page number in which the error occurred, and the error
code number are printed.
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report
This report enables you to confirm that documents were received in a Confidential
Fax Inbox.
You can set whether to automatically print a Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report.
(See "Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report," on p. 12-10.)
12/11/2007 TUE 13:53
FAX 012XXXXXXX
. 001
iR C3480i
**********************************************
CONFIDENTIAL FAX INBOX RX REPORT
***
***
**********************************************
#01/BOX01
5006
098XXXXXXX
Canon
12/11 13:53
00’14
1
OK
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
■ INBOX NO./NAME
The number (00 to 49) and user assigned name of the Confidential Fax Inbox in which the
documents were received is printed.
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
receiving, is printed.
Report and List Samples
14-9
Appendix
INBOX NO./NAME
JOB NO.
DESTINATION ADDRESS
PSWD/SUBADDRESS
DESTINATION ID
ST. TIME
USAGE T
PGS.
RESULT
14
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The fax number of the sender is printed, up to the first 20 digits.
■ PSWD/SUBADDRESS
A subaddress is printed if specified. The password is not printed to maintain security.
■ DESTINATION ID
The name of the sender is printed.
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to be received are
printed.
■ USAGE T
The time taken (in minutes and seconds) to receive the document from start to finish is
printed.
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were received is printed.
■ RESULT
If the documents were received successfully, "OK" is printed.
If a reception error occurred, "NG" (No Good) is printed.
Appendix
If a reception error occurred, the page number in which the error occurred, and the error
code number are printed.
14
14-10
Report and List Samples
Activity Report
This report is a list which enables you to check the results of all sending and
receiving transactions. An Activity Report can be printed either automatically or
manually.
An Activity Report is automatically printed when either the number of
communication results reaches 100, or a specified time is reached. The send and
receive logs can also be printed separately.
An Activity Report can be printed manually at any time from the System Monitor
screen. (See "Printing the Send Job Status/Log," on p. 8-8.)
12/11/2007 TUE 15:50
. 001
iR C3480i
********************************
*** A C T I V I T Y R E P O R T T X / R X
***
********************************
DEPT. ID : 511008
ST. TIME
DESTINATION ADDRESS
DESTINATION ID
172.20.56.5
* 12/11 12:51
MODE
JOB NO.
RESULT
PGS.
0104
TX
FTP
47 NG
14'10
0105
TX
BOX
1 OK
00'00
0106
TX
FTP
0 NG
00'01
0107
TX
MAIL
1 --
00'01
0108
TX
SMB
0 NG
00'04
/tmp/img
01
* 12/11 15:03
* 12/11 15:03
starfish.organization S h a r e F o l d e r
#755
share
* 12/11 15:03
[email protected] j o h n
\\swan\share project
* 12/11 15:03
#802
\share_dir
#802
* 12/11 15:04
[email protected] B o b
5213
RX
I-FAX
1 OK
00'01
* 12/11 15:05
172.20.56.5
0110
TX
FTP
1 OK
00'21
0111
TX
BOX
1 NG
00'01
0120
TX
FTP
0
#802
0121
TX
/tmp/img
01
* 12/11 15:06
* 12/11 15:47
starfish.organization.com S h a r e F o l d e r
share/share_dir
* 12/11 15:48
012XXXXXXX C a n o n U . S . A
0 NG
00'00
STOP
NOTE
• A list of e-mail, I-fax, file server, and User Inbox transmissions is printed.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, a list of
fax transmissions in addition to the above mentioned transmissions is printed.
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. Transmission logs are
listed according to Department ID.
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to be transmitted
or received are printed. An asterisk (*) indicates a job that has already been printed. If
SDL or SSO is set as the login service, the user name used for login is printed below the
start time. When the machine cannot specify the user (for example, when automatically
forwarding), the user name is not printed.
Report and List Samples
14-11
Appendix
■ DEPT. ID
14
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The address of the recipient is printed.
If the send job is sent to a file server (FTP, SMB, IPX, or WebDAV), the path name is
printed on the second line.
If a subaddress is specified for sending a fax, the destination address is printed on the
second line.
■ DESTINATION ID
The name of the recipient is printed.
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending or receiving, is printed. Numbers between 0001 and 4999 are for sending, while
numbers between 5001 and 9999 are for receiving.
■ MODE
The type and mode of transmission are printed.
Transmission type:
Send (TX), Receive (RX)
Mode of transmission: FTP, SMB, IPX, WebDAV, User Inbox (BOX), I-Fax (I-FAX), E-mail
(MAIL), Fax (FAX), G3, ECM
NOTE
• FTP, SMB, IPX, WebDAV, User Inbox, I-Fax, and E-mail can be printed in the MODE
column.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, FAX,
G3, and ECM, in addition to the above mentioned modes of transmissions can be printed
in the MODE column.
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent or received is printed.
■ RESULT
Appendix
"OK," "NG," or "- -," and the transmission time are printed.
It the documents have been successfully sent, "OK" is printed.
If the documents have failed to be sent, "NG" (No Good) is printed, and the error code is
printed on the second line.
14
When sending is successful, but it is not confirmed whether the e-mail message or I-fax,
or the file that you sent to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, was actually
delivered, "- -" is printed.
14-12
Report and List Samples
NOTE
If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit in the display are
printed.
Fax Activity Report
The Fax Activity Report is a printed log that shows the results of send and receive
jobs. A Fax Activity Report can be printed either automatically or manually.
A Fax Activity Report is automatically printed when either the number of
communication results reaches 40, or a specified time is reached. You can set
whether to automatically print an Activity Report. (See "Fax Activity Report," on p.
12-8.)
12/11/2007 TUE 14:20 FAX 012XXXXXXX
iR C3480i
.
001
***************************************
FAX ACTIVITY REPORT TX/RX
***
***
***************************************
DEPT. ID :123
ST. TIME
*1 2 / 0 9 1 3 : 2 9
DESTINATION ADDRESS
Canon CANADA
123XXXXXXX
NO.
0 0 0 7 TX
*1 2 / 0 9 1 3 : 3 5
*1 2 / 0 9 1 3 : 3 6
Canon EUROPE
Canon U.S.A
011XXXXXXX
098XXXXXXX
0 0 0 8 TX
0 0 0 8 TX
ECM
ECM
12/09 13:38
Canon U.S.A
098XXXXXXX
0 0 0 9 TX
ECM
12/09
12/09
12/10
12/11
12/11
12/11
12/11
Canon
Canon
Canon
Canon
Canon
Canon
Canon
098XXXXXXX
011XXXXXXX
022XXXXXXX
123XXXXXXX
098XXXXXXX
098XXXXXXX
098XXXXXXX
0010
5005
5006
0011
0012
0013
0014
13:40
13:52
13:53
11:49
13:12
13:38
15:10
U.S.A
EUROPE
FRANCE
CANADA
U.S.A
U.S.A
U.S.A
MODE
ECM
TX
MEMORY LOCK
MEMORY LOCK
TX
TX
TX
TX
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
ECM
PGS. RESULT
0 NG 00’00
0 STOP
1 OK 00’24
0 NG 00’11
0 #102
0 NG 00’00
0 #995
1 OK 00’18
1 OK 00’22
1 OK 00’22
1 OK 00’24
2 OK 00’44
1 OK 00’20
1 OK 00’24
NOTE
This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line
Fax Board is installed.
■ DEPT. ID
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to transmit or
receive are printed. An asterisk (*) indicates a document that has already been printed. If
SDL or SSO is set as the login service, the user name used for login is printed below the
start time. When the machine cannot specify the user (for example, when automatically
forwarding), the user name is not printed.
Report and List Samples
14-13
Appendix
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. Transmission logs are
listed according to the Department ID.
14
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The name and fax number of the remote party are printed. If a subaddress or sender's
name has been specified, it is printed beneath the fax number.
■ NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for
sending or receiving, is printed. Numbers between 0001 and 4999 are for sending, while
numbers between 5001 and 9999 are for receiving.
■ MODE
The communicated contents and the Communication mode are printed.
Sending:
TX, Delayed TX, Sequential Broadcast TX, Delayed Sequential
Broadcast, Transfer TX, Direct Sending
Receiving:
Automatic RX, Confidential Fax Inbox RX, Memory RX, Transfer
RX
Communication mode: ECM
Line Type:
Line1, Line 2 (The optional Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is
installed.)
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent or received is printed.
■ RESULT
"OK" or "NG" and the transmission time are printed.
It the documents have been successfully sent or received, "OK" is printed.
If the documents have failed to be sent or received, "NG" (No Good) is printed.
Appendix
If a sending or receiving error occurs, the page number in which the error occurred and
the error code number are printed.
14
14-14
Report and List Samples
Forwarding Conditions List
You can print the contents of the forwarding settings that have been specified.
Manually print the Forwarding Conditions List whenever necessary. (See "Printing
Forwarding Settings," on p. 11-45.)
12/11/2007 TUE 15:30
iR C3480i
. 001
************************************
FORWARDING CONDITIONS LIST
***
***
************************************
CONDITION NAME
FORWARD W/O CONDITIONS (I-FAX RX)
ON/OFF
OFF
FORWARDING DESTINATION
FWDING DESTIN. TYPE
I-FAX
FWDING DESTIN. NAME
Tom
URL SEND
OFF
SEND DOCUMENT NAME
TEST1
FILE FORMAT
TIFF
DIVIDE INTO PAGES
OFF
STORE/PRINT RECEIVED DOC.
OFF
FORWARDING DONE NOTICE
–
NOTICE ONLY FOR ERRORS
–
CONDITION NAME
test
ON/OFF
OFF
FORWARDING CONDITION
RECEIVE TYPE
I-FAX
TO
DISREGARDED
FROM
EQUALS [email protected]
SUBJECT
DISREGARDED
FORWARDING DESTINATION
FWDING DESTIN. TYPE
I-FAX
FWDING DESTIN. NAME
Tom
URL SEND
OFF
SEND DOCUMENT NAME
TEST2
FILE FORMAT
TIFF
OFF
STORE/PRINT RECEIVED DOC.
OFF
FORWARDING TIME
EVERYDAY 00:00-10:00
FORWARDING DONE NOTICE
–
NOTICE ONLY FOR ERRORS
–
Appendix
DIVIDE INTO PAGES
14
Report and List Samples
14-15
Registered LDAP Server List
You can print the registered LDAP server settings. (See "Printing LDAP Server
Settings," on p. 11-53.)
12/11/2007 TUE 15:30
iR C3480i
****************************************
*** R E G I S T E R E D L D A P S E R V E R L I S T ***
****************************************
abc
hostname.example.com
"ou=ffm, o=mip"
Off
389
100
60 sec.
USE
abcdefg
Off
VER.3(UTF-8)
SERVER NAME
SERVER ADDRESS
LOCATION TO START SEARCH
USE SSL
PORT NUMBER
MAX. NO. OF ADDRESSES TO SEARCH
SEARCH TIMEOUT
LOGIN INFORMATION
SERVER LDAP VERSION AND CHARACTER CODE
def
177.22.32.64
"ou=ffm, o=mip"
Off
389
200
120 sec.
DO NOT USE
VER.3(UTF-8)
SERVER NAME
SERVER ADDRESS
LOCATION TO START SEARCH
USE SSL
PORT NUMBER
MAX. NO. OF ADDRESSES TO SEARCH
SEARCH TIMEOUT
LOGIN INFORMATION
USER
DOMAIN NAME
DISPLAY AUTHENT. DIALOG WHEN SEARCHING
SERVER LDAP VERSION AND CHARACTER CODE
ghi
hostname.example.com
"DC=mip, DC=ffm, DC=canon, DC=com"
Off
389
100
180 sec.
USE (SECURITY AUTHENTICATION)
hijklm
ffm.example.com
Off
VER.3(UTF-8)
Appendix
SERVER NAME
SERVER ADDRESS
LOCATION TO START SEARCH
USE SSL
PORT NUMBER
MAX. NO. OF ADDRESSES TO SEARCH
SEARCH TIMEOUT
LOGIN INFORMATION
USER
DISPLAY AUTHENT. DIALOG WHEN SEARCHING
SERVER LDAP VERSION AND CHARACTER CODE
14
14-16
Report and List Samples
. 001
Address Book List
You can print the contents of the Address Book (subaddress books 1 to 10 or
one-touch buttons). Manually print the list of the selected Address Book whenever
necessary. (See "Address Book List," on p. 12-11.)
12/11/2007 TUE 15:30
. 001
iR C3380i
*****************************
*** ADDRESS BOOK LIST (1) ***
*****************************
DESTINATION NAME
DESTINATION ADDRESS
CLASS
file share
FTP
GROUP
tom
image server
GROUP
I-FAX
FTP
BOX
starfish.organization.com
share
SMB
t o m @ example. c o m
172.20.56.5
01
\\swan\share
bob
I-FAX
b o b @ example. c o m
sales 4
SMB
\\swan\share
\sales_4
nick
MAIL
n i c k @ example. c o m
Canon U.S.A
FAX
012XXXXXXX
GROUP
Canon CANADA
Canon CANADA
GROUP
FAX
FAX
BOX
098XXXXXXX
098XXXXXXX
01
project
NOTE
• The details of e-mail, I-fax, file server, and group destinations are printed.
• If the optional Super G3 FAX Board or Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board is installed, the
details of fax numbers in addition to the above mentioned destinations are printed.
■ DESTINATION NAME
The name of the specified destination is printed.
When printing the contents of a one-touch button, the number of the one-touch button is
printed on the first line.
■ CLASS
Appendix
The specified destination's class (transmission mode) is printed.
14
Report and List Samples
14-17
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
• If the Class is "FTP," "SMB," "IPX," or "WebDAV" (file server):
The host name is printed on the first line, and the folder path on the second line.
• If the Class is "BOX":
The number of the User Inbox is printed.
• If the Class is "I-FAX" or "MAIL":
The I-fax address or e-mail address is printed.
• If the Class is "FAX":
The fax number is printed on the first line, and the subaddress on the second line, if it is
specified.
• If the Class is "GROUP":
Appendix
The destinations stored in the group address are printed on the second line and
continue down in a list. If a file server is stored in the group address, no additional
information is printed on the second line.
14
14-18
Report and List Samples
User's Data List
The User's Data List prints out the Send Settings made in Communications
Settings, Report Settings, and System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). Manually print the User's Data List whenever necessary. (See "User's Data
List," on p. 12-12.)
12/11/2007 TUE 15:30
iR C3480i
. 001
*********************************************
USER'S DATA LIST (Communications)
***
***
*********************************************
Unit Name
Erase Failed TX
Data Compression Ratio
Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors
Retry Times
Display Confirmation for Favorites Button
Image Level for PDF (Compct)
Image Lvl in Text/Photo or Photo Mode
Image Level in Text Mode
PDF(OCR) Settings
Smart Scan
Num of Char for Doc Name Setting
Default Screen for Send
TX Terminal ID
Printing Position
Display Destination Name
Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending
Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs
RX Settings
2-Sided Print
Select Cassette
Switch A
Switch B
Switch C
Switch D
Receive Reduction
Receive Reduction
Reduce %
Reduce Direction
Received Page Footer
2 ON 1 Log
Gamma Value for YCbCr Received Jobs
Report Settings
TX Report
Report with TX Image
Report with Color TX Image
Activity Report
Auto Print
Daily Activity Report Time
Send/Receive Separate
System Settings
Communications Settings
E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings
Maximum Data Size for Sending
Default Subject
Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination
E-mail Settings
Specify Authorized User Dest. Sender
I-Fax Settings
Full Mode TX Timeout
Print MDN/DSN on Receipt
Always send notice for RX errors
Use Send Via Server
Divided Data RX Timeout
Allow MDN Not Via Server
Memory RX Inbox Settings
Use I-Fax Memory Lock
Memory Lock Start Time
Memory Lock End Time
Restrict the Send Function]
Restrict New Address
E-mail
I-FAX
FILE
E-mail/I-Fax Domain Sending Restriction
Restrict Sending to Domains
Allow PDF Send with Expired Certificates
Always Add Device Signature to Send PDF
01: Tokyo
02: New York
03: London
Canon
On
Normal
Off
3 times
On
Normal
Normal
On
24 characters
New Address
On
Outside
On
On
1.8
Off
On
On
On
On
On
Auto
90%
Vertical Only
Off
Off
1.8
For Error Only
On
Off
On
Off
Off
3 MB
Attached Image
Off
Off
24 Hours
Off
On
Off
24 Hours
On
Appendix
Communications Settings
TX Settings
Sender's Names (TTI)
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
14
Off
Off
Off
Report and List Samples
14-19
12/11/2007 TUE 11:15
FAX 012XXXXXXX
iR C3480i
*********************************
USER'S DATA LIST (FAX)
***
***
*********************************
COMMUNICATIONS SETTINGS
FAX SETTINGS
USER SETTINGS
UNIT TELEPHONE #
TEL LINE TYPE
VOLUME CONTROL
ALARM VOLUME
MONITOR VOL.
TX SETTINGS
ECM TX
PAUSE TIME
AUTO REDIAL
REDIAL TIMES
REDIAL INTERVAL
TX ERROR RESEND
CHECK DIAL TONE BEFORE SENDING
TX TERMINAL ID
TTI IN/OUT SIDE OF IMAGE
DISPLAY DESTINATION NAME
TELEPHONE # MARK
RX SETTINGS
ECM RX
REPORT SETTINGS
FAX
FAX TX REPORT
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE
FAX ACTIVITY REPORT
AUTO PRINT
TX/RX SEPARATE
DAILY ACTIVITY REPORT TIME
FAX RX REPORT
CONF. FAX INBOX RX REPORT
Appendix
SYSTEM SETTINGS
COMMUNICATIONS SETTINGS
FAX SETTINGS
TX START SPEED
RX START SPEED
PIN CODE ACCESS
MEMORY RX INBOX SETTINGS
USE FAX MEMORY LOCK
MEMORY LOCK START TIME
MEMORY LOCK END TIME
RESTRICT THE SEND FUNCTION
RESTRICT NEW ADDRESSES
FAX
ALLOW FAX DRIVER TX
CONFIRM ENTERED FAX NUMBERS
14
14-20
Report and List Samples
012XXXXXXX
TONE
4
4
ON
2 SEC
ON
2 TIMES
2 MIN
ERROR & 1ST PAGE
ON
ON
OUTSIDE
ON
FAX
ON
FOR ERROR ONLY
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
33600bps
33600bps
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
. 001
Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or
future release.
Universal Color Send
■ Scan Features
Item
Specifications
FTP (TCP/IP), SMB (TCP/IP), NCP (IPX), WebDAV
Data Format
TIFF, JPEG, PDF
Resolution
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi,
200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
System Environment
Windows 98/Me/XP/Vista, Windows 2000 Server/
Professional (SP1 or later), Windows Server 2003, Novell
Netware 3.2/4.11/4.2/5/5.1, Solaris Version 2.6 or later, Mac
OS X or later, Red Hat Linux 7.2, Windows XP Professional,
Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS/ES/WA 4.0 or later
Interface
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Color Mode
Automatic-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale),
Automatic-Color Select (Full Color/Black-and-White),
Full Color, Grayscale, Black-and-White
Original Type
Text, Text/Photo, Photo
Others
Preview, Browse Windows (SMB) File Server, Browse
NetWare (NCP) File Server
Optional PDF Functions
Compact, Trace and Smooth, Encryption, OCR, Digital
Signing (Device Signature, User Signature)
Appendix
Communication Protocol
14
Specifications
14-21
■ E-mail and I-Fax Features
Item
Specifications
Communication
SMTP, POP3, I-Fax (Simple, Full)
Protocol
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi,
200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi,
200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
For Sending E-mail
200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi,
Black-and-White 200 x 400 dpi*2, 300 x 300 dpi*2,
400 x 400 dpi*2, 600 x 600 dpi*2
Resolution
For Sending I-Fax
Color
E-mail
Format
I-Fax
100 x 100 dpi*2, 200 x 200 dpi*2,
300 x 300 dpi*2, 400 x 400 dpi*2,
600 x 600 dpi*2
TIFF, JPEG, PDF
Black-and-White TIFF (MH, MR*2, MMR*2)
Color
TIFF (Profile-C)*2
E-mail
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR,
STMT, STMTR
I-Fax
11" x 17"*1, LGL*3, LTR, LTRR,
STMT*3, STMTR*3
Original Size
Server
Software
Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 (SP1 or later), Sendmail 8.93, Lotus
Domino R 4.6 or later
Other
Searches a destination via the LDAP Server, Preview
Optional PDF
Functions
(E-mail only)
Compact, Trace and Smooth, Encryption, OCR, Digital Signing (Device
Signature, User Signature)
*1 Available only if [A3/11x17] is selected on the Destination Conditions screen. (See "Specifying an I-Fax Address,"
on p. 2-7, "I-Fax Addresses," on p. 10-12, or "Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons," on p. 10-35.)
*2 Available only if [Receive in Color] is set to 'On' on the Destination Conditions screen according to the
specifications of the recipient's machine. (See "Specifying an I-Fax Address," on p. 2-7, "I-Fax Addresses," on p.
10-12, or "Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons," on p. 10-35.)
Appendix
*3 Sent as LTR
14
14-22
Specifications
Super G3 FAX Board
Item
Specifications
Telephone Line Used/Number of
Lines
Public Switched Telephone Network, Facsimile
network 1 line
Scan line Density
(Scan, Transmission)
Standard:
Fine:
Super-Fine:
Ultra-Fine:
Transmission Speed
Super G3: 33.6 kbps, G3: 14.4 kbps
Compression Method
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Transmission Type
Super G3, G3
Sending Original Sizes
11" x 17" to STMT
Receiving Paper Sizes
11" x 17" to STMT
Transmission Times
ECM-MMR:
G3MR method:
G3MH method:
JBIG:
Auto Dial Function
Address Book: 1,800 destinations
(including destinations stored in one-touch buttons)
Image Memory
Approximately 6,000 pages
8 pels*1/mm x 3.85 line/mm
8 pels*1/mm x 7.7 line/mm
8 pels*1/mm x 15.4 line/mm
16 pels*1/mm x 15.4 line/mm
Approximately 3.2 seconds
Approximately 13 seconds
Approximately 13 seconds
Approximately 2.6 seconds
Appendix
*1 Pels stands for picture elements (pixels).
14
Specifications
14-23
Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board
Item
Telephone Line Used/Number of
Lines
Public Switched Telephone Network, Facsimile network
2 lines
Scan line Density
(Scan, Transmission)
Standard:
Fine:
Super-Fine:
Ultra-Fine:
Transmission Speed
Super G3: 33.6 kbps, G3: 14.4 kbps
Compression Method
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Transmission Type
Super G3, G3
Sending Original Sizes
11" x 17" to STMT
Receiving Paper Sizes
11" x 17" to STMT
Transmission Times
ECM-MMR:
G3MR method:
G3MH method:
JBIG:
Auto Dial Function
Address Book: 1,800 destinations
(including destinations stored in one-touch buttons)
Image Memory
Approximately 6,000 pages
Appendix
*1 Pels stands for picture elements (pixels).
14
14-24
Specifications
Specifications
8 pels*1/mm x 3.85 line/mm
8 pels*1/mm x 7.7 line/mm
8 pels*1/mm x 15.4 line/mm
16 pels*1/mm x 15.4 line/mm
Approximately 3.2 seconds
Approximately 13 seconds
Approximately 13 seconds
Approximately 2.6 seconds
Glossary
A
Activity Report
A record listing all documents that have been sent and received.
ADF
Automatic Document Feeder. Originals placed in the feeder are automatically fed
sheet by sheet to the platen glass for scanning. The feeder also automatically turns
over two-sided originals to make one- or two-sided prints.
ASCII code
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) is a set of standardized
codes used to represent letters, numbers, punctuation marks, a few symbols, and
control characters. A seven digit (or seven bit) binary number can represent one of
128 distinct codes.
Authentication
A system process which validates a user's logon information. The user's name and
password must be registered in the system beforehand, and if the system detects a
match, access is granted, depending on the user's access rights and permissions.
Auto Redial
B
BOOTP
BOOTstrap Protocol. A protocol that enables a client machine to automatically obtain
network setup information from a server over a TCP/IPv4 network. BOOTP enables a
client to automatically locate such information as the host name, domain name, and
IPv4 address, so that it is not necessary to enter these items manually.
bps
Bits per second. The measure of transmission speed used in relationship to networks
and communication lines.
Glossary
14-25
Appendix
When Auto Redial is set to 'On', the machine automatically redials the recipient's
facsimile number if the line is busy, or if there is a sending error. The machine will wait
two minutes (default) after the initial attempt before redialing. You can specify the
number of times that the machine redials, the length of the redial interval, and
whether to redial after a transmission error.
14
C
CCITT/ITU-T
A committee that sets international standards for telecommunications. CCITT/ITU-T
was formerly known as CCITT (Consultative Committee for International Telegraph
and Telephone), but is now succeeded by ITU-T (International Telecommunications
Union-Telecommunications Sector).
CMYK
Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Black (K). CMYK is the standard color model
used for offset printing of full-color documents, using the secondary colors of light
(plus black). CMYK is a subtractive process, which subtracts reflected colors from
white. The CMY color model uses cyan, magenta, and yellow to create colors
throughout the spectrum. The combination of cyan, magenta, and yellow in equal
amounts results in no reflection of light (black). One of the most difficult aspects of
color printing is color matching, which is properly converting RGB color into CMYK
colors, so that what gets printed looks the same as what appears on the display. The
four colors are printed on paper as layers of halftone dots in varying sizes and angles
to create the illusion of different colors.
Confidential Fax Inbox
A type of inbox for storing received fax/I-fax documents. If received fax/I-fax
documents match the forwarding conditions, they are forwarded to the Confidential
Fax Inbox corresponding to the forwarding conditions, without being printed. The
documents can then be printed whenever necessary. If a password is set for a
Confidential Fax Inbox, it is necessary to enter a password to print the documents.
Copy Ratio/Zoom Ratio
Numeric representation for the reduction or enlargement of an original.
D
Delayed Transmission
Appendix
Also called "Delayed TX." You can set a time for a document to be sent, and you do
not have to be present when the document is sent at the specified time. You can
reserve up to 120 delayed transmissions.
Device Information Delivery
Registering device information in your machine enables you to set the machine to
deliver the same device information to other imageRUNNER machine models that are
connected to the same network. This enables you to easily manage multiple
machines at the same time.
14
14-26
Glossary
Device signature certificate
The device signature certificate, when used with a private key inside the machine,
enables you to add a digital signature to a scanned document. This enables the
recipient to verify which machine scanned the document.
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol which automatically specifies the
network settings of a client on a TCP/IP network. Many of the settings required to set
up TCP/IP, which is the standard protocol of the Internet, can be made automatically
using DHCP.
Digital signature
A code that can be attached to an electronically transmitted message, which uniquely
identifies the sender.
Direct Sending
Use Direct Sending when the memory is full, and you still need to send a document.
Direct Sending scans and sends one page at a time without storing the document in
memory. This enables you to send a document even when the memory is full.
DNS server
Domain Name System server. A server which maintains a database that translates
the domain names of Internet servers, such as www.w3.org, into Internet Protocol
(IP) addresses, such as "18.176.0.26". This enables clients to connect to a server
with a host name rather than a numeric IP address.
Domain
A management concept that divides large scale networks into groups for identifying
individual computers and users. The Internet is managed by classifying domains
according to geographical location or type (business, organization, educational
institution, etc.).
dpi
Appendix
Dots Per Inch. A measure of screen and printer resolution that is expressed as the
number of dots that a device can print or display per linear inch.
14
Glossary
14-27
E
ECM
Error Correction Mode. Reduces system and line errors when sending or receiving
from another fax machine with ECM capability. ECM divides a page into blocks and
inspects each block for data lost through poor transmission. If part of the data is
missing in a certain block, ECM retransmits that data from the beginning of the block
until it confirms that all of the data within the block has been transmitted successfully.
In this way, ECM guarantees that a good image can be received at the receiving end.
ECM is very effective where the telephone lines are in poor condition. However, ECM
slows the transmission speed, and you may turn this mode off, if it is not needed.
Error indicator
The Error indicator blinks a red light when a paper jam occurs or the machine has run
out of toner or paper. When the Error indicator maintains a steady red light, contact
your local authorized Canon dealer.
Ethernet
An industry standard LAN (Local Area Network) system for connecting multiple
computers. Data is sent from one computer to another by dividing it into packets, and
the packets reach their destinations smoothly without any collision with other packets.
F
File formats
File formats are used to save image data. This machine supports six different file
formats: TIFF, JPEG, PDF, PDF (Compact), PDF (OCR), and PDF (Trace).
File server
A personal computer or workstation to which two or more users on client personal
computers can gain access via a LAN (Local Area Network), to share and use its hard
disk drive.
Fine
Appendix
A resolution mode for sending originals at twice the detail of the Standard resolution
mode.
Forwarding
The process of sending a received fax/I-fax document to another destination. For
example, if your machine at work receives a document, you can have the machine
forward the document to a machine at your home. This machine can also forward
documents to a Confidential Fax Inbox.
14
14-28
Glossary
FTP
File Transfer Protocol. A client-server protocol enabling a user to transfer files on one
computer to and from another computer over a TCP/IP network. The File Transfer
Protocol also governs the client program with which the user transfers files.
I
I-fax
I-fax (Internet fax) enables you to send and receive a scanned original converted to
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) or PDF (Portable Document Format) image data as
an e-mail attachment to/from any I-fax compatible facsimile or personal computer with
Internet e-mail functionality.
imageWARE
Canon imageWARE is a software suite for business environments that provides
functions to efficiently capture, create, manage, and distribute documents. The
imageWARE suite also supports on-demand printing and publishing.
For more information, please see the imageWARE Web site at
http://www.imageware.com.
imageWARE Document Manager Gateway
Software for sending scanned documents from Color imageRUNNER machines
equipped with the Send function, to imageWARE Document Manager folders via the
network. imageWARE Document Manager Gateway is a standard feature of both the
Workgroup Edition and the Enterprise Edition of imageWARE Document Manager. It
consists of two programs: imageWARE Document Manager Gateway Server, which
stores the documents, and imageWARE Document Manager Gateway Administrator,
which makes the settings for document storage destinations.
Internet Protocol (IP)
The underlying set of networking rules that describes how data is transmitted across
the Internet. Internet Protocol enables data from one computer to be split into
packets, and sent to another computer with a specific IP address.
Internet Protocol address. A 32-bit numeric address used by IP (Internet Protocol) to
specify a computer or device on the Internet. The IP address is usually written as four
numbers delimited by periods. For example, 128.121.4.5.
ITU-T
Appendix
IP address
14
See CCITT/ITU-T.
Glossary
14-29
J
JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group. An experts group file specification that defines a
standard for compressing (reducing the size of) image files without any loss in image
information. Files containing photographic images in Web pages are generally
compressed so they can be transferred across the Internet more quickly. JPEG, the
format currently used, causes some loss in image data after compression, and so
reduces image quality. JBIG compression overcomes this shortcoming.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group. An experts group file specification that defines a
standard for compressing (reducing the size of) photographic and photorealistic
image files. The image compression method used involves some loss of information,
and so reduces image quality. Files containing photographic images in Web pages
are generally compressed by using the JPEG format so they can be transferred
across the Internet more quickly.
L
LAN
Local Area Network. A network system formed by linking a server, workstations,
devices, and computers, which are all located in the same building or some other
relatively limited area.
LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. A network protocol that enables you to locate
organizations, individuals, and other resources, such as files and printers on a
network, whether on the public Internet or on a corporate intranet.
Log on
Entering a user name and password as a means of user authentication to start a
computer session or gain access to a service.
Long distance dialing
Appendix
When dialing or registering long distance numbers, you may need to insert a pause
within or after the telephone number. The destination and length of the pause differ
depending on the system. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or local
telephone company if you experience difficulty in long distance dialing.
14
14-30
Glossary
M
MEAP
Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform. A system enabling the installation of
the Java platform and Java applications on your machine. Utilization of MEAP also
enables you to install and uninstall MEAP applications.
Memory Lock
Usually a document is printed as soon as it is received; but with Memory Lock, all
documents received are stored in memory until you enter a password to print them.
This enables you to attend to the documents at your own leisure, and prevents printed
documents from piling up in the output tray.
Memory RX Inbox
The Memory RX (Receive) Inbox is an inbox for storing received fax/I-fax documents.
Received documents are stored in the Memory RX Inbox without being printed. You
can print or send the stored documents later, or whenever necessary.
Memory Sending
Memory Sending scans documents into memory before sending them. You can
retrieve your original once scanning is complete, and you do not have to wait until
sending is complete.
N
NetBEUI
NetBIOS Enhanced User Interface. NetBEUI is a network protocol originally designed
by IBM, and later extended by Microsoft and Novell. In a small network, NetBEUI is
more efficient than other protocols, such as TCP/IP. It is supported natively by IBM
operating systems and Microsoft Windows to provide services, such as file sharing
and printing.
Network Basic Input Output System. A program that enables applications on different
computers to communicate within a LAN (Local Area Network). NetBIOS is used in
Ethernet and Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista networks.
NetWare
Novell NetWare. Novell's client-server network operating system for the IBM PC.
NetWare uses the IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, or TCP/IP network protocol. NetWare supports
MS-DOS, Microsoft Windows, OS/2, and Macintosh clients. NetWare for UNIX gives
users access to UNIX hosts.
Glossary
14-31
Appendix
NetBIOS
14
O
OS/2
A family of multitasking operating systems developed by IBM for Intel x86-based
computers. OS/2 provides a graphical user interface similar to Windows, as well as a
command line interface similar to DOS. Add-ons to OS/2 enable it to run DOS and
Windows applications.
P
Pause
You can insert a pause within a telephone number or at the end of a telephone
number. A pause is also sometimes required to connect to an outside line, or for
overseas fax transmissions to certain countries.
Pause Time
The default settings are two seconds if a pause is inserted within the telephone
number (may vary depending on your location), and 10 seconds if a pause is added
to the end of the telephone number. Only the length of pauses inside a telephone
number, and not those at the end, can be changed.
PBX
Private Branch eXchange. An in-house telephone switching system that
interconnects telephone extensions to each other, as well as to the external
telephone network. A PBX controls the flow of telephone traffic through instruments,
such as paging systems, and automatic callback and dialing.
PDF
Portable Document Format. The page description language used in Adobe Systems'
Acrobat document exchange system, which is restricted neither by device nor
resolution. PDF displays documents in a way that is independent of the original
application software, hardware, and operating system used to create those
documents. A PDF document can contain any combination of text, graphics, and
images.
Appendix
PDF (Compact)
One of the file formats available in this machine. The text and image portions of an
original are processed separately to achieve a high level of compression without
compromising the quality of the text. The resulting file or data size is smaller than that
achieved by conventional PDF, and is therefore recommended for jobs that are to be
sent over the network.
14
14-32
Glossary
PDF (OCR)
A file format that performs OCR (Optical Character Recognition) processing on a
scanned document. This process extracts any recognizable text data, and adds it as a
transparent layer to create a PDF with searchable text. You can search the text using
Adobe Reader/Acrobat Reader/Acrobat, or your operating system's search function.
PDF (Trace)
A file format that converts the text and the line drawing portions of an original to
scalable outline data. The outline data (Trace) can be extracted and used in Adobe
Illustrator. The smoothing process can also be applied to the text of the outline data,
so it has less of a jagged edge when seen on a PC monitor or in print.
PIN Code
Personal Identification Number Code. To prevent unauthorized access to telephone
lines, some PBX (Private Branch Exchange) systems require that a PIN code be
entered when making a call or sending a document. Depending on the PBX system,
the PIN code may be entered before the number as a prefix, or after the number as a
suffix. If your PBX needs a PIN code to connect to an outside line, you can specify the
user data settings of the machine so that it prompts you for a PIN code every time you
dial.
Processing/Data indicator
The Processing/Data indicator blinks a green light when the machine is performing
operations, and maintains a steady green light when documents are stored in
memory.
Protocol
A set of rules that govern the transmission of data across a network. Examples of
protocols are FTP, DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, IPP, TCP/IP, and LDAP.
R
The density of dots attained by a device, such as a fax, scanner, or printer, in
producing an image. Expressed in terms of dots per inch (dpi). Low resolution causes
font characters and graphics to have a jagged appearance. Higher resolution means
smoother curves and angles, as well as a better match to traditional typeface designs.
Resolution values are represented by horizontal data and vertical data
(e.g., 600 x 600 dpi).
Appendix
Resolution
14
Glossary
14-33
RGB
Red (R), Green (G), and Blue (B) are the three primary colors of light. RGB is the
standard color model used in computer/television monitors, scanners, and digital
cameras. RGB is an additive system (colors are added to a black background),
typically produced by emitted light. The RGB color model blends varying intensities of
red, green, and blue light to create colors throughout the spectrum. A combination of
these colors in equal amounts produces white.
Rotary Pulse
Also called "pulse dial." On a rotary pulse telephone, a dial is turned to send pulses to
the telephone switching system.
RX
Abbreviation for "Reception/Receiving."
RX Password
The RX Password is needed to send or receive documents to and from a fax machine
that uses ITU-T standard subaddresses and passwords. If the passwords on both
ends do not match, the fax is not transmitted. Numbers of up to 20 digits, including
spaces, asterisks (*), and pound signs (#), can be used for the RX Password.
S
Scanning Area
The area actually scanned is slightly smaller than the size of the original document.
Therefore, words or images near the edges of the document may not be scanned. As
a result, make sure that there is some margin space on all sides of the document you
are sending.
Sender's Name
Your personal or organization's name. The sender's name, fax number, date, and time
are printed on each page you send to the recipient. You can register up to 99 sender
names.
Sequential Broadcast
Appendix
Sequential Broadcasting enables you to send a scanned document to up to 256
destinations simultaneously. If you frequently send documents to the same
destinations, it is highly recommended that you register the numbers as a group in a
one-touch button for group dialing.
14
SMB
Server Message Block. A protocol that provides file and printer sharing over a
network for Windows computers.
14-34
Glossary
SMB server
Server Message Block server. A server running the SMB protocol.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A TCP/IP protocol for sending messages from one
computer to another on a network.
SSL
Secure Sockets Layer. A protocol that ensures security and privacy when transmitting
private documents over the Internet.
SSL encryption
SSL uses two keys to encrypt data: a public key, which is known to "everyone," and a
private or secret key, which is known only to the recipient of the message.
Stamp
Applies a stamp (about 1/8" (3 mm) in diameter) on the front side of originals after
they have been scanned, so that you can distinguish already scanned originals from
others.
Standard
Use this setting to send normal, typewritten, or printed documents containing only
text and no drawings, photographs, or illustrations. See Fine, Super Fine, and Ultra
Fine.
Startup time
If the machine is connected to a switching hub, it may not be able to connect to a
network when it is powering ON. This occurs because the spanning tree process,
performed between switching hubs, prevents them from communicating with each
other immediately after the machine connects to the network. A delay in the startup
time is necessary for the machine to connect to the network properly.
Subaddress is the global telecommunications standard specified by the ITU-T
(International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector).
When the remote party's machine supports the same standard, confidential or
relayed communications are possible by attaching a subaddress and a password in
advance.
Subaddress Books
The main Address Book is subdivided into 10 smaller address books, which are
considered subaddress books.
Glossary
14-35
Appendix
Subaddress
14
Super Fine
A resolution mode for sending originals at four times the detail of the Standard
resolution mode. If the receiving machine does not support this mode, the document
is automatically sent in the Fine mode.
Super G3
Super G3 is a phrase used to describe the generation of fax machines that use ITU-T
V.34 standard 33.6 Kbps modems. Super G3 high-speed fax machines allow a
transmission time of approximately three seconds per page, which results in reduced
telephone line charges.
T
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The protocol used to connect to the
Internet and wide area networks.
Telephone Line Type
Depending on the type of phone line that you have, set the machine to touch tone (T)
or pulse (P) dialing.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format. A file format that saves images as high-density bitmaps,
and is suitable for large amounts of image data. The information field (tag) at the start
of each image data record indicates the type of data represented.
Tone
Some data services may require that you use tone dialing. If you have a pulse dial
telephone, press [Tone] to switch temporarily from pulse to tone dialing when
connecting to these data services.
Transmission Time
Appendix
A fax transmission consists of three stages: the machine that sends the fax connects
with the machine receiving it; the fax is then transmitted, after which the sender and
the recipient exchange signals to confirm the end of transmission. The transmission
time described in this guide is not the total time required for the entire send/receive
transaction, but only the time it takes for the machine to transmit the fax document.
TTI
Transmit Terminal Identification. Also called the TX Terminal ID. The TTI is the name
of a person or an organization and the facsimile number of the machine that sends a
document. In addition to the unit name that you register for the machine, you can
create up to 99 sender names that can be used in place of the unit's name when you
send a fax document.
14
14-36
Glossary
TX
Abbreviation for "Transmission/Sending."
U
UFR II
Ultra Fast Rendering II. A printing algorithm for realizing high-speed rendering. UFR II
enables processing tasks to be executed and divided appropriately between the host
PC and the printer to greatly reduce overall printing time.
Ultra Fine
A resolution mode for sending originals at 16 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm (eight times
the standard resolution). If the receiving fax machine does not support this mode, the
original is automatically sent in the Super Fine or Fine mode.
User signature
Adds a digital signature to a private document, based on the registered user
information when logging on using a login service. This prevents unauthorized access
and alterations to the signed document.
W
WebDAV
Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning. Enables users to collaboratively
edit and manage files on remote Web servers. WebDAV features XML data locking
properties, which prevents authors from overwriting each other's changes.
WebDAV server
Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning server. Storing files and folders on a
WebDAV server enables users to share them over the Internet.
Y
YCbCr is a color space used in video systems. Y is the luminance component, and
Cb and Cr the chrominance components. YcbCr was defined in the ITU-601 (formerly
CCIR-602) standard for use with digital component video.
Appendix
YCbCr
14
Glossary
14-37
Index
Numerics
ASCII code, 14-25
2 On 1 Log, 9-43
Automatic document deletion, 9-11
Auto Redial, 9-48, 14-25
2-Page separation, 4-4
2-Sided Original, 3-4
2-Sided Print, 9-37
B
Before using this machine
A
Registering the machine's fax number, 1-16
Abbreviations used in this manual, xv
Registering the Sending Record, 1-12
Access Number Management, 11-18
Registering the unit's name, 1-18
Activity Report, 12-5, 14-11, 14-25
Selecting the type of telephone line, 1-14
Address Book
Setting the date and time, 1-14
Registering sender names, 1-17
About the Address Book, 10-2
Setting the display language, 1-13
Access Number Management, 11-18
Setting the telephone line type, 1-11
Address Book List sample, 14-17
Things to do, 1-11
Address Book password, 11-17
Binding Erase, 4-5, 4-9
Editing addresses, 10-30
Book Frame Erase, 4-5, 4-7
Erasing addresses, 10-33
bps, 14-25
Naming the Address Book, 10-34
Printing the Address Book, 12-11
Storing new addresses, 10-5
C
Address Book Settings table, 10-2
Additional Functions, 9-3
Appendix
Additional Line
14
Canceling jobs
Using the Stop key, 1-37
Registering fax number, 9-52
Using the System Monitor screen, 1-37
Registering unit's name, 9-53
Using the touch panel display, 1-36
Selecting line, 9-55
Cc and Bcc addresses, setting, 2-33
Selecting telephone line type, 9-54
CCITT/ITU-T, 14-26
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder), 14-25
CMYK, 14-26
Allow fax driver TX, 11-19
Color modes
Allow PDF Send with Expired Certificates, 11-22
Always Add PDF Device Signature to Send PDF,
11-23
14-38
Index
Automatic color selection (Full Color/
Black-and-White), 3-22
Automatic color selection (Full Color/
Grayscale), 3-21
Device Signature, 5-36, 5-37
User Signature, 5-36, 5-38
Black-and-white, 3-22
Direct Sending, 5-3, 14-27
Changing, 3-21
Disclaimers, xxiv
Full color, 3-22
Displaying Confirmation for Favorites Buttons,
9-21
Grayscale, 3-22
Communications Settings table, 9-6
Display language, setting, 1-13
Compact PDF, sending, 5-26
Displays used in this manual, xiv
Confidential Fax Inbox , 14-26
Divided Data RX Timeout, 11-7
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report sample, 14-9
DNS server, 14-27
Contrast
Document size
Adjusting, 4-13
About document sizes, 3-8
High, 4-13
Registering, 3-11
Low, 4-13
Specifying, 3-8
Copy Ratio/Zoom Ratio, 14-26
Domain, 14-27
Copyrights, xxiv
dpi, 14-27
D
E
Date and time, setting, 1-14
ECM, 1-3, 9-46, 9-51, 14-28
Data Compression Ratio, 9-12
E-mail settings, 11-6
Default Send screen, 9-30
Specify Authorized User Dest. Sender, 11-6
Delayed transmission, 14-26
E-mail/I-fax domain sending restriction, 11-21
Destinations, checking/changing, 2-35
E-mail/I-Fax Common settings, 11-5
Destinations, erasing
Default Subject, 11-5
From the Address Book, 10-33
Maximum Data Size for Sending, 11-5
From the destination list, 2-37
Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination,
11-5
Fax number, 2-2
Encrypted PDF, sending, 5-31
E-mail address, 2-6
Enlargement, 3-17
File server address, 2-11
Entered fax numbers, confirming, 11-20
I-fax address, 2-7
Error Indicator, 14-28
Sending to yourself, 2-23
Error messages, 13-9
User Inbox, 2-21
Error code list, 13-14
Appendix
Destinations, specifying Using New Address Tab
Ethernet, 14-28
14
Device Signature Certificate, confirming, 9-28
DHCP, 14-27
Dial Tone, checking, 9-50
Different Size Originals, 3-6
Digital Signature
Index
14-39
F
Footer information, printing, 9-42
Favorites Buttons
Forwarding Conditions List sample, 14-15
Forwarding, 14-28
About the Favorites Buttons, 9-17
Forwarding errors, handling, 9-13
Displaying confirmation, 9-21
Forwarding settings
Erasing, 9-20
About forwarding settings, 11-25
Naming, 9-18
Checking/Changing, 11-44
Registering, 9-17
Erasing, 11-45
Registering a Comment, 9-19
Forwarding without conditions, 11-38
Specifying, 2-27
Printing, 11-45
Fax Activity Report sample, 14-13
Storing, 11-26
Fax information services, 7-8
Fax jobs
Turning the forwarding function On/Off, 11-44
Frame Erase
Available paper sizes, 6-10
About Frame Erase, 4-5
Checking fax job details, 8-9
Binding Erase, 4-5, 4-9
Checking the status of fax jobs, 8-9
Book Frame Erase, 4-5, 4-7
Printing the Fax Activity Report, 8-11
Original Frame Erase, 4-5, 4-6
Use Fax Memory Lock, 11-12
FTP, 14-29
Fax Multi TX Report sample, 14-6
Fax number, registering, 1-16
Fax RX Report sample, 14-8
G
Fax settings
Adjusting the alarm and monitor volume, 9-45
Gamma value, setting, 9-35, 9-44
Auto Redial, 9-48, 14-25
Glossary, 14-25
ECM reception, 9-51
ECM transmission, 9-46
Pause Time, 9-47
I
Receive password, 11-9
I-fax, 14-29
Send/Receive start speed, 11-9
I-fax jobs
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report sample,
Appendix
14-5
14
Available paper size, 6-10
Checking the arrival of an I-fax, 8-13
FCC (Federal Communications Commission),
xvii
Use I-fax Memory Lock, 11-13
I-fax settings
File Format, setting
About file format, 5-22
Allow MDN Not Via Server, 11-8
Always send notice for RX errors, 11-7
File formats, 14-28
Divided Data RX Timeout, 11-7
File server, 14-28
Full Mode TX Timeout, 11-7
Fine, 14-23, 14-28
Print MDN/DSN on Receipt, 11-7
Flow of sending operations, 1-21
Use Send Via Server, 11-7
14-40
Index
Illustrations used in this manual, xv
Disclaimers, xxiv
Image Quality Adjustment
FCC (Federal Communications Commission),
xvii
About Image Quality Adjustment, 4-14
Prevent Bleeding, 4-14, 4-16
Remove Background, 4-14
Super G3, xxiii
Line type, setting, 1-11
imageWARE, 14-29
Log on, 14-30
imageWARE Document Manager Gateway,
Long distance, 10-8, 14-30
14-29
Important Safety Instructions, xxv
Internet Protocol (IP), 14-29
IP address, 14-29
ITU-T, 1-3, 14-29
M
MEAP, 14-31
Memory lock, 14-31
Memory RX Inbox, 14-31
J
Memory RX Inbox settings
About Memory RX Inbox settings, 11-11
JBIG, 14-30
Memory Lock End Time, 11-15
Job Build, 4-10
Memory Lock Start Time, 11-13
Job Done Notice, 5-17
Setting the password, 11-11
Job Recall, 5-40
Settings for storing received faxes in memory,
11-12
JPEG, 5-24, 14-30
Settings for storing received I-fax documents in
memory, 11-13
K
Memory Sending, 5-3, 14-31
Keys used in this manual, xiv
N
LAN, 14-30
LDAP, 14-30
LDAP server settings
About LDAP server settings, 11-46
Changing the LDAP server settings, 11-51
Deleting an LDAP server, 11-51
Printing the LDAP server settings, 11-53
Registered LDAP server list, 14-16
Registering an LDAP server, 11-46
Legal notices
NetBEUI, 14-31
NetBIOS, 14-31
NetWare, 14-31
New addresses, storing
Addresses obtained via a server, 10-23
Appendix
L
E-mail addresses, 10-9
Fax numbers, 10-5
File server addresses, 10-17
14
Group Addresses, 10-19
I-fax addresses, 10-12
Using the Register key, 2-38
Copyrights, xxiv
Index
14-41
O
R
One-touch Buttons
Receive jobs
Erasing, 10-39
Checking receive job details, 8-12
Storing/Editing, 10-35
Checking the arrival of an I-fax, 8-13
Specifying, 2-26
Checking the status of forwarded jobs, 8-14
Original Frame Erase, 4-5, 4-6
Original type
Photo mode, 3-14
Text mode, 3-15
Text/Photo mode, 3-14
Checking the status of receive and forwarded
jobs, 8-12
Checking the status of receive jobs, 8-12
Printing the receive job log, 8-13
Receiving documents
OS/2, 14-32
2 on 1 log, 9-43
Overview, 1-6
About receiving documents, 6-3
Erasing received documents, 6-8
Forwarding received documents, 6-7
P
Printing footer information, 9-42
Paper drawer selection, 9-38
Paper sizes, 6-10
Pause, 2-3, 14-32
Pause Time, 9-47, 14-32
PBX, 7-5, 14-32
PDF, 14-32
PDF (Compact), 14-32
PDF (OCR), 9-24, 14-33
PDF (Trace & Smooth), 9-26
PDF Compression Priority, 9-22
Photo mode, 3-14
PIN code, 7-5, 14-33
Prevent Bleeding, 4-16
Previewing, 5-18
Appendix
Processing/Data indicator, 14-33
14
Protocol, 14-33
Reducing received documents, 9-40
Setting the Memory Lock mode, 6-7
Reduction, 3-17
Register key, 2-38
Registered destinations, specifying
Using the Address Book, 2-24
Using the Favorites Buttons, 2-27
Using the One-touch Buttons, 2-26
Using a server, 2-28
Remove Background, 4-14
Report settings
Activity Report, 12-5
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report, 12-10
Fax Activity Report, 12-8
Fax RX Report, 12-9
Fax TX Report, 12-7
Send TX Report, 12-4
Specifying, 12-4
Q
Report Settings table, 12-2
Q&A, 13-35
Restricting the Send Function, 11-17
Resolution, 3-12, 14-33
Restricting entering of new addresses, 11-18
Retry Times, 9-14
14-42
Index
RGB, 14-34
Rotary pulse, 1-11, 14-34
Checking/Changing the status of send jobs,
8-2
RX, 14-34
Printing the send job status/log, 8-8
RX password, 14-34
Resending jobs, 8-7
Send TX Report, 12-4, 14-3
Sender names, registering, 1-17
Samples
Activity Report, 14-11
Address Book List, 14-17
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report, 14-9
Fax Activity Report, 14-13
Fax Multi TX Report, 14-6
Fax RX Report, 14-8
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report, 14-5
Forwarding Conditions List, 14-15
Registered LDAP Server List, 14-16
Send Job List, 14-2
Send TX Report/Send Error TX Report, 14-3
User's Data List, 14-19
Scan exposure
Automatic exposure adjustment, 3-16
Manual exposure adjustment, 3-13
Scan mode, selecting, 3-2
Scan settings
Document size, 3-8
Erasing, 4-20
Original type, 3-13
Resolution, 3-12
Scan exposure, 3-13
Storing, 4-17
2-Sided original, 3-4
Scanning area, 14-34
Searchable PDF, sending, 5-29
Self-diagnostic display, 13-9
Send Job List sample, 14-2
Send jobs
Changing the destination, 8-5
Checking send job details, 8-2
Sender's name, 14-34
Sending a fax, 5-3
Sending fax document manually, 1-32
Sending methods
Delaying send jobs, 5-15
Job Done Notice, 5-17
Previewing, 5-18
Sending e-mail messages, 5-5
Sending a fax, 5-3
Sending an I-fax, 5-9
Sending jobs to a file server, 5-11
Sending jobs to User Inboxes, 5-14
Sending with a subaddress, 7-2
Stamping, 5-20
Sending record, registering, 1-12
Sequential broadcast, 1-40, 2-2, 14-34
Sharpness, 4-13
SMB, 14-34
SMTP, 14-35
Special Features, 4-2
Specifications, 14-21
Stamp, 5-20, 14-35
Standard, 14-35
Standard send settings, 9-15
Subaddress, 14-35
Subaddress, sending with, 7-2
Appendix
S
Subaddress books, 14-35
Super fine, 14-36
Super G3, xxiii, 14-36
14
Super G3 FAX Board, 14-23
Super G3 Multi-Line Fax Board, 1-13, 14-24
Symbols used in this manual, xiii
System environment
Index
14-43
FTP, 2-12
User Preset keys
NetWare (IPX), 2-12
About User Preset keys, 4-17
WebDAV, 2-13
Erasing scan settings, 4-20
Windows (SMB), 2-12
Naming a User Preset key, 4-19
System Settings table, 11-2
Storing scan settings, 4-17
User Signature Certificate, confirming, 9-29
Using a server, 2-28
T
User's data
TCP/IP, 14-36
Telephone Equipment, xxv
Printing, 12-12
User's Data List sample, 14-19
Telephone line, selecting the type, 1-14
Telephone line type, 14-36
Text mode, 3-15
Text/Photo mode, 3-14
W
WebDAV, sending, 9-34
TIFF, 5-24, 14-36
TIFF/JPEG Auto Select, 5-23, 9-16, 11-36, 11-43
TIFF/PDF Auto Select, 5-23, 9-16, 11-36, 11-43
Tone, 2-3, 7-8, 10-7, 14-36
Trace & Smooth, 5-28
Y
YCbCr, 9-35, 9-44, 14-37
Trademarks, xvi
Transmission time, 14-23, 14-36
Troubleshooting
Error messages, 13-9
Auto zoom, 3-19
Q&A, 13-35
Preset zoom, 3-17
Receiving documents, 13-5
Zoom by percentage, 3-19
TTI, 14-36
TX, 14-37
TX settings, initializing, 9-36
TX Terminal ID, printing, 9-31
Appendix
Zoom ratio
Other situations, 13-7
Sending documents, 13-2
14
Z
U
UFR II, 14-37
Ultra fine, 14-23, 14-37
Unit name, registering, 1-18
User inbox, 1-37, 2-21, 5-14
14-44
Index
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
(See http://www.canon-europe.com/ for details on your regional dealer)
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON CHINA CO., LTD
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
USRM1-2921-00
© CANON INC. 2007
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement